An Introduction to
AutoCAD 2D Drafting
Prepared by:
Yamanta Raj Niroula Instructor
PENTASOFT Baneshwor Centre
An Introduction to AutoCAD
PENTASOFT
TABLE OF CONTENTS COMPUTERS AND CAD
6
AN INTRODUCTION TO AUTOCAD
7
HARDWARE COMPONENTS OF AUTOCAD: RECOMMENDED HARDWARE
7 9
THE FIRST LOOK AT AUTOCAD
10
INTRODUCTION TO THE GUI: COMMUNICATING WITH AUTOCAD FUNCTION KEYS
10 13 13
CO-ORDINATE SYSTEMS IN AUTOCAD THE X, Y CO-ORDINATE SYSTEM: CARTESIAN AND POLAR COORDINATES: ANGULAR MEASUREMENT ENTERING POINTS IN AUTOCAD: ICONS, KEYSTROKES AND MENUS DIRECT DISTANCE ENTRY INTRODUCTION HOW DOES IT WORK? A WORKED EXAMPLE
14 14 15 16 17 17 19 19 19 20
BASIC AUTOCAD TERMINOLOGY
22
INTRODUCTION TO DRAWING AND MODIFY COMMANDS
25
DRAWING OBJECTS
25
INTRODUCTION Lines Absolute Co-ordinate System (x, y) Relative Rectangular Co-ordinate System (@ x distance, y distance) Relative Polar Co-ordinate System (@ distance < angle) Construction Lines and Rays: Construction Lines Rays Polygon Donut Revcloud 3D Polyline Circles and Arcs Circle Arc Ellipse Create and Combine Areas (Region): Wipeout Boundary Points and Point Styles Multilines Multiline Style: SOLID OBJECTS EDITING INTRODUCTION
Prepared by: Yamanta Raj Niroula
25 26 26 27 27 27 27 30 31 33 35 37 37 38 40 44 48 50 51 53 56 58 63 65 65
1
An Introduction to AutoCAD
PENTASOFT
Erase Objects: OOPS Move Objects: Copy Objects: The COPY Command: Copybase Copyclip Copyhist Copylink: Rotate Objects Create an Array of Objects: The ARRAY command: Create Breaks Mirror Objects: The MIRROR Command Offset an Object: The OFFSET Command Scale Objects: The SCALE Command Trim or Extend Objects: The TRIM Command: The EXTEND Command Stretch Objects: The STRETCH Command Use Grips to Edit Objects Use Grip Modes Make Multiple Copies with Grips Control Grips in Blocks Lengthen Objects The LENGTHEN Command Create Fillets The FILLET Command: Create Chamfers The CHAMFER Command Disassociate Compound Objects (Explode) The EXPLODE Command The RENAME Command Copy Properties Between Objects The MATCHPROP Command Tips & Tricks
65 66 66 68 69 70 70 70 71 71 73 75 80 82 83 84 85 86 86 87 89 92 95 96 97 97 99 100 101 101 103 107 111 114 117 118 119 121 121 123
CREATING AND WORKING WITH POLYLINES
124
THE POLYLINE FAMILY The PLINE Command The RECTANGLE Command MODIFYING POLYLINES The PEDIT Command: SPLINE MODIFY SPLINES Introduction Edit Splines with Grips Refine the Shape of a Spline The SPLINEDIT Command: ZOOMING AND PANNING INTRODUCTION: The ZOOM Command Zoom Shortcut Menu PANNING A VIEW PAN AND ZOOM WITH THE AERIAL VIEW WINDOW The DSVIEWER Command UNITS & SCALES
Prepared by: Yamanta Raj Niroula
124 126 131 132 133 141 144 144 144 145 145 152 152 152 155 156 158 160 162
2
An Introduction to AutoCAD INTRODUCTION UNITS CONTROL The UNITS Command LINEAR UNITS ANGULAR UNITS UNIT PRECISION DRAWING LIMITS The LIMITS Command SELECTING OBJECTS IN AUTOCAD THE SELECT COMMAND OBJECT CYCLING: CREATING QUICK SELECTION SETS The QSELECT Command SELECTION SET FILTERS The FILTER Command CREATING NAMED SELECTION SET OF OBJECTS (GROUP) The GROUP Command WORKING WITH LAYERS AND LINETYPES LAYERS: The LAYER Command Layer Properties Manager Layer Property Types: Layer Display States Changing Layer Display Properties: Named Layer Filters WORKING WITH LINETYPES: Loading Linetypes: Setting Current Linetype: Changing the Linetype of an Object: Controlling Linetype Scale: Displaying Linetypes on Short Segments and Polylines THE LINETYPE COMMAND Linetype Manager OBJECT PROPERTIES DISPLAY AND CHANGE THE PROPERTIES OF OBJECTS The PROPERTIES Command ANNOTATING THE DRAWING INTRODUCTION CREATING TEXT AND LEADERS Creating Single Line Text The TEXT Command Creating Multiline Text Justifying Multiline Text Creating Stacked Characters Within Multiline Text The MTEXT Command WORKING WITH TEXT STYLES: The STYLE Command HATCHING AREAS AND EDITING HATCHES THE BHATCH COMMAND ADVANCED HATCH OPTIONS The Direct Hatch Option: EDITING A HATCH PATTERN: CREATING YOUR OWN HATCH PATTERN: THE SUPER HATCH COMMAND: DIMENSIONING
Prepared by: Yamanta Raj Niroula
PENTASOFT 162 163 163 165 166 167 168 168 170 170 172 173 173 174 175 177 178 185 185 186 187 187 189 190 190 192 192 193 193 194 195 195 196 200 200 201 205 205 205 206 207 210 211 212 213 215 217 221 221 230 231 231 232 232 234
3
An Introduction to AutoCAD
PENTASOFT
DIMENSIONING BASICS PARTS OF A DIMENSION ASSOCIATIVE DIMENSIONS LINEAR DIMENSIONS The DIMLINEAR Command The DIMALIGNED Command BASELINE AND CONTINUED DIMENSIONS The DIMCONTINUE Command The DIMBASELINE Command CHANGING THE TEXT RADIAL DIMENSIONS The DIMDIAMETER Command The DIMRADIUS Command The DIMCENTER Command ANGULAR DIMENSIONS The DIMANGULAR Command ORDINATE DIMENSIONS The DIMORDINATE Command USING DIMENSION STYLES: The DIMSTYLE Command ADDING GEOMETRIC TOLERANCES Material Conditions Datum Reference Frames Projected Tolerance Zones Composite Tolerances ANNOTATION WITH LEADERS The Leader Command MODIFY EXISTING DIMENSIONS Apply a New Dimension Style to Existing Dimensions Override a Dimension Style Modify Dimension Text The DIMTEDIT Command Modify Dimension Geometry The DIMREASSOCIATE Command EXTRACTING OR CALCULATING GEOMETRIC INFORMATION FROM OBJECTS (INQUIRY COMMANDS) The ID Command The LIST Command OBTAINING DISTANCES, ANGLES, AND POINT LOCATIONS: The DIST Command OBTAINING AREA INFORMATION The AREA Command OTHER INQUIRY TOOLS: The TIME Command The STATUS Command The SETVAR Command OBJECT SNAP INTRODUCTION USING OBJECT SNAPS Snap to a Single Point Running Object Snaps Object Snap Restrictions GRID AND GRID SNAP Change Grid and Snap Spacing Change the Snap Angle and Base Point ORTHOGONAL LOCKING (ORTHO MODE) POLAR TRACKING AND POLARSNAP Polar Angles (Polar Tracking) Polar Distances (PolarSnap) COMBINE OR OFFSET POINTS AND COORDINATES
Prepared by: Yamanta Raj Niroula
234 235 236 237 238 241 243 244 245 247 247 248 250 251 252 252 254 256 257 257 277 279 279 280 280 281 281 283 283 284 285 285 287 290 292 292 292 293 293 293 294 298 298 299 300 302 302 303 303 303 304 306 306 306 308 308 309 309 311
4
An Introduction to AutoCAD Combine Coordinate Values (Coordinate Filters) OBJECT SNAPTRACKING SNAP TOOLS OBJECT SNAPS RUNNING OBJECT SNAPS OBJECT SNAP CYCLING USING TEMPORARY TRACKING POINTS OBJECT SNAP TRACKING POINT FILTERS AUTOCAD 2004 COMMAND ALIASES 3D A B C D E F G H I L M O P Q R S T U V W X Z
Prepared by: Yamanta Raj Niroula
PENTASOFT 311 312 314 316 320 322 322 323 324 325 325 325 326 326 326 327 327 327 327 328 328 328 329 329 329 330 330 331 331 331 331 332 332
5
An Introduction to AutoCAD
PENTASOFT
Computers and CAD Computer Aided Design (CAD) can be defined as the use of computer systems to assist in the creation, modification, analysis or optimization of a design. The computer systems consist of the hardware and software to perform the specialized design functions required by the particular user firm. When we think of Computer Aided Design (CAD), certain questions arise that we never think of while working on the drawing board. We do not use the essential drawing board tools: paper, pencil, T-square, compass, eraser or scale, yet still have to design or make a drawing. When even one of these tools is missing we know how aggravating it can be. With CAD we don’t need even one of them! CAD is an electronic tool that enables you to make quick and accurate drawings with the use of a computer. Unlike the traditional methods of making drawings on a drawing board, with CAD you can sit back in an easy chair and create wonderful drawings just by clicking the buttons of a keyboard. Moreover, drawings created with CAD have a number of advantages over drawings created on a drawing board. CAD drawings are neat, clean and highly presentable. Electronic drawings can be modified quite easily and can be presented in a variety of formats. A decade ago, CAD was used only for specific engineering applications that required high precision. Due to CAD’s high price, only a few professionals could afford it. In recent years, however, computer prices have decreased significantly and more and more professionals are taking advantage of CAD. There are hundreds of CAD programs available in the CAD industry today. Some are intended for general drawing work while others are focused on specific engineering applications. There are programs that enable you to do 2D drawings, 3D drawings, renderings, shadings, engineering calculations, space planning, structural design, piping layouts, plant design, project management, etc. There is a CAD program for virtually every engineering discipline you can think of. CAD is primarily intended for single-line drafting. It has very limited capabilities to create artistic impressions. However, CAD’s 3D and rendering features are fascinating. You can create a 3D model of an object and view it from any angle. With proper shading and rendering, it can be made to look picture perfect! You can do amazing things with CAD that you never thought possible while creating drawings with a pen or pencil. The following are some of the important capabilities that make CAD a powerful tool: • • • • • • • • • •
Presentations Flexibility in editing Units & accuracy levels Storage and access for drawings Sharing CAD drawings Project reporting Engineering analysis Computer Aided Manufacturing (CAM) Design Add-on programs
Prepared by: Yamanta Raj Niroula
6
An Introduction to AutoCAD
PENTASOFT
An Introduction to AutoCAD Welcome to the world of CAD - In this tutorial you will be learning the basics of AutoCAD – the most popular PC based 2D and 3D CAD system from the Autodesk Inc. Autodesk, the US based and fourth largest software firm in the world, is the publisher of AutoCAD. Apart from AutoCAD, Autodesk has a spectrum of products for various disciplines as follows • • • •
Mechanical - AutoCAD Mechanical, Autodesk Inventor Series. AEC - Architectural Desktop, Autodesk Civil Design, Autodesk VIZ, Autodesk Revit. GIS - Autodesk MAP, Autodesk Land Desktop, Autodesk Map Guide R to V - Autodesk Raster Design.
Hardware Components of AutoCAD: The following are the main hardware components of AutoCAD: • • • • • • • • •
System unit Central processing unit Memory Hard disk, floppy disk, CD-ROM External storage devices Monitor Printers and plotters Keyboard Digitizer, puck and mouse
• System Unit: The system unit is the computer that is used for all data processing. The main components of the system units are the central processing unit (CPU) and memory. In mainframe and minicomputers CPU and memory are usually separate compartments that house thousands of devices. In today' s PCs, however, they all fit in a small box commonly known as a desktop computer. Most desktop computers today come equipped with a hard disk, floppy disk drive and CD ROM. Let' s have a look at the components of a system unit: • • •
Central Processing Unit(CPU) Memory Hard disk, floppy disk, CD-ROM
• External Storage Devices: There are a number of external storage devices available such as magnetic tapes, zip drives and removable hard disks. They are commonly used to keep backup copies of
Prepared by: Yamanta Raj Niroula
7
An Introduction to AutoCAD
PENTASOFT
electronic files for safekeeping. Magnetic tapes are quite common for storing large volumes of data. A magnetic tape that looks like a small videocassette can store thousands of megabytes of data. However, they are quite slow and require a lot of time to store or retrieve data. Zip drives were introduced recently; they use zip disks to store data. A zip disk is like an upgraded version of floppy disk that can store about 100MB of data. They are particularly helpful if you plan to use AutoCAD or other graphic programs that generate quite big data files. You can store an entire project on one zip disk that could take 50 or more floppy disks. Another new option for data storage is the removable hard disk. You can remove the entire hard disk from your computer and use it on another computer. This approach is commonly used when you need to work on different computers and you want the same information to be available instantly.
• The Monitor: The monitor is the computer screen and is used to display information. A good monitor is very important for AutoCAD in order to display fine graphics. A color monitor is essential because many AutoCAD drawing techniques are based on colors. Monitors are available in various sizes ranging from 13" to 30" or more. Today, average monitors have the ability to display millions of colors. The main factor that determines the quality of a monitor is the resolution. The term resolution refers to sharpness of an image displayed on the screen. Resolution is measured by the number of picture elements (pixels) that a screen can display. The more pixels and the closer they are, the sharper the image. The distance between pixels is called the "dot-pitch". The smaller the dot-pitch, the sharper the image. A 26 or smaller dotpitch monitor is recommended for AutoCAD applications.
• Printers and Plotters AutoCAD drawings are printed using fine-quality printers and plotters. Drawings are neat and clean and as accurate as the naked eye can see. You can print drawings at as much as 1200-dpi (dots per inch) accuracy. This means 1200 dots are printed in a oneinch-long line! All the text dimensions and other graphics are printed highly accurate, neat and crisp. You can print drawings with a lot of variations; for example, drawings can be printed with different sizes, line types, text fonts and colors. There are a variety of printers and plotters available in the computer industry. They work on different principles and their prices vary significantly. There are many types of pen plotters, ink-jet printers, laser printers and plotters, electrostatic printers, etc.
• Digitizer, Puck and Mouse The digitizer (also known as a graphic tablet) and the puck are the data input devices most commonly used in CAD systems. These devices allow you to enter point locations on the screen and to make selections from the menus. As the puck is moved over the surface of the digitizer, it moves the indicator (cursor) on the screen relatively. To enter a point, you need to position the cursor at the appropriate position on the screen and then press the "Enter" button on the puck. Digitizers are available in many sizes and
Prepared by: Yamanta Raj Niroula
8
An Introduction to AutoCAD
PENTASOFT
styles. A number of commands are printed on the digitizer surface. To enter a command, place the puck over the desired command and press the "Enter" button. The selected command is instantly entered. The puck buttons are configured to perform many other tasks. For example, one button is used to make selections, another to enter the data, another to return to the previous menu and another to cancel the last command. A mouse is another pointing device that can be used with CAD. Like the puck, the mouse allows you to control the position of the cursor on the screen by rolling it across a flat surface, but it does not require a digitizer. Some programs support working with a mouse only, while others support both the mouse and the digitizer. A mouse is much cheaper than a digitizer or puck, but provides only limited data entry options.
Recommended Hardware Listed below are the hardware requirements for running AutoCAD 2004 on any system. • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
Pentium III (500 MHZ) or later 128 MB RAM 1024 x 768 VGA with True Color Installation 300 MB hard-disk space Pointing device (mouse or digitizer with Wintab driver) CD-ROM Drive -any speed (for installation only) Windows XP Professional, Windows 2000,Windows NT 4.0 with SP 6a or later Microsoft Internet Explorer 6.0 IBM-compatible parallel port Serial port (for digitizer and some plotters) Printer or plotter Modem (connection to Internet) Sound card for multimedia learning TCP/IP or IPX support (required only for multi-user, or floating license configuration)
Prepared by: Yamanta Raj Niroula
9
An Introduction to AutoCAD
PENTASOFT
The First Look at AutoCAD Launching AutoCAD is easy. Just double-click the desktop or start the application by clicking, Start Programs Autodesk
shortcut on the
AutoCAD 2004 AutoCAD 2004.
After a few moments, you could see the AutoCAD interface as shown in the following figure. Take a look at it and familiarize with the various components of the Graphical User Interface (GUI) of AutoCAD.
Introduction to the GUI: The AutoCAD program window is divided into following parts: • • • • • • •
Title Bar Pull-down Menu bar Toolbars Drawing Area Scroll Bar Command Window Status Bar
• Title Bar: is.
This will show you what program you are running and what the current filename
• Pull-down menu Bar: Menus are available from the menu bar at the top of the AutoCAD drawing area. These are the standard pull-down menus through which you can access almost all commands. You can choose menu options in the following ways: 1. Click the menu name to display a list of options. Click the option to choose it, or press DOWN ARROW to move down the list and then press ENTER. 2. Press ALT and then enter the underlined letter in the menu name. For example, to open a new drawing, press ALT and press F to open the File menu. Then press ENTER to choose the highlighted option New.
Prepared by: Yamanta Raj Niroula
10
An Introduction to AutoCAD
PENTASOFT
The default menu file is acad.mnu. You can specify a different menu (for example, a menu you have customized) in the Options dialog box, Files tab.
• Toolbars: There are many toolbars available in AutoCAD. Go to View > Toolbars from the drop down menu to see them all. For now make sure that the following toolbars are checked: Draw Modify -
Contains AutoCAD’s most common drawing tools Contains all of the common editing commands such as erase, copy etc. Object Properties - Contains ' layer'information as well as object colors and linestyle options. . Standard Toolbar - Contains open & save options as well as zoom & pan options. Object Snap AutoCAD' s intelligent drawing aid - joins lines at specific points. The toolbar has most of the standard Windows icons, as well as the most common AutoCAD commands. Toolbars contain buttons that start commands. When you move the pointing device over a toolbar button, the tooltip displays the name of the button. Buttons with a small black triangle in the lower-right corner have flyouts that contain related commands. With the cursor over the icon, hold down the pick button until the flyout appears. The Standard toolbar at the top of the drawing area is displayed by default. This toolbar is similar to those found in Microsoft Office programs. It contains frequently used AutoCAD commands such as DIST, PAN, and ZOOM, as well as Microsoft Office standard commands such as New, Open, and Save. AutoCAD initially displays several toolbars: • • • • • •
Standard toolbar Styles toolbar Layers toolbar Properties toolbar Draw toolbar Modify toolbar
You can display or hide these toolbars, and you can create your own toolbars. Toolbars can be moved from their default locations to any location on the screen. When they are in their default location, they are in their docked position. When they are in their default location where they are free floating, they are floating. A floating toolbar is located anywhere in the drawing area of the AutoCAD window, and you can drag it to a new location, resize it, or dock it. A docked toolbar is attached to any edge of the drawing area. While a toolbar is docked, it cannot be resized. You can move a docked toolbar by dragging it to a new docking location.
Prepared by: Yamanta Raj Niroula
11
An Introduction to AutoCAD
PENTASOFT
• The Drawing Area: The drawing area is the workspace that occupies most part of the AutoCAD window. Everything that we draw appears in the drawing area. This is where you draw. You have an almost infinite area to draw and this is just a ' section'of the entire space.
• Scrollbars: These work like in other windows programs. You can also use the PAN command to move around your drawing.
• Status Bar: This allows to see and change different modes of drawing such as ORTHO, OSNAP, GRID, OTRACK etc.
A typical arrangement of elements in AutoCAD 2004 window
• Command Window: The command window appears at the bottom of the AutoCAD screen (as shown above) and displays the commands entered. Commands can be entered into the command line in text format, or by using the icons or drop down menus. ' Old School'CAD users tend to type each command into the command line, as was required with older versions of
Prepared by: Yamanta Raj Niroula
12
An Introduction to AutoCAD
PENTASOFT
AutoCAD. It is much quicker to familiarize yourself with the tool bars and drop down menus. When you type a command, you will see it in command window. AutoCAD uses this space to ' prompt'you for information. It will give you a lot of information and tell you where you are in the command.
Communicating with AutoCAD AutoCAD is a perfect servant: it does everything you tell it to and no more. You can communicate with AutoCAD using the pull-down menus, screen menus, command line and the buttons on the toolbars. A command is a single-word instruction from the user to perform the required task. When you invoke a command, AutoCAD responds by presenting messages in the command prompt area, or by displaying a dialog box. The messages in the command prompt area often tell you, what to do next, or they offer a lot of options. A dialog box is like a form, you fill out on the computer screen. It lets you to adjust settings or make selections from a set of options pertaining to a command.
Function Keys AutoCAD provides a set of function keys for quick access to certain commands. Listed below are the function keys defined for AutoCAD. You might be referring to this list of function keys very often. Function Key
Function Defined in AutoCAD
F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 F7 F8 F9 F10 F11
Online Help Toggles between Command Window On and Off Toggles between OSNAP On and Off Toggles between Tablet On and Off Switches among Isoplanes Top, Right and Left Toggles between Coordinates On and Off Toggles between Grid On and Off Toggles between Ortho Mode On and Off Toggles between Snap Mode On and Off Toggles between Polar Tracking On and Off Toggles between Objects Snap Tracking On and Off
Prepared by: Yamanta Raj Niroula
13
An Introduction to AutoCAD
PENTASOFT
Co-ordinate Systems in AutoCAD This lesson will explain coordinate systems which are crucial to understanding AutoCAD® and how to create drawings and objects. Below you will see a coordinate system with several points labeled. Notice the two thick lines on the coordinate system. The thick horizontal line is called the x-axis. The thick vertical line is called the y-axis. The intersection of these two lines is a point called the origin. The origin is the beginning reference point of the coordinate system. Any other point on the coordinate system is relative to the origin. The thin lines mark evenly spaced distances from the origin. The actual distance does not usually matter, as long as it is evenly spaced because a coordinate system is just a representation of something else. In AutoCAD®, a coordinate system is usually a representation of space. Another example of a coordinate system could be time. You may want to draw a rectangle that is 2 units long and 1 unit high. You could start at the origin and move to the right 2 units, and then up 1 unit. This would be a rectangle of the proportion that you wanted. The lower left corner of this rectangle would be the origin. The upper right corner of this rectangle would be 2 units on the x-axis, and 1 unit on the y-axis. You would refer to these as the x-coordinate or just x, and the ycoordinate or just the y. You would write these in a comma notation, first the x, then the y and sometimes you would put them in parentheses. So the coordinates for the upper right corner of our box would be (2,1). The coordinates for the lower left corner of our box would be (0,0), which are the coordinates of the origin. You should note that these coordinates are marks of points, not spaces or blocks, just a point of an intersection of a specified x and a specified y. You may specify points to the left of the x-axis or below the y-axis by specifying negative points. You can see some negative points labeled at -2,-1 and at -3,2 and at 1,-3. Coordinates do not have to be whole numbers. They may be fractions or decimals. In AutoCAD®, a grid is not used, but you are shown a rather open space known as the drawing area. A symbol called the UCS labels the origin and has arrows to specify the xaxis and the y-axis. Below, you will see a screenshot of AutoCAD® with lines drawn on top of the UCS symbol to further emphasize the x-axis and the y-axis which usually remain invisible.
The X, Y co-ordinate system: All drawings are superimposed on an invisible grid, or co-ordinate system, with a horizontal X-axis and a vertical Y-axis. You can establish grid and snap settings that match the units of the co-ordinate system or some multiple or fraction of it.
Prepared by: Yamanta Raj Niroula
14
An Introduction to AutoCAD
PENTASOFT
As you draw, you can enter co-ordinates to locate a point. For example, you can draw a line by starting it at the 2,2 location in the co-ordinate system and end it at the 8,2 location, as shown in the above figure. This is called the Absolute Co-ordinate System. The X value of a Cartesian coordinate specifies the horizontal distance, and the Y value specifies the vertical distance. The origin point (0,0) indicates where the two axes intersect. Absolute co-ordinate values are based on the origin (0,0). Relative co-ordinate values are based on the very last point entered. They are useful for finding a series of points that are at a known distance apart. Various methods of entering 2D coordinates in AutoCAD are discussed below. Everything that you draw in AutoCAD is exact. It will be more accurate than you will ever need it to be. All objects drawn on the screen are placed there based on a simple X,Y co-ordinate system. In AutoCAD this is known as the World Co-ordinate System (WCS). You must understand this to know how to put things where you want them. (3-D work has an added axis, the Z-axis) When a command prompts you for a point, you can use the pointing device to specify a point, or you can enter a coordinate value on the command line. You can enter two-dimensional coordinates as either Cartesian or polar coordinates.
Cartesian and Polar Coordinates: A Cartesian coordinate system has three axes, X, Y, and Z. When you enter coordinate values, you indicate a point' s distance (in units) and its direction (+ or -) along the X, Y, and Z axes relative to the coordinate system origin (0, 0, 0).
Prepared by: Yamanta Raj Niroula
15
An Introduction to AutoCAD
PENTASOFT
In 2D, you specify points on the XY plane, also called the construction plane. The construction plane is similar to a flat sheet of grid paper. The X value of a Cartesian coordinate specifies horizontal distance, and the Y value specifies vertical distance. The origin point (0, 0) indicates where the two axes intersect. Polar coordinates use a distance and an angle to locate a point. With both Cartesian and polar coordinates, you can enter absolute coordinates based on the origin (0,0), or relative coordinates based on the last point specified. Another method of entering a relative coordinate is by moving the cursor to specify a direction and then entering a distance directly. This method is called direct distance entry. In AutoCAD, you can enter coordinates in scientific, decimal, engineering, architectural, or fractional notation. You can enter angles in grads, radians, surveyor' s units, or degrees, minutes, and seconds. You specify this style in the Units Control dialog box. In order to work effectively with AutoCAD, you have to work with this system. Until you are comfortable and familiar with it, learning AutoCAD will be more of a chore. My experience in teaching is that the better a student is with co-ordinates, the better CAD draftsperson they are.
How it works: AutoCAD uses points to determine where an object is located. There is an origin where it begins counting from. This point is (0,0). Every object is located in relation to the origin. If you were to draw a line straight out to the right from the origin, this would be considered the positive X-axis. If you were to draw a line straight up, this would be the positive Y-axis. The point located at (9,6). This means that the point is 9 units over in the X-axis and 6 units up in the Y-axis. When you are working with points, X always comes first. The other point shown is (-10,-5). This means that the point is 10 units in the negative X-axis (left) and 5 units in the negative Y-axis (down). A line has two points, a start point and an end point. AutoCAD works with the points to display the line on the screen. Move your cursor over the picture above and you will see line drawn from the absolute points of (-10,-5) to (9,6). Most of the time you will not have an indication of where the origin is. You may need to draw a line from the endpoint of an existing line. To do this you use relative points. These work the same way, but you have to add the @ symbol (shift+2) to tell AutoCAD that this next point is relative from the last point entered. It’s a simple system, but mastering it is the key to working with AutoCAD and is explained below.
Angular Measurement AutoCAD measures angles in a particular way also. Look at the diagram below and then place your mouse on it to see how this is done.
Prepared by: Yamanta Raj Niroula
16
An Introduction to AutoCAD
PENTASOFT
When drawing lines at an angle, you have to begin measuring the angle from 0 degrees, which is at the 3 o' clock position. If you drew a line at 90 degrees, it would go straight up. The example above (when you move your mouse over it) shows a line drawn at +300 degrees, or -60 degrees. You might not always have an obvious reference point for 0 degrees.
Entering Points in AutoCAD: You can enter points directly on the command line using three different systems. The one you use will depend on which is more applicable for the situation. The first assignment will get you used to this. The three systems are as follows: ABSOLUTE CO-ORDINATES - Using this method, you enter the points as they relate to the origin of the WCS. To enter a point, just enter in the exact point as X, Y. RELATIVE CO-ORDINATES - This allows you to enter points in relation to the first point you have entered. After you' ve entered one point, the next would be entered as @X, Y. This means that AutoCAD will draw a line from the first point to another point X units over and Y units up relative to the previous point. POLAR CO-ORDINATES - You would use this system if you know that you want to draw a line a certain distance at a particular angle. You would enter this as @D
Icons, Keystrokes and Menus There are many ways to do things in most windows programs. AutoCAD is no exception. Everyone will develop a way that works best for him or her. In this course, we will primarily be working with the keystroke commands. The reason for this is because they will work in most AutoCAD versions (including DOS versions), and in some other CAD programs. The icons work well, but as you will see, icons can be placed anywhere on the screen and can be difficult to find quickly. The pull-down menus will access almost all commands, but are a slower way of doing things.
Example: If you want to draw a line, you can do it a few ways:
Prepared by: Yamanta Raj Niroula
17
An Introduction to AutoCAD • • •
PENTASOFT
At the command line type: LINE (or) L and press the ENTER key. Select the line icon from the DRAW toolbar. Select Draw Line from the pull-down menu.
All three approaches will do the same thing: prepare AutoCAD to draw a line where you tell it. AutoCAD is a popular program because it can be customized to suit an individual' s needs. The toolbars are a good example of this. You can have the toolbars you use most often on the screen all the time. You can easily make them go away so that you have more drawing space. You can also customize them so you have the most common commands on one toolbar. For example, the dimensioning toolbar is one that you will not want taking up space on your screen while drawing, but is very handy when you' re dimensioning your drawing.
Prepared by: Yamanta Raj Niroula
18
An Introduction to AutoCAD
PENTASOFT
Direct Distance Entry Introduction To specify a line length quickly, without entering coordinate values, you can specify a point by moving the cursor to indicate a direction and then entering the distance from the first point. You can use direct distance entry to specify points for all commands requiring more than one point. When ORTHO mode or polar tracking is on, this method is an efficient way to draw lines of specified length and direction. Direct distance entry is one of those AutoCAD features that is often overlooked. This is rather unfortunate because it can be extremely useful and an amazing time-saver. Basically, direct distance entry enables you to draw an object, such as a line, by pointing in a particular direction with the cursor and entering a distance at the command line.
How does it work? Say, for example, you wanted to draw a horizontal line with a length of 30 drawing units. Start the Line command, Draw Line from the pull-down menu or from the Draw toolbar. When prompted, to specify the first point for the line, pick a point somewhere on the left side of the drawing area. You now need to constrain the line to the horizontal. You can do this using Polar Tracking. Use the POLAR button on the status bar to turn on Polar Tracking. Usually, Polar Tracking is on by default, so you may not need to do this. Now, move your cursor to the right of the first pick point. If you are within a few degrees of the horizontal, you should see something similar to the illustration on the right. Hold your cursor in this position and simply enter 30 at the keyboard. When you hit the Return key, a line segment is drawn, 30 units long and in the direction you were pointing. Obviously, you could vary this sequence to get different effects. If you only want to draw horizontal or vertical lines, you could use Ortho rather than Polar Tracking. Or, you could configure polar tracking to snap to other angles like 45º or 30º. You might even want to turn both Ortho and Polar Tracking off and use free angles. It' s also worth pointing out that when Polar Tracking has snapped to an angle, as in the illustration above, a Tool Tip is displayed. This Tool Tip displays a relative polar co-ordinate from the first pick point to the current cursor position. The first number is the distance between the two points and it can be quite useful as a drawing guide since the value updates dynamically. below.
To get a clearer idea how direct distance entry works, follow the worked example
Prepared by: Yamanta Raj Niroula
19
An Introduction to AutoCAD
PENTASOFT
A Worked Example In this exercise, we will use direct distance entry to draw the closed shape shown below using the associated dimensions. •
Check that you have either Polar Tracking or Ortho mode turned on.
•
Start the Polyline command, Draw the Draw toolbar.
•
When prompted to specify the first point, pick a point somewhere in the lower left quadrant of the drawing area. This will be the point marked "start" in the illustration.
Polyline from the pull-down menu or from
Now, follow the command sequence below. In each case, point the cursor in the direction you want the line drawn and enter the distance for that particular line segment at the keyboard. Point up Specify next point or [Arc/Halfwidth/Length/Undo/Width]: 40 Point right Specify next point or [Arc/Close/Halfwidth/Length/Undo/Width]: 15 Point down Specify next point or [Arc/Close/Halfwidth/Length/Undo/Width]: 25 Point right Specify next point or [Arc/Close/Halfwidth/Length/Undo/Width]: 20 Point up Specify next point or [Arc/Close/Halfwidth/Length/Undo/Width]: 25 Point right Specify next point or [Arc/Close/Halfwidth/Length/Undo/Width]: 15 Point down Specify next point or [Arc/Close/Halfwidth/Length/Undo/Width]: 40 You should now be at the point marked "end" on the illustration. All you need to do now is enter "C" to close the polyline and end the command. Specify next point or [Arc/Close/Halfwidth/Length/Undo/Width]: C
The closed polyline shape you have drawn is located arbitrarily because you just picked a start point somewhere in the drawing area. If you had wanted to start at a particular location, you could have entered a co-ordinate value for the start point instead of just picking.
Prepared by: Yamanta Raj Niroula
20
An Introduction to AutoCAD
PENTASOFT
Obviously, the exercise above is a very simple example but there are many circumstances where direct distance entry can be used. It' s a very useful tool to add to your AutoCAD skills toolbox and can help you towards greater drawing efficiency.
Prepared by: Yamanta Raj Niroula
21
An Introduction to AutoCAD
PENTASOFT
Basic AutoCAD Terminology Here are some basic terms that you will need to know to begin using AutoCAD. Absolute co-ordinates
A way of inputting points based on AutoCAD' s origin.
Acad.dwt
This is the default template that automatically loads whenever you start a drawing session. It can be customized.
Associated Dimensioning
Dimensions that are associated with specific points will update as that point is moved.
Backup file
AutoCAD can be set to automatically backup your drawing and save it. This is a safeguard in case your file gets corrupted. It is saved with a .BAK extension
Block
A pre-drawn image you can insert in your drawing to save time and make your file size smaller.
Crosshairs
This is your cursor when it is in the drawing space.
Cursor
Your cursor will change depending on where it is in the program.
Database
An AutoCAD drawing file is actually one large database containing all the information needed to reproduce the objects when the file is opened. Info for layers and linetypes, etc are stored in this manner.
Dialog box
AutoCAD uses a large number of dialog boxes to get information from you. You must know how input the information that it asks for.
Drawing template file
This is a file that contains preset values for frequently used settings. AKA a prototype drawing. The file extension is DWT.
Extents
The outer boundaries of the objects you have drawn.
Prepared by: Yamanta Raj Niroula
22
An Introduction to AutoCAD
PENTASOFT
Grid
This is pattern of dots displayed on the screen to guide you. It can be toggled on and off by pressing the F7 key.
Grips
Small ' handles'on objects that allow for quick editing.
Layer
All objects are drawn on a layer. You can group objects (such as electrical) on a single layer and organize your drawing.
Layout Tabs
An optional area used for plotting your drawings.
Limits
A setting to impose an ' artificial'boundary on your drawing and scale your text and dimensions, etc.
Linetype
All objects are drawn with a particular linetype. Examples would be solid, center, dashed, etc.
Model space
The drawing space where you ' model'the objects.
Modify
A generic term used for changing your objects
Object
Any item that is in the AutoCAD database. Also known as an entity.
Origin
The (0, 0) point of your current co-ordinate system.
Ortho mode
This is a drawing mode that allows you to draw only perpendicular lines. It is toggled on and off by pressing the F8 key.
Osnap - Object Snap
This is a method of ' snapping'to certain, precise points on an object.
Path
The specific folder where AutoCAD looks for, or saves files.
Pick
To select an object by ' left-clicking'on it.
Plot
Also known as print. To make a hard copy of your drawing.
Polar co-ordinates
A way of inputting points based on distance and angle.
Prepared by: Yamanta Raj Niroula
23
An Introduction to AutoCAD
PENTASOFT
Property
Any specific characteristic of an object such as layer, scale, linetype, start point, etc.
Relative co-ordinates
A way of inputting points based on a starting point.
Selection set
The current group of objects selected for modifying.
Snap
This is a drawing mode that allows you to snap your cursor to precise points laid out in a grid pattern. Toggle with the F9 key.
Styles
Formatting that defines the look of text, dimensions, etc.
Units
The basic drawing unit set for you drawing. For example, you can use inches or millimeters depending on your needs. You can also set the precision you want displayed, such nearest 1/4", 1/2" 1/64", etc.
User co-ordinate system (UCS)
Modifications made to the World Coordinate System (WCS) results in a User Coordinate System (UCS)
View
A particular area of your drawing.
Viewport
A separate ' window'on your drawing. You may have more than one viewport visible to see different areas of your drawing at the same time.
Wizard
An easy step-by-step instruction set to help you set-up certain aspects of your drawing.
World Co-ordinate System (WCS)
This is the common X-Y co-ordinate system that is the default. If it is modified, it becomes a User co-ordinate System (UCS)
Zoom
To view either a smaller section of your drawing (zoom in) or a larger section (zoom out)
Prepared by: Yamanta Raj Niroula
24
An Introduction to AutoCAD
PENTASOFT
Introduction to Drawing and Modify Commands AutoCAD allows you to have access to a large number of commands. The general rule is that you will use 20% of the commands 80% of the time. We will start by introducing you to the most common drawing commands. When you combine these with the basic modify commands, you will be able to make elaborate drawings quite quickly. The important thing to remember is that AutoCAD will expect you give it information in a very particular order. The most frustrating thing when you begin using this program is that you will try to do something, but AutoCAD will ' not work' . In most cases, it means that you are trying to input information at the wrong time. This is why it is very important to be in the habit of looking at the command line. The command line tells you what information AutoCAD requires to continue. Your first drawing assignment will be to use the drawing commands in conjunction with the co-ordinate system defined above. This is a basic assignment, but it is very important to understand how to give the program accurate information. You will use the following commands:
Drawing Objects Introduction The Draw commands can be used to create new objects such as lines and circles. Most AutoCAD drawings are composed purely and simply from these basic components. A good understanding of the Draw commands is fundamental to the efficient use of AutoCAD. The sections below cover the most frequently used Draw commands such as Line, Polyline and Circle as well as the more advanced commands like Multiline and Multiline Style. As a newcomer to AutoCAD, you may wish to skip the more advanced commands in order to properly master the basics. You can always return to this tutorial in the future when you are more confident. In common with most AutoCAD commands, the Draw commands can be started in a number of ways. Command names or short-cuts can be entered at the keyboard; commands can be started from the Draw pull-down menu, shown on the right or from the Draw toolbar. The method you use is dependent upon the type of work you are doing and how experienced a user you are. Don' t worry too much about this; just use whatever method feels easiest or most convenient at the time. Your drawing technique will improve over time and with experience so don' t expect to be working very quickly at first. If you are working with the pull-down menus, it is worth considering the visual syntax that is common to all pull-downs used in the Windows operating system. For example, a small arrow like so "" next to a menu item means that the item leads to a submenu that may contain other commands or command options. An ellipsis, "…" after a Prepared by: Yamanta Raj Niroula
25
An Introduction to AutoCAD
PENTASOFT
menu item means that the item displays a dialogue box. These little visual clues will help you to work more effectively with menus because they tell you what to expect and help to avoid surprises for the newcomer.
Lines Lines are probably the most simple of AutoCAD objects. Using the Line command, a line can be drawn between any two points picked within the drawing area. Lines are usually the first objects you will want to draw when starting a new drawing because they can be used as "construction lines" upon which the rest of your drawing will be based. Never forget that creating drawings with AutoCAD is not so dissimilar from creating drawings on a drawing board. Many of the basic drawing methods are the same. Anyone familiar with mathematics will know that lines drawn between points are often called vectors. This terminology is used to describe the type of drawings that AutoCAD creates. AutoCAD drawings are generically referred to as "vector drawings". Vector drawings are extremely useful where precision is the most important criterion because they retain their accuracy irrespective of scale. With the Line command you can draw a simple line from one point to another. When you pick the first point and move the cross-hairs to the location of the second point you will see a rubber band line which shows you where the line will be drawn when the second point is picked. Line objects have two ends (the first point and the last point). You can continue picking points and AutoCAD will draw a straight line between each picked point and the previous point. Each line segment drawn is a separate object and can be moved or erased as required. To end this command, just hit the Enter key on the keyboard. Command: LINE Specify first point: (pick P1) Specify next point or [Undo]: (pick P2) Specify next point or [Undo]: Enter (to end)
You can also draw lines by entering the co-ordinates of their end points at the command prompt rather than picking their position from the screen. This enables you to draw lines that are off screen, should you want to.
Absolute Co-ordinate System (x, y) To enter an absolute coordinate, specify a point by entering its X and Y values in the format X, Y. Use absolute coordinates when you know the precise X and Y values of the point from the origin. The following sequence of coordinates draw a triangle, as shown below. Command: _line Specify first point: 3, 3 Specify next point or [Undo]: 7, 3 Specify next point or [Undo]: 5, 5 Specify next point or [Close/Undo]: c
Prepared by: Yamanta Raj Niroula
26
An Introduction to AutoCAD
PENTASOFT
Relative Rectangular Co-ordinate System (@ x distance, y distance) Use relative coordinates when you know the position of a point with respect to the previous point. The relative rectangular coordinate is represented in the following format: @ x-displacement, y-displacement. Command: _line Specify first point: Specify next point or [Undo]: @4, 0 Specify next point or [Undo]: @0, 4 Specify next point or [Close/Undo]: Specify next point or [Close/Undo]: Specify next point or [Close/Undo]: Specify next point or [Close/Undo]:
2, 2 @-2, 0 @0,-2 @-2, 0 c
Mostly, an absolute co-ordinate is given at the Specify first point: Distance is measured +ve towards right and up and it is measured –ve towards left and down.
Relative Polar Co-ordinate System (@ distance < angle) Polar co-ordinate system uses a distance and an angle with reference to the previous point to locate a point. Angles are measured in anti-clock direction, taking 0° towards right. The relative polar coordinate is represented in the following format: @ distance < angle. Command: _line Specify first point: 2, 3 Specify next point or [Undo]: @4<0 Specify next point or [Undo]: @4<90 Specify next point or [Close/Undo]: @4<180 Specify next point or [Close/Undo]: c
Construction Lines and Rays: Lines that extend to infinity in one or both directions, known as rays and construction lines, respectively, can be used as references for creating other objects. For example, you can use construction lines to find the center of a triangle, prepare multiple views of the same item, or create temporary intersections to use for object snaps. Infinite lines do not change the total area of the drawing. Therefore, their infinite dimensions have no effect on zooming or viewpoints, and they are ignored by commands that display the drawing extents. You can move, rotate, and copy infinite lines just as you can move, rotate, and copy other objects. You may want to create infinite lines on a construction line layer that can be frozen or turned off before plotting.
Construction Lines A construction line (xline) can be placed anywhere in three-dimensional space. You can specify its orientation in several ways. The default method for creating the line is the two-point method: you specify two points to define the orientation. The first point, the Prepared by: Yamanta Raj Niroula
27
An Introduction to AutoCAD
PENTASOFT
root, is the conceptual midpoint of the construction line, that is, the point snapped to by the Midpoint object snap. You can also create construction lines in several other ways. (a) Horizontal and Vertical. Create construction lines that pass through a point you specify and are parallel to the X or Y axis of the current UCS. (b) Angle. Creates a construction line in one of two ways. Either you select a reference line and then specify the angle of the construction line from that line, or you create a construction line at a specific angle to the horizontal axis by specifying an angle and then a point through which the construction line should pass. (c) Bisector. Creates a construction line that bisects an angle you specify. You specify the vertex and the lines that create the angle. (d) Offset. Creates a construction line parallel to a baseline you specify. You specify the offset distance, select the baseline, and then indicate on which side of the baseline to locate the construction line. The Construction Line command creates a line of infinite length which passes through two picked points. Construction lines are very useful for creating construction frameworks or grids within which to design. Construction lines are not normally used as objects in finished drawings, it is usual, therefore, to draw all your construction lines on a separate layer which will be turned off or frozen prior to printing. See the Object Properties tutorial to find out how to create new layers. Because of their nature, the Zoom Extents command option ignores construction lines. XLINE is a linear object, which starts at infinite and ends at infinite, or we can say that it is a line, which has no start or end points but passes through a specified point. These lines are used for projections. Command: XLINE Specify a point or [Hor/Ver/Ang/Bisect/Offset]: Use one of the point fixing methods Specify through point: Use one of the point fixing methods Specify through point: Use one of the point fixing methods
You may notice that there are a number of options with this command. For example, the "Hor" and "Ver" options can be used to draw construction lines that are truly horizontal or vertical. In both these cases, only a single pick point is required because the direction of the line is predetermined. To use a command option, simply enter the capitalized part of the option name at the command prompt. Follow the command sequence below to see how you would draw a construction line using the Horizontal option. Point Specifies the location of the infinite line using two points through which it passes. Specify through point: Specify the point (2) through which you want the xline to pass, or press ENTER to end the command
Prepared by: Yamanta Raj Niroula
28
An Introduction to AutoCAD
PENTASOFT
AutoCAD creates the xline through the specified point. Hor point.
Creates a horizontal xline passing through a specified
Specify through point: Specify the point (1) through which you want the xline to pass, or press ENTER to end the command
AutoCAD creates the xline parallel to the X axis.
Ver Creates a vertical xline passing through a specified point. Specify through point: Specify the point (1) through which you want the xline to pass, or press ENTER to end the command
AutoCAD creates the xline parallel to the Y axis. Ang Creates an xline at a specified angle. Enter angle of xline (0) or [Reference]: Specify angle or enter r
an
Angle of Xline Specifies the angle at which to place the line. Specify through point:
AutoCAD creates an xline through the specified point, using the specified angle. Reference Specifies the angle from a selected reference line. The angle is measured counterclockwise from the reference line. Select a line object: Select a line, polyline, ray, or xline Enter angle of xline <0>: Specify through point: Specify the point through which you want the xline to pass, or press ENTER to end the command
Prepared by: Yamanta Raj Niroula
29
An Introduction to AutoCAD
PENTASOFT
AutoCAD creates an xline through the specified point, using the specified angle. Bisect Creates an xline that passes through the selected angle vertex and bisects the angle between the first and second line. Specify angle vertex point: Specify a point (1) Specify angle start point: Specify a point (2) Specify angle end point: Specify a point (3) or press ENTER to end the command
The xline lies in the plane determined by the three points. Offset Creates an xline parallel to another object. Specify offset distance or [Through] : Specify an offset distance, enter t, or press ENTER
Offset Distance Specifies the distance the xline is offset from the selected object. Select a line object: Select a line, polyline, ray, or xline, or press ENTER to end the command Specify side to offset: Specify a point and press ENTER to exit the command
Through Creates an xline offset from a line and passing through a specified point.
Select a line object: Select a line, polyline, ray, or xline, or press ENTER to end the command Specify through point: Specify the point through which you want the xline to pass and press ENTER to exit the command
Rays A ray is a line in three-dimensional space that starts at a point you specify and extends to infinity. Unlike construction lines, which extend in two directions, rays extend in only one direction. Using rays instead of construction lines can help reduce visual clutter. Like construction lines, rays are ignored by commands that display the drawing extents. RAY command creates semi-infinite lines commonly used as construction lines. A ray has a finite starting point and extends to infinity. Command: RAY Specify start point: Specify a point (1) Specify through point: Specify a point for the ray to pass through (2)
Prepared by: Yamanta Raj Niroula
30
An Introduction to AutoCAD
PENTASOFT
AutoCAD draws a ray and continues to prompt for through points so you can create multiple rays. The ray is extended to the edge of the display in the direction defined by the starting point and the through point. Press ENTER to end the command.
Polygon A polygon is a polyline object. AutoCAD draws polylines with zero width and no tangent information. You can use the PEDIT command to change these values. The Polygon command can be used to draw any regular polygon from 3 sides up to 1024 sides. This command requires four inputs from the user, the number of sides, a pick point for the centre of the polygon, whether you want the polygon inscribed or circumscribed and then a pick point which determines both the radius of this imaginary circle and the orientation of the polygon. The polygon command creates a closed polyline in the shape of the required polygon. Creating polygons is a simple way to draw squares, equilateral triangles, octagons, and so on. The following illustrations show polygons drawn using the three methods. In the first two illustrations, point 1 is the center of the polygon and point 2 defines the radius length, which is being specified with the pointing device.
Prepared by: Yamanta Raj Niroula
31
An Introduction to AutoCAD
PENTASOFT
There are many ways to create polygons: •
Specifying the radius when you know the distance between the center of the polygon and the endpoint of each side (inscribed)
•
Specifying the radius when you know the distance between the center of the polygon and the midpoint of each side (circumscribed)
•
Specifying the length of an edge and where you want to place it
Use RECTANG rather than POLYGON to create rectangles.
Draw Toolbar: Draw menu: Polygon Command: polygon Enter number of sides : Enter a value between 3 and 1024 or press ENTER Specify center of polygon or [Edge]: Specify a point (1) or enter e
Center of Polygon
Polygons
Defines the center of the polygon. Enter an option [Inscribed in circle/Circumscribed : Enter i or c or press ENTER
Prepared by: Yamanta Raj Niroula
about
circle]
32
An Introduction to AutoCAD
PENTASOFT
Inscribed in Circle – Specifies the radius of a circle on which all vertices of the polygon lie. Specify radius of circle: Specify a point (2) or enter a value
Specifying the radius with your pointing device determines the rotation and size of the polygon. Specifying the radius with a value draws the bottom edge of the polygon at the current snap rotation angle. Circumscribed about Circle – Specifies the distance from the center of the polygon to the midpoints of the edges of the polygon. Specify radius of circle: Specify a distance
Inscribed in circle
Circumscribed about circle Specifying the radius with your pointing device determines the rotation and size of the polygon. Specifying the radius with a value draws the bottom edge of the polygon at the current snap rotation angle. Edge - Defines a polygon by specifying the endpoints of the first edge.
Specify first endpoint of edge: Specify a point (1) Specify second endpoint of edge: Specify a point (2)
Donut width.
Donuts are filled rings or solid-filled circles that actually are closed polylines with
To create a donut, you specify its inside and outside diameters and its center. You can continue creating multiple copies with the same diameter by specifying different center points. To create solid-filled circles, specify an inside diameter of 0.
Prepared by: Yamanta Raj Niroula
33
An Introduction to AutoCAD
PENTASOFT
A donut is constructed of a closed polyline composed of wide arc segments. How AutoCAD fills the interior of a donut depends on the current setting of the FILL command. This command draws a solid donut shape; actually it' s just a closed polyline consisting of two arc segments which have been given a width. AutoCAD asks you to define the inside diameter i.e. the diameter of the hole and then the outside diameter of the donut. The donut is then drawn in outline and you are asked to pick the centre point in order to position the donut. You can continue picking centre points to draw more donuts or you can hit Enter to end the command. Surprisingly, donuts are constructed from single closed polylines composed of two arc segments which have been given a width. Fortunately AutoCAD works all this out for you, so all you see is a donut. Command: donut Specify inside diameter of donut : Specify a ENTER If you specify an inside diameter of 0, the donut is a Specify outside diameter of donut : Specify a ENTER Specify center of donut or : Specify a point (1) end the command
distance or press filled circle. distance or press or press ENTER to
AutoCAD sets the location of the donut based on the center point. After you specify the diameters, AutoCAD prompts you for the locations at which to draw donuts. AutoCAD draws a donut at each point specified (2). As an alternative to picking two points or entering a value for the diameters, you could just hit Enter to accept the default value. Most AutoCAD commands that require user input have default values. They always appear in triangular brackets like this .
Prepared by: Yamanta Raj Niroula
34
An Introduction to AutoCAD
PENTASOFT
Curiously enough AutoCAD doesn' t seem to mind if you make the inside diameter of a donut larger than the outside diameter, try it and see.
Revcloud Creates a polyline of sequential arcs to form a cloud shape
Draw toolbar: Draw menu: Revision Cloud Command: revcloud Minimum arc length: 0.5000 Maximum arc length: 0.5000 Specify start point or [Arc length/Object/Style] : Drag to draw the revision cloud, enter an option, or press ENTER Guide crosshairs along cloud path...
Move the mouse to form a closed shape; the command automatically ends when a closed shape is formed. When the start and end lines meet, the following message is displayed on the command line. Revision cloud finished
The resulting object is a polyline.
Note: REVCLOUD stores the last used arc length in the system registry. This value is multiplied by DIMSCALE to provide consistency when the program is used with drawings that have different scale factors. Arc Length Specifies the length of the arcs in a revision cloud.
Prepared by: Yamanta Raj Niroula
35
An Introduction to AutoCAD
PENTASOFT
Specify minimum length of arc <0.5000>: Specify a minimum arc length Specify maximum length of arc <0.5000>: Specify a maximum arc length Guide crosshairs along cloud path... Revision cloud finished
length.
The maximum arc length cannot be set to more than three times the minimum arc
Object Specifies an object to be converted to a revision cloud. Select object: Select the closed object to convert to a revision cloud Reverse direction [Yes/No]: Enter y to reverse the direction of the arcs in the revision cloud, or press ENTER to leave the arcs as is Revision cloud finished
Style Specifies the style of the revision cloud. Select arc style [Normal/Calligraphy] : Select the style for the revision cloud Revision cloud finished.
You can use the "Arc length" option to control the scale of the revision cloud. This is achieved by specifying the minimum and maximum arc length. The "Object" option is used to transform any closed shape, such as a polyline, spline or circle into a revision cloud. If you review or redline drawings, you can increase your productivity by using the Revision Cloud feature to highlight your markups. REVCLOUD creates a polyline of sequential arcs to form a cloud-shaped object. You can create a revision cloud from scratch, or you can convert a closed object, such as a circle, ellipse, closed polyline, or closed spline, to a revision cloud. When you convert a closed object to a revision cloud, the original object is deleted if DELOBJ is set to 1 (the default). You can set the minimum and maximum default values for the arc lengths of a revision cloud. When you draw a revision cloud, you can vary the size of the arcs by using pick points for the smaller arc segments. You can also edit the individual arc lengths and chord lengths of a revision cloud by adjusting the pick points. Make sure that you can see the entire area to be outlined with REVCLOUD before you begin the command. REVCLOUD is not designed to support transparent and realtime panning and zooming.
Prepared by: Yamanta Raj Niroula
36
An Introduction to AutoCAD
PENTASOFT
3D Polyline The 3D Polyline command works in exactly the same way as the Polyline command. The main difference between a normal polyline and a 3D polyline is that each vertex (pick point) of a 3D polyline can have a different value for Z (height). In normal (2D) polylines, all vertexes must have the same Z value. 3D polyline objects are not as complex as their 2D cousins. For example, they cannot contain arc segments and they cannot be given widths. However, they can be very useful for 3D modeling. The 3DPOLY command Creates a polyline of line segments in 3D space Command: 3dpoly Specify start point of polyline: Specify a point (1) Specify endpoint of line or [Undo]: Specify a point or enter an option Specify endpoint of line or [Undo]: Specify a point or enter an option Specify endpoint of line or [Close/Undo]: Specify a point or enter an option
Endpoint of Line - Draws a straight line from the previous point to the specified new point. The prompt is repeated until you press ENTER to end the command. Undo - Deletes the last line created. You can continue drawing from the previous point. Close - Draws a closing line from the endpoint back to the first point, and then ends the command. To be closed, a 3D polyline must contain at least two lines.
Notice that you are not prompted for a Z value each time you pick a point. You must either use one of the Object Snaps to pick a point with the required Z value or use the ".XY" filter to force AutoCAD to prompt for a Z value.
Circles and Arcs Along with Line and Polyline, the Circle command is probably one of the most frequently used. Fortunately it is also one of the simplest. However, in common with the other commands in this section there are a number of options that can help you construct just the circle you need. Most of these options are self explanatory but in some cases it can be quite confusing. The Circle command, for example, offers 6 ways to create a circle, while the Arc command offers 10 different methods for drawing an arc. The sections below concentrate mainly on the default options but feel free to experiment.
Prepared by: Yamanta Raj Niroula
37
An Introduction to AutoCAD
PENTASOFT
Circle Draw Toolbar: Draw Menu: Circle
[Options]
The Circle command is used to draw circles. There are a number of ways you can define the circle. The default method is to pick the centre point and then to either pick a second point on the circumference of the circle or enter the circle radius at the keyboard. You can create circles in several ways. The default method is to specify a center and radius. AutoCAD also provides 3 more methods to draw circles which are discussed below. Command: _circle Specify center point for circle or [3P/2P/Ttr (tan tan radius)]: Use one of the point fixing methods or enter an option
Center, Radius/Center, Diameter This allows drawing a circle based on the center point and radius or diameter. The radius or diameter can be specified by fixing a point or by entering a value. The distance between the specified point and the center, is the radius or diameter, as the case may be. Specify radius of circle or [Diameter]: Enter radius value or enter D for Diameter option
3Points A circle can be fixed by specifying any 3 circumferential points using this option. Command: _circle Specify center point for circle or [3P/2P/Ttr (tan tan radius)]: _3p Specify first point on circle: Use one of the point fixing methods Specify second point on circle: Use one of the point fixing methods Specify third point on circle: Use one of the point fixing methods
Prepared by: Yamanta Raj Niroula
38
An Introduction to AutoCAD
PENTASOFT
2Points Specify 2 diametrically opposite points to draw a circle using this method. Command: _circle Specify center point for circle or [3P/2P/Ttr (tan tan radius)]: _2p Specify first end point of circle's diameter: Use one of the point fixing methods Specify second end point of circle's diameter: Use one of the point fixing methods
Tangent, Tangent, Radius Select this to draw a circle of given radius. The circle will be fixed tangential to both the selected objects. Command: _circle Specify center point for circle or [3P/2P/Ttr (tan tan radius)]: _ttr Specify point on object for first tangent of circle: Select an object Specify point on object for second tangent of circle: Select an object Specify radius of circle <1.0000>: Enter a value.
As you can see from the command prompt above the default options are always indicated in triangular brackets like so and command options appear within square brackets like so [Option]. Each option is separated by a forward slash like this /. You can choose to use the alternative options by typing them at the prompt. For example,
Prepared by: Yamanta Raj Niroula
39
An Introduction to AutoCAD
PENTASOFT
the circle command gives you three extra options to define a circle. 3P which uses any three points on the circumference, 2P which uses two points on the circumference to form a diameter and Ttr which stands for Tangent Tangent Radius. Obviously to use this last option you need to have drawn two lines which you can use as tangents to the circle. Try these options out to see how they work. Note that to invoke a command option; you need only type the upper-case part of the option name. For example, if you want to use the Ttr option, you need only enter "T". There are two more circle options on the pull-down menu that enable you to draw a circle by defining the center and diameter or by using 3 tangents.
Arc Draw Toolbar: Draw Menu: Arc
[Options]
The Arc command allows you to draw an arc of a circle. There are numerous ways to define an arc; the default method uses three pick points, a start point, a second point and an end point. Using this method, the drawn arc will start at the first pick point, pass through the second point and end at the third point. Once you have mastered the default method try some of the others. You may, for example need to draw an arc with a specific radius. All of the Arc command options are available from the pull-down menu.
3 Points Draw
Arc
3 Points
Start point This specifies the start point of an arc. Command: _arc Specify start point of arc or [CEnter]: Use one of the point fixing methods
Prepared by: Yamanta Raj Niroula
40
An Introduction to AutoCAD
PENTASOFT
Second Point This draws an arc using three specific points along the circumference of the arc. The first and the third points form the end points of the arc. The second point can be any point on the circumference of the arc. Specify second point of arc or [CEnter/ENd]: Use one of the point fixing methods Specify end point of arc: Use one of the point fixing methods
Start, Center Method Center Specifies the center of an arc segment. Specify second point of arc or [CEnter/ENd]: CE Specify center point of arc: Use one of the point fixing methods Specify end point of arc or [Angle/chord Length]: Specify a point or enter an option
End Point Draw
Arc
Start, Centre, End
Using the center point (P2), draw an arc counterclockwise from the start point (P1) to a point that falls on an imaginary ray drawn from the center point through the end point (P3). The endpoint determines the angle at which the arc ends. The arc does not necessarily pass through this third point as shown in the illustration.
Prepared by: Yamanta Raj Niroula
41
An Introduction to AutoCAD
PENTASOFT
Angle Draw
Arc
Start, Centre, Angle
The Angle option draws an arc counterclockwise from the start point (P1) using a center point (P2) with a specified included angle. If the angle is negative, AutoCAD draws an arc clockwise. Specify included angle: Specify an angle
Chord Length Draw
Arc
Start, Centre, Length
Draws either a minor or a major arc. Specify length of chord: Specify a chord length
If the chord length is positive, AutoCAD draws the minor arc counterclockwise from the start point (P1) and uses the chord length to compute the ending angle. If the chord length is negative, AutoCAD draws the major arc counterclockwise from the start point (P1) and uses chord length to compute the ending angle.
Start, End Method End Specify second point Specify end point of Specify center point point fixing methods
Prepared by: Yamanta Raj Niroula
of arc or [CEnter/ENd]: _EN arc: Use one of the point fixing methods of arc or [Angle/Direction/Radius]: Use one of the or enter an option
42
An Introduction to AutoCAD
PENTASOFT
Center Point Using the center point draws an arc counterclockwise from the start point to an endpoint that falls on an imaginary ray drawn from the center point through the second point specified. Angle Draw
Arc 4 Start, End, Angle
Draws an arc counterclockwise from the start point to an end point with a specified included angle. If the angle is negative, AutoCAD draws an arc clockwise. Specify included angle: Specify an angle
Direction Draw
Arc
Start, End, Direction
Begins the arc tangent to a specified direction. It creates any arc, major or minor, clockwise or counterclockwise, beginning with start point and ending at an end point. AutoCAD determines the direction from the start point.
Specify tangent direction for the start point of arc: Specify a direction
Radius Draw
Arc
Start, End, Radius
Draws the minor arc from the start point to an end point in a counterclockwise direction. . If the radius is negative, AutoCAD draws the major arc. Specify radius of arc: Specify a radius
Center, Start Method Center Specifies the center of the circle of which an arc is a part. Command: _arc Specify start point of arc or [CEnter]: _C Specify center point of arc: Use one of the point fixing methods Specify start point of arc: Use one of the point fixing methods Specify end point of arc or [Angle/chord Length]: Use one of the point fixing methods or enter an option
End Point Draw
Arc
Center, Start, End
Using the center point draws an arc counterclockwise from the start point, to a point that falls on an imaginary ray drawn from the center point through the end point.
Prepared by: Yamanta Raj Niroula
43
An Introduction to AutoCAD
PENTASOFT
Angle Draw
Arc
Center, Start, Angle
Draws an arc counterclockwise from the start point, using a center point with a specified included angle. If the angle is negative, AutoCAD draws a clockwise arc. Specify included angle: Specify an angle
Length Of Chord Draw
Arc
Center, Start, Length
Draws either a major or a minor arc. If the chord length is positive, AutoCAD draws the minor arc counterclockwise from the start point and uses the chord length to compute the ending angle. If the chord length is negative, AutoCAD draws the major arc counterclockwise from the start point and uses the chord length to compute the ending angle. Specify length of chord: Specify a chord length
You can start a line or arc segment tangential to the end point of the last arc. Start the command and press in response to the AutoCAD prompt Continue After you complete a line, you can start an arc tangent to the line at an endpoint by starting the ARC command and pressing ENTER at the Specify Start Point: prompt. You need to specify only the endpoint of the arc. You can connect sequentially drawn arcs in the same way. To create connected arcs using a menu, choose Arc from the Draw menu, and then choose Continue. In both cases, the resulting object is tangent to the previous one.
Ellipse AutoCAD helps drawing a perfect ellipse or elliptical curve using this command. There are two different ways in defining an ellipse: (a) define the full length of one axis and half-length of the other axis. (b) define the center point of the ellipse (the point where to axes intersect with each other) and half-length of other two axes. The shape of an ellipse is determined by two axes that define its length and width. The longer axis is called the major axis, and the shorter one is the minor axis.
Prepared by: Yamanta Raj Niroula
44
An Introduction to AutoCAD
PENTASOFT
The illustrations below show two different ellipses created by specifying axis and distance. The third point specifies only a distance and does not necessarily designate the axis endpoint.
If you are drawing on isometric planes to simulate 3D, you can use ellipses to represent isometric circles viewed from an oblique angle. First you need to turn on Isometric Snap in the Drafting Settings dialog box. Command: _ellipse Specify axis endpoint of ellipse or [Arc/Center]: Use one of the point fixing methods or enter an option
Axis Endpoints Draw
Ellipse
Axis, End
This is the first step towards defining the first axis. The two end points of the axis are specified. When the first point is specified in the above option, it prompts for the second point. Specify other endpoint of axis: Use one of the point fixing methods
Here, there is no distinction between major or minor axes of an ellipse. Depending on the distance you specify, one could be the major axis of an ellipse and the other could be the minor axis. AutoCAD doesn’t make any difference between these two.
Prepared by: Yamanta Raj Niroula
45
An Introduction to AutoCAD
PENTASOFT
After the first axis of the ellipse is defined, AutoCAD gives you two options to define the length of the other axis. The first one is to define half-length of the other axis. Specify distance to other axis or [Rotation]: Specify a distance
The Rotation option defines the major to minor axis ratio of the ellipse by rotating an imaginary circle about the first axis, you defined by the given rotation angle. The higher the value, the greater is the ratio of minor to major axis. Entering 0 defines a circle. Rotation around major axis: Specify a point or enter a value (0-89.4) Specify distance to other axis or [Rotation]: R Specify rotation around major axis: Specify an angle
Center, Axis Endpoints Draw
Ellipse
Center
You can start from the center point of an ellipse. After the definition of the center point, AutoCAD proceeds in a similar way, as we have learned above. Command: _ellipse Specify axis endpoint of ellipse or [Arc/Center]: _C Specify center of ellipse: Specify a distance Specify endpoint of axis: Specify a distance Specify distance to other axis or [Rotation]: Specify a distance or angle
Arc Draw
Ellipse
Arc
Creates an elliptical arc. AutoCAD constructs an imaginary ellipse using the methods we discussed above. Then the parameters about the arc are prompted for the user input. The following sequence shows how a simple elliptical arc could be constructed.
Prepared by: Yamanta Raj Niroula
46
An Introduction to AutoCAD
PENTASOFT
Command: _ellipse Specify axis endpoint of ellipse or [Arc/Center]: _a Specify axis endpoint of elliptical arc or [Center]: Use one of the point fixing methods Specify other endpoint of axis: Use one of the point fixing methods Specify distance to other axis or [Rotation]: Specify a distance Specify start angle or [Parameter]: Specify an angle or enter an option Specify end angle or [Parameter/Included angle]: Specify an angle or enter an option
To specify start angle, you could enter a numeric value. AutoCAD measures the angle from the angle of the first axis you defined. Parameter requires the same input as start angle. Specify Specify Specify specify Specify specify
start angle or [Parameter]: p start parameter or [Angle]: Enter a value or specify an angle end parameter or [Angle/Included angle]: Enter a value or an angle end parameter or [Angle/Included angle]: Enter a value or an angle
The difference is that AutoCAD creates an elliptical arc using the following parameter vector equation:
p(u ) = c + a * cos(u ) + b * sin (u ) This is actually a vector equation and the variable c is actually a point with X and Y values, it should be written as:
p(u ) = ((Cx ) + a * cos(u )) * I + (Cy + a * sin (u )) where,
Cx is the X value of the point C, Cy is the Y value of the point C, a is - (1/2 of the major axis length), b is - (1/2 of the minor axis length), & i and j represent unit vectors in the X and Y directions.
If the axis endpoints are selected all you have left to specify is the start and end point of the elliptical arc. When you select the parameter option, you are asked for a start parameter and an end parameter. These values are plugged into the equation to determine the actual start and end points on the ellipse. The rest of the ellipse is filled in between these two points in a counterclockwise direction from the first parameter to the second.
Prepared by: Yamanta Raj Niroula
47
An Introduction to AutoCAD
PENTASOFT
The value entered for the parameter u is taken to be degrees for the purposes of obtaining the cos(u) and sin(u).
Create and Combine Areas (Region): A region is a surface created from objects that form a closed shape, known as a loop. The Region command is used to transform objects into regions rather than actually drawing them (i.e. you will need to draw the closed shape or loop first). Once a region is created, there may be little visual difference to the drawing. However, if you set the shade mode to "Flat Shaded", View Shade Flat Shaded, you will see that the region is, in fact, a surface and not simply an outline. Regions are particularly useful in 3D modeling because they can be extruded. Before starting the Region command, draw a closed shape such as a rectangle, circle or any closed polyline or spline. Regions are two-dimensional enclosed areas you create from objects that form closed loops. Loops can be combinations of lines, polylines, circles, arcs, ellipses, elliptical arcs, and splines. The objects that make up the loops must either be closed or form closed areas by sharing endpoints with other objects. Regions can be used for: • • •
Applying hatching and shading Analyzing properties, such as area, using MASSPROP Extracting design information, such as the centroid
You can create regions out of multiple loops and out of open curves whose endpoints are connected and form loops. You cannot form regions from open objects that intersect to form a closed area: for example, intersecting arcs or self-intersecting curves. You can also create regions using BOUNDARY. You create composite regions by combining, subtracting, or finding the intersection of regions. After forming these more complex regions, you can apply hatching or analyze their area.
Prepared by: Yamanta Raj Niroula
48
An Introduction to AutoCAD
PENTASOFT
REGION command converts an object that encloses an area into a region object
Draw toolbar: Draw menu: Region Command: region Select objects: Use an object selection method and press ENTER when you finish
Prepared by: Yamanta Raj Niroula
49
An Introduction to AutoCAD
PENTASOFT
Regions are two-dimensional areas you create from closed shapes or loops. Closed polylines, lines, and curves are valid selections. Curves include circular arcs, circles, elliptical arcs, ellipses, and splines. AutoCAD converts closed 2D and exploded planar 3D polylines in the selection set to separate regions and then converts polylines, lines, and curves to form closed planar loops (outer boundaries and holes of a region). If more than two curves share an endpoint, the resulting region might be arbitrary. The boundary of the region consists of end-connected curves where each point shares only two edges. AutoCAD rejects all intersections and self-intersecting curves. If a selected polyline has been smoothed by either the Spline or Fit options of PEDIT, the resulting region contains the line or arc geometry of the smoothed polyline. The polyline is not converted to a spline object. AutoCAD deletes the original objects after converting them to regions unless the system variable DELOBJ is set to 0. If the original objects were hatched, hatch associativity is lost. To restore associativity, rehatch the region.
Wipeout A Wipeout is an image type object. Most commonly it is used to "mask" part of a drawing for clarity. For example, you may want to add text to a complicated part of a drawing. A Wipeout could be used to mask an area behind some text so that the text can easily be read. The WIPEOUT covers existing objects with a blank area. It creates a polygonal area that masks underlying objects with the current background color. This area is bounded by the wipeout frame. You can turn on the wipeout frame for editing and turn it off for plotting. Draw menu: Wipeout Command: wipeout Specify first point or [Frames/Polyline]: Specify a point or an option
First Point Determines the polygonal boundary of the wipeout object from a series of points. Next point: Specify the next point or press ENTER to exit
Frames Determines whether the edges of all wipeout objects are displayed or hidden. ON/OFF: Enter on or off
Enter on to display all wipeout frames. Enter off to suppress the display of all wipeout frames. Polyline Determines the polygonal boundary of the wipeout objects from a selected polyline. Select a closed polyline: Use an object selection method to select a closed polyline Erase polyline? [Yes/No]: Enter y or n
Enter y to erase the polyline that was used to create the wipeout object. Enter n to retain the polyline. Prepared by: Yamanta Raj Niroula
50
An Introduction to AutoCAD
PENTASOFT
The Wipeout command can be used for 3 different operations. It can be used to draw a wipeout object, as you might expect, but it can also be used to convert an existing closed polyline into a wipeout and it can be used to control the visibility of wipeout frames. You can use as many points as you wish in order to create the shape you need. When you have picked the last point, use right-click and Enter (or hit the Enter key on the keyboard) to complete the command and create the wipeout. You may find that it is easier to draw a polyline first and then convert that polyline into a wipeout. To do this, start the Wipeout command and then Enter to select the default "Polyline" option. Select the polyline when prompted to do so. Remember, polylines must be closed before they can be converted to wipeouts. In most cases, you will probably want to turn off the wipeout frame. The Frames option is used to turn frames off (or on) for all wipeouts in the current drawing. You cannot control the visibility of wipeout frames individually. You should also be aware that when frames are turned off, wipeouts cannot be selected. If you need to move or modify a wipeout, you need to have frames turned on. It is often more convenient to draw the wipeout after the text so that you can see how much space you need. In such a case, you may need to use the DRAWORDER command (Tools Display Order Option) to force the text to appear above the wipeout. Tip: If you have the Express Tools loaded, you can use the very useful TEXTMASK command, which automatically creates a wipeout below any selected text. Find it on your pull-down at Express Text Text Mask
Boundary The BOUNDARY command creates a region or a polyline from an enclosed area Draw menu: Boundary Command: boundary
The Boundary Creation dialog box is displayed. If you enter -boundary at the Command prompt, BOUNDARY displays prompts on the command line. Boundary Creation Dialog Box Defines the object type, boundary set, and island detection method for defining boundaries from points you specify. The Boundary Creation dialog box is a limited version of the Boundary Hatch and Fill dialog box. To access the other options in this dialog box, use BHATCH.
Prepared by: Yamanta Raj Niroula
51
An Introduction to AutoCAD
PENTASOFT
Once you set the available options, choose Pick Points to specify points in your drawing to create the boundaries. BOUNDARY Command Line If you enter -boundary at the Command prompt, BOUNDARY displays prompts on the command line. Specify internal point or [Advanced options]: Specify a point or enter a
Internal Point Creates a boundary from existing objects that form an enclosed area. Specify a point inside the area. Advanced Options Sets the method AutoCAD uses to create the boundary. Enter an option [Boundary set/Island detection/Object type]: Enter an option or press ENTER to return to the previous prompt
Boundary Set - Defines the set of objects AutoCAD analyzes when it creates a boundary from a specified point. For information about defining a boundary set on the command line, see the BHATCH command line option. Prepared by: Yamanta Raj Niroula
52
An Introduction to AutoCAD
PENTASOFT
Island Detection - Specifies whether AutoCAD uses objects within the outermost boundary as boundary objects. For information about specifying island detection on the command line, see the BHATCH command line option. Object Type - Specifies the type of object AutoCAD creates as the boundary. Enter type of boundary object [Region/Polyline] : Enter an option or press ENTER
Points and Point Styles Points are very simple objects and the process of creating them is also very simple. Points are rarely used as drawing components although there is no reason why they could not be. They are normally used just as drawing aids in a similar way that Construction Lines and Rays are used. For example, points are automatically created when you use the Measure and Divide commands to set out distances along a line. When adding points to a drawing it is usually desirable to set the point style first because the default style can be difficult to see. The POINT command creates a point object
Draw toolbar: Draw menu: Point Command line: point Specify a point:
Points can act as nodes to which you can snap objects. You can specify a full three-dimensional location for a point. The current elevation is assumed if you omit the Z coordinate value. The PDMODE and PDSIZE system variables control the appearance of point objects. PDMODE values 0, 2, 3, and 4 specify a figure to draw through the point. A value of 1 specifies that nothing is displayed.
Specifying the value 32, 64, or 96 selects a shape to draw around the point, in addition to the figure drawn through it:
Prepared by: Yamanta Raj Niroula
53
An Introduction to AutoCAD
PENTASOFT
PDSIZE controls the size of the point figures, except for PDMODE values 0 and 1. A setting of 0 generates the point at 5 percent of the drawing area height. A positive PDSIZE value specifies an absolute size for the point figures. A negative value is interpreted as a percentage of the viewport size. The size of all points is recalculated when the drawing is regenerated. After you change PDMODE and PDSIZE, the appearance of existing points changes the next time AutoCAD regenerates the drawing. The point command will insert a point marker in your drawing at a position which you pick in the drawing window or at any co-ordinate location which you enter at the keyboard. The default point style is a simple dot, which is often difficult to see but you can change the point style to something more easily visible or elaborate using the point style dialogue box. Points can be used for "setting out" a drawing in addition to construction lines. You can Snap to points using the Node object snap. Strangely, in Multiple Point mode (the default for the Point button on the Draw toolbar) you will need to use the escape key (Esc) on your keyboard to end the command. The usual right-click or enter doesn' t work.
Point Styles You can start the point style command from the keyboard by typing DDPTYPE or you can start it from the pull-down menu at Format Point Style… The command starts by displaying a dialogue box offering a number of options. DDPTYPE command specifies the display style and size of point objects Format menu: Point Style Command: ddptype
The Point Style dialog box is displayed. Point Style Dialog Box Shows the current point style and size. Change the point style by selecting an icon.
Prepared by: Yamanta Raj Niroula
54
An Introduction to AutoCAD
PENTASOFT
To change the point style, just pick the picture of the style you want and then click the "OK" button. You will need to use the Regen command, REGEN at the keyboard or View Regen from the pull-down to force any existing points in your drawing to display in the new style. Any new points created after the style has been set will automatically display in the new style. One interesting aspect of points is that their size can be set to an absolute value or relative to the screen size, expressed as a percentage. The default is for points to display relative to the screen size, which is very useful because it means that points will remain the same size, irrespective of zoom factor. This is particularly convenient when drawings become complex and the drawing process requires a lot of zooming in and out.
Point Display Images Specifies the image used to display point objects. The point style is stored in the PDMODE system variable. Point Size Sets the point display size. The value you enter can be relative to the screen or in absolute units. AutoCAD stores the point display size in the PDSIZE system variable. Subsequent point objects that you draw use the new value. Set Size Relative to Screen - Sets the point display size as a percentage of the screen size. The point display does not change when you zoom in or out. Set Size in Absolute Units - Sets the point display size as the actual units you specify under Point Size. AutoCAD displays points larger or smaller when you zoom in or out.
Prepared by: Yamanta Raj Niroula
55
An Introduction to AutoCAD
PENTASOFT
Multilines Multilines are complex lines that consist of between 1 and 16 parallel lines, known as elements. The default multiline style has just two elements but you can create additional styles of an almost endless variety. The Multiline Style command enables you to create new multiline styles by adding line elements, changing the color and linetype of elements, adding end caps and the option of displaying as a solid color. You position the elements by specifying the desired offset of each element from the origin of the multiline. You can create and save multiline styles or use the default style, which has two elements. You can set the color and linetype of each element and display or hide the joints of the multiline. Joints are lines that appear at each vertex. There are several types of end caps you can give the multiline, for example, lines or arcs.
Create Multiline Styles You can create named styles for multilines to control the number of elements and the properties of each element. The style also controls the background fill and the end cap. You can add up to 16 elements to a multiline style. If you create or modify an element so that it has a negative offset, it appears below the origin in the image tile of the Multiline Styles dialog box. Use Existing Multiline Styles When you start drawing a multiline, you can use the default style, which has two elements, or specify a style you created previously. The default style is the multiline style last used, or the STANDARD style if MLINE hasn' t been used. You can also change the justification and scale of the multiline before you draw it. Justification determines whether the multiline is drawn below or above the cursor, or with its origin centered on the cursor. The default is below (top justification). Scale controls the overall width of the multiline using the current units. Multiline scale does not affect linetype scale. If you are changing the multiline scale, you might need to make equivalent changes to linetype scale to prevent dots or dashes from being disproportionately sized. The MLINE command is used to draw multilines. This process of drawing is pretty much the same as drawing polylines, additional line segments are added to the multiline as points are picked. As with polylines, points can be unpicked with the Undo option and multilines can be closed.
Prepared by: Yamanta Raj Niroula
56
An Introduction to AutoCAD
PENTASOFT
Draw menu: Multiline Command: mline Current settings: Justification = current, Scale = current, Style = current Specify start point or [Justification/Scale/STyle]: Specify a point or enter an option
Start Point Specifies the next vertex of the multiline. Specify next point: Specify next point or [Undo]: Specify a point or enter u
If you create a multiline with two or more segments, AutoCAD displays a prompt that includes the Close option. Specify next point or [Close/Undo]: Specify a point or enter an option
Next Point - Draws a multiline segment to the specified point using the current multiline style and continues to prompt for points. Undo - Undoes the last vertex point on the multiline.AutoCAD redisplays the previous prompt. Close - Closes the multiline by joining the last segments with the first segments.
Justification Determines how the multiline is drawn between the points you specify. Enter justification type [Top/Zero/Bottom] : Enter an option or press ENTER
Top - Draws the multiline below the cursor, so that the line with the most positive offset is at the specified points. Zero - Draws the multiline with its origin centered at the cursor, so that the MLSTYLE Element Properties offset of 0.0 is at the specified points. Bottom - Draws the multiline above the cursor, so that the line with the most negative offset is at the specified points.
Prepared by: Yamanta Raj Niroula
57
An Introduction to AutoCAD
PENTASOFT
Scale scale.
Controls the overall width of the multiline. This scale does not affect linetype Enter mline scale : Enter a scale or press ENTER
The scale factor is based on the width established in the multiline style definition. A scale factor of 2 produces a multiline twice as wide as the style definition. A negative scale factor flips the order of the offset line—the smallest on top when the multiline is drawn from left to right. A negative scale value also alters the scale by the absolute value. A scale factor of 0 collapses the multiline into a single line. For information about the multiline style definition, see MLSTYLE.
Style Specifies a style to use for the multiline. Enter mline style name or [?]: Enter a name or enter ?
Style Name - Specifies the name of a style that has already been loaded or that’s defined in a multiline library (MLN) file you’ve created. ?—List Styles - Lists the loaded multiline styles.
Multiline Style: Multilines comprise up to 16 lines called elements. The multiline style controls the number of elements and the properties of each element. MLSTYLE also controls the background color and the end caps of each multiline. MLSTYLE command defines a style for multiple parallel lines Format menu: Multiline Style Command: mlstyle
Prepared by: Yamanta Raj Niroula
58
An Introduction to AutoCAD
PENTASOFT
AutoCAD displays the Multiline Styles dialog box. Multiline Styles Dialog Box Defines the style and properties of multilines. The Multiline Styles dialog box displays multiline style names, makes them current, loads them from a file, and saves, adds, and renames them. You can also create or edit a description of a style.
Current - Displays and sets the current multiline style. Select a name from the list to make it current. If there are multiple styles, the name of the current style is selected. The list of multiline styles can include externally referenced multiline styles—that is, multiline styles that exist in an externally referenced drawing (xref). AutoCAD displays externally referenced multiline style names using the same syntax it uses for other externally dependent nongraphical objects. Note: You cannot edit the element and multiline properties of the STANDARD multiline style or any multiline style that is being used in the drawing. If you try to edit the options in either the Element Properties dialog box or the Multiline Properties dialog box, the options are unavailable. To edit an existing multiline style, you must do so before you draw any multilines in that style. Name - Names a new multiline style or renames one. The element and multiline properties are unavailable until you enter a new name and make it current by choosing Add. Enter a name and choose Add, and then save the multiline style to a multiline library (MLN) file. AutoCAD saves the definition in the MLN file you specify. If you specify an MLN file that already exists, the new style definition is added to the file and existing definitions are not erased. The default file name is acad.mln.
Prepared by: Yamanta Raj Niroula
59
An Introduction to AutoCAD
PENTASOFT
To rename a style, enter a name and choose Rename. You cannot rename, modify, or delete the default STANDARD multiline style. To make a copy of the current style, enter a name and then choose Save. Multiline style names adhere to the naming conventions for named objects. Description - Adds a description to a multiline style. Enter up to 255 characters, including spaces. Load - Displays the Load Multiline Styles dialog box, in which you can load multiline styles from a specified MLN file. Save - Saves or copies a multiline style. Enter a name and then choose Save. Add - Adds the multiline style in Name to the Current list. Rename - Renames a multiline style. Enter a name and then choose Rename. Element Properties - Displays the Element Properties dialog box. You cannot edit the element properties of an existing multiline style. Multiline Properties - Displays the Multiline Properties dialog box. Load Multiline Styles Dialog Box Loads a multiline style from an MLN file. The default file name is acad.mln. If acad.mln does not exist, or if it exists but AutoCAD cannot find it, choose File to specify another file or file location. File - Displays a standard file selection dialog box in which you can locate and select another library file. List - Lists the multiline styles available in the current library file. To load another multiline style, select a style from the list and choose OK. Element Properties Dialog Box Sets the properties, such as the offset, color, and linetype, of new and existing multiline elements.
Prepared by: Yamanta Raj Niroula
60
An Introduction to AutoCAD
PENTASOFT
Elements - Displays all the line elements in the current multiline style. Each line element in the style is defined by its offset from the multiline origin (0.0), color, and linetype. The line elements are always displayed in descending order of their offsets. Add - Adds a new line element to the multiline style. Not available until color or linetype has been selected for a multiline style other than STANDARD. Delete - Deletes a line element from the multiline style. Offset - Specifies the offset for line elements in the multiline style.
Color - Displays and sets the color for line elements in the multiline style. When you choose Color or the color swatch, AutoCAD displays the Select Color dialog box. You can use the Select Color dialog box to define the color of objects by selecting from the 255 AutoCAD Color Index (ACI) colors, true colors, and color book colors. Linetype - Displays and sets the linetype for line elements in the multiline style. When you choose Linetype, AutoCAD displays the Select Linetype Properties dialog box, which displays loaded linetypes. Select a linetype from this dialog box. To load a new linetype, choose Load. AutoCAD displays the Load or Reload Linetypes dialog box for loading selected linetypes into the drawing from linetype files. Multiline Properties Dialog Box Sets the multiline properties, such as the display of segment joints, the start and end caps and their angle, and the background color.
Prepared by: Yamanta Raj Niroula
61
An Introduction to AutoCAD
PENTASOFT
Display Joints Controls the display of the joints at the vertices of each multiline segment. A joint is also known as a miter.
Caps Controls the start and end caps of the multiline. Line - Creates a straight line across each end of the multiline. Outer Arc - Creates an arc between the outermost elements of the multiline.
Inner Arcs - Creates an arc between pairs of inner elements. If there’s an odd number of elements, the center line is unconnected. For example, if there are six elements, inner arcs connect elements 2 and 5 and elements 3 and 4. If there are seven elements, inner arcs connect Display Joints off Display Joints on without Line with Line without Outer Arc with Outer Arc elements 2 and 6 and elements 3 and 5. Element 4 is left unconnected.
Prepared by: Yamanta Raj Niroula
62
An Introduction to AutoCAD
PENTASOFT
Angle - Specifies the angle of the end caps.
Fill Controls the background fill of the multiline. On - Turns background fill on. Color - Displays and sets the color of the background fill. When you choose Color or the color swatch, AutoCAD displays the Select Color dialog box.
SOLID Creates solid-filled triangles and quadrilaterals A solid object represents the entire volume of an object. Solids are the most informationally complete and least ambiguous of the 3D modeling types. Complex solid shapes are also easier to construct and edit than wireframes and meshes.
Surfaces toolbar: Draw menu: Surfaces
2D Solid
Command: solid Specify first point: Specify a point (1) Specify second point: Specify a point (2)
The first two points define one edge of the polygon. Specify third point: Specify a point (3) diagonally opposite the second Specify fourth point or : Specify a point (4) or press ENTER
Prepared by: Yamanta Raj Niroula
63
An Introduction to AutoCAD
PENTASOFT
Pressing ENTER at the Fourth Point prompt creates a filled triangle. Specifying a point (5) creates a quadrilateral area. The last two points form the first edge of the next filled area. AutoCAD repeats the Third Point and Fourth Point prompts. Specifying successive third and fourth points creates further connected triangles and four-sided polygons in a single solid object. Pressing ENTER ends SOLID. 2D solids are filled only when the FILLMODE system variable is on and the viewing direction is orthogonal to the 2D solid.
Prepared by: Yamanta Raj Niroula
64
An Introduction to AutoCAD
PENTASOFT
Objects Editing Introduction AutoCAD drawings are rarely completed simply by drawing lines, circles etc. Most likely you will need to Modify these basic drawing objects in some way in order to create the image you need. AutoCAD provides a whole range of modify tools such as Move, Copy, Rotate and Mirror. As you can see, the command names are easily understandable. However, the way these commands work is not always obvious. This tutorial is designed to show you how all of the Modify commands work. If you just need information quickly, use the Quick Find toolbar below to go straight to the information you need or select a topic from the contents list above. As is usual with AutoCAD, the Modify tools can be accessed in one of three ways, from the keyboard, from the pull-down menu and from the toolbar. All of the Modify tools are available from the Modify pull-down and the Modify toolbar. In each section below, the toolbar, pull-down and keyboard options are given. The method you choose is entirely up to you. Ultimately you will use the method that you feel most comfortable with or the one you find most efficient. AutoCAD allows great flexibility and there isn’t any right or wrong ways of working. That said, it should be pointed out that the use of toolbars in AutoCAD is almost always quicker than any other method. The Modify toolbar is usually displayed by default but if it is not already displayed, you can display it using the TOOLBAR command, View > Toolbars… from the pull-down menu. When the Toolbar dialogue box (shown on the right) appears, simply check the box next to "Modify" in the toolbars list. Many AutoCAD users work with the Modify toolbar permanently docked on their screen because it gives one-click access to all of the commands, making the drawing process much more efficient.
Erase Objects: The Erase command is one of the simplest AutoCAD commands and is one of the most used. The command erases (deletes) any selected object(s) from the drawing. Remember you can always get deleted objects back by typing U to undo, from the Standard toolbar or by using the OOPS command.
Modify toolbar: Modify menu: Erase Shortcut menu: Select the objects to erase, right-click in the drawing area, and choose Erase. Command: erase Select objects: Use an object selection method and press ENTER when you finish selecting objects
AutoCAD removes the objects from the drawing.
Prepared by: Yamanta Raj Niroula
65
An Introduction to AutoCAD
PENTASOFT
OOPS When OOPS is entered at the Command: prompt, AutoCAD restores the objects erased by the last ERASE command. The following illustration narrates the above situation.
Move Objects: You can move objects without changing their orientation or size. By using coordinates and object snaps, you can move objects with precision. You can also recalculate objects by changing coordinate values in the Properties palette. In this example, you move the block representing a window. After choosing Move, select the object to be moved (1). Specify the base point for the move (2) followed by the point of displacement (3). The object is moved from point 2 to point 3.
You can also move an object using a relative distance by entering coordinate values for the first point and pressing ENTER for the second point of displacement. This instructs AutoCAD to use the coordinate values as a relative displacement rather than a base point. The objects you selected are moved to a new location determined by the relative coordinate values you entered. Do not include an @ as you normally would for
Prepared by: Yamanta Raj Niroula
66
An Introduction to AutoCAD
PENTASOFT
relative coordinates, because a relative coordinate is expected. You can also use STRETCH to move objects if all their endpoints lie entirely within the selection window. Turning on Ortho mode or Polar Tracking helps you move the object at a specific angle.
In the illustration above, notice that the door itself is entirely within the selection area and thus moves to the new location. The wall lines, on the other hand, merely cross the selection area. Only the endpoints that lie within the selection area move. Therefore, the wall lines stretch in accordance with the movement of the door. To move objects a specified distance, you can use direct distance entry together with Ortho and Polar Tracking. The MOVE command displaces objects a specified distance in a specified direction
Modify toolbar: Modify menu: Move Shortcut menu: Select the objects to move, right-click in the drawing area, and choose Move. Command: move Select objects: Use an object selection method and press ENTER when you finish Specify base point or displacement: Specify a base point (1) Specify second point of displacement or : Specify a point (2) or press ENTER
The two points you specify define a displacement vector that indicates how far the selected objects are to be moved and in what direction. If you press ENTER at the
Prepared by: Yamanta Raj Niroula
67
An Introduction to AutoCAD
PENTASOFT
Specify Second Point of Displacement prompt, the first point is interpreted as relative X,Y,and Z displacement. For example, if you specify 2,3 for the base point and press ENTER at the next prompt, the object moves 2 units in the X direction and 3 units in the Y direction from its current position.
Copy Objects: You can create duplicates of objects at a specified distance from the original. You specify the distance and direction by two points, a from point (1) and a to point (2), called the base point and the second point of displacement, respectively. These points can be located anywhere within the drawing.
You can also copy an object using a relative distance by entering coordinate values for the first point and pressing ENTER for the second point of displacement. This instructs AutoCAD to use the coordinate values as a relative displacement rather than a base point. The objects you selected are copied to a new location determined by the relative coordinate values you entered. Do not include an @ sign as you normally would for relative coordinates because a relative coordinate is expected. To copy objects a specified distance, you can use the direct distance entry feature together with Ortho and polar tracking. In AutoCAD 2005, with the Multiple option, you can copy an object or a selection set multiple times without leaving the COPY command.
Prepared by: Yamanta Raj Niroula
68
An Introduction to AutoCAD
PENTASOFT
The Copy command can be used to create one or more duplicates of any drawing object or objects which you have previously created. Copy is a very useful and timesaving command because you can create very complex drawing elements and then simply copy them as many times as you like.
The COPY Command: Modify toolbar: Shortcut menu: Select the objects to copy, right-click in the drawing area, and choose Copy Selection. Command: copy Select objects: Select objects and press ENTER Specify base point or displacement, or [Multiple]: Specify a point for a single copy or enter m for multiple copies
Base Point or Displacement - Makes a single copy. Specify second point of displacement or displacement>: Specify a point or press ENTER
first
point
as
If you specify two points, AutoCAD uses the first point as a base point and places a single copy relative to that base point. The two points you specify define a displacement to determine how far the selected objects are moved and in what direction. If you press ENTER at the Specify Second Point of Displacement prompt, the first point is interpreted as a relative X,Y,Z displacement. For example, if you specify 2,3 for the base point and press ENTER at the next prompt, the object moves 2 units in the X direction and 3 units in the Y direction from its current position. In this case, the first point is usually entered at the keyboard. Note: The @ symbol should not be entered as part of this displacement coordinate. Multiple - Makes multiple copies using one COPY command. AutoCAD prompts for an insertion base point for the selection object. Specify base point: Specify second point of displacement or displacement>: Specify a point or press ENTER
first
point
as
If you specify a point, AutoCAD places a copy at that point relative to the base point. The Specify Second Point of Displacement prompt is repeated for placement of multiple copies of the object. If you press ENTER, the command ends.
Prepared by: Yamanta Raj Niroula
69
An Introduction to AutoCAD
PENTASOFT
Copybase Copies objects with a specified base point Use COPYBASE to specify a base point when copying objects. The base point enables you to position the copied objects precisely when pasting them within the same drawing or into another drawing. Edit menu: Copy with Base Point Shortcut menu: End any active commands, right-click in the drawing area, and choose Copy with Base Point. Command: copybase Specify base point: Select objects:
The selected objects are copied to the Clipboard. Use PASTECLIP to move the copied objects from the Clipboard to a location in the same document or to another document. When you paste an object copied with COPYBASE, AutoCAD places it relative to the specified base point.
Copyclip Copies objects to the Clipboard Use COPYCLIP to copy objects or command line text from an AutoCAD drawing to another Microsoft® Windows® application.
Standard toolbar: Edit menu: Copy Shortcut menu: End any active commands, right-click in the drawing area, and choose Copy. Command: copyclip Select objects:
COPYCLIP copies all objects you select to the Clipboard. You can paste the contents of the Clipboard into a document or drawing as an OLE object. Note: You can also use CTRL+C to run COPYCLIP. If the cursor is in the drawing area, AutoCAD copies the selected objects to the Clipboard. If the cursor is on the command line or in the text window, AutoCAD copies the selected text to the Clipboard.
Copyhist Copies the text in the command line history to the Clipboard The prompts and other text displayed on the command line in the current session are the command line history. Use scroll bars or open the text window to see the whole history. You can drag the top edge of the command line window to change its size. Prepared by: Yamanta Raj Niroula
70
An Introduction to AutoCAD
PENTASOFT
Command: copyhist
The text is copied to the Clipboard.
Copylink: Copies the current view to the Clipboard for linking to other OLE applications Edit menu: Copy Link Command: copylink
COPYLINK copies the current view to the Clipboard. You can paste the contents of the Clipboard into a document as an OLE object.
Rotate Objects You can rotate objects around a specified point. To determine the angle of rotation, you enter an angle value or specify a second point. Entering a positive angle value rotates the objects counterclockwise or clockwise, depending on the Direction Control setting in the Drawing Units dialog box. The plane of rotation and the direction of the zero angle depend on the orientation of the user coordinate system. Rotate an Object by a Specified Angle You rotate objects by choosing a base point and a relative or absolute rotation angle. Specify a relative angle to rotate the object from its current orientation around the base point by that angle. Specify an absolute angle to rotate the object from the current angle to a new absolute angle. You can rotate an object by specifying a relative angle using one of two methods: •
Enter a rotation angle value from 0 to 360 degrees. You can also enter values in radians, grads, or surveyor bearings.
•
Drag the object around the base point and specify a second point. Turning on Ortho and Polar Tracking, or using object snaps for the second point, is often useful with this method.
In this example, you rotate the plan view of a house by selecting the object (1), specifying a base point (2), and specifying an angle of rotation by dragging to another point (3).
Prepared by: Yamanta Raj Niroula
71
An Introduction to AutoCAD
PENTASOFT
Rotate an Object to an Absolute Angle Sometimes it is easier to rotate to an absolute angle with a reference option. In the following example, you specify the reference angle by selecting two points on the object to rotate. You select the object to be rotated (1), specify the base point (2) by using the Midpoint object snap on the window shown, and then use the Reference option to specify the angle of rotation. For the reference angle, specify two points: the midpoint of the window (2) and the endpoint of the window (3). Rotate the window by dragging it and specify the endpoint of the wall (4).
Rotate an Object in 3D With ROTATE, you can rotate objects in 2D about a specified point. The direction of rotation is determined by the current UCS. ROTATE3D rotates objects in 3D about a specified axis. You can specify the axis of rotation using two points; an object; the X, Y, or Z axis; or the Z direction of the current view. To rotate 3D objects, you can use either ROTATE or ROTATE3D.
The ROTATE Command Moves objects about a base point
Modify toolbar: Modify menu: Rotate
Prepared by: Yamanta Raj Niroula
72
An Introduction to AutoCAD
PENTASOFT
Shortcut menu: Select the objects to rotate, right-click in the drawing area, and choose Rotate. Command: rotate Current positive angle in UCS: ANGDIR=current ANGBASE=current Select objects: Use an object selection method and press ENTER when you finish Specify base point: Specify a point (1) Specify rotation angle or [Reference]: Specify an angle, specify a point, or enter r
Rotation Angle - Determines how far an object rotates around the base point. The axis of rotation passes through the specified base point and is parallel to the Z axis of the current UCS. Reference - Specifies the absolute current rotation angle and desired new rotation angle. The Reference option is used to align an object with the X and Y axes of the UCS or with geometric features in a drawing. Specify the reference angle <0>: Specify an angle by entering a value or by specifying two points Specify the new angle: Specify the new absolute angle
When you rotate a viewport object, the borders of the viewport remain parallel to the edges of the drawing area. Remember, by default, AutoCAD angles start at 3 o' clock and increase in an anticlockwise direction. The "ANGDIR" and "ANGBASE" variables remind you of this. If you want to rotate in a clockwise direction you can enter a negative angle by using a minus sign.
Note:
You can change the angle direction and the base angle using the Units command, Format Units… from the pull-down menu. Click the "Clockwise" check box to change the direction and click the "Direction…" button to set the base angle.
Create an Array of Objects: You can create copies of objects in a rectangular or polar (circular) pattern called an array. For rectangular arrays, you control the number of rows and columns and the distance between each. For polar arrays, you control the number of copies of the object
Prepared by: Yamanta Raj Niroula
73
An Introduction to AutoCAD
PENTASOFT
and whether the copies are rotated. To create many regularly spaced objects, arraying is faster than copying.
Create Rectangular Arrays AutoCAD builds a rectangular array along a baseline defined by the current snap rotation angle. This angle is zero by default, so the rows and columns of a rectangular array are orthogonal with respect to the X and Y axes. The default angle 0 direction setting can be changed in UNITS.
Create Polar Arrays When you create a polar array, the array is drawn counterclockwise or clockwise, depending on whether you enter a positive or a negative value for the angle to fill.
The radius of the array is determined by the distance from the specified center point to a reference or base point on the last selected object. You can use the default reference point (usually an arbitrary point that coincides with a snap point), or you can specify a new base point to be used as the reference point.
Prepared by: Yamanta Raj Niroula
74
An Introduction to AutoCAD
PENTASOFT
Array in 3D With 3DARRAY, you can create a rectangular array or a polar array of objects in 3D. In addition to specifying the number of columns (X direction) and rows (Y direction), you also specify the number of levels (Z direction). Limit the Size of Arrays If you specify a very large number of rows and columns for an array, AutoCAD may take a long time to create the copies. By default, the number of array elements that can be generated by one command is limited to 100,000. This limit is controlled by the MaxArray setting in the registry. You can change the limit by setting the MaxArray system registry variable using (setenv "MaxArray" "n") Where n is a number between 100 and 10000000 (ten million). Note - When changing the value of MaxArray, you must enter MaxArray with the capitalization shown.
The ARRAY command: Creates multiple copies of objects in a pattern Each object in an array can be manipulated independently. If you select multiple objects from which to construct the array, AutoCAD counts the objects as one item to be copied and arrayed.
Modify toolbar: Modify menu: Array Command: array
The Array dialog box is displayed. You can create rectangular or polar arrays by choosing the appropriate option. If you enter -array at the Command prompt, ARRAY displays prompts on the command line. Array Dialog Box Creates multiple copies of objects in a pattern. Use the Rectangular Array option to create an array of rows and columns of copies of the selected object. Use the Polar Array option to create an array by copying the selected objects around a center point.
Prepared by: Yamanta Raj Niroula
75
An Introduction to AutoCAD
PENTASOFT
Rectangular Array Creates an array of rows and columns of copies of the selected object.
Rows Specifies the number of rows in the array. If you specify one row, you must specify more than one column. If you specify a large number of rows and columns for the array, AutoCAD might take a while to create the copies. By default, the maximum number of array elements that you can generate in one command is 100,000. The limit is set by the MAXARRAY setting in the registry. To reset the limit to 200,000, for example, enter (setenv “MaxArray” “200000”) at the Command prompt. Columns Specifies the number of columns in the array.
Prepared by: Yamanta Raj Niroula
76
An Introduction to AutoCAD
PENTASOFT
If you specify one column, you must specify more than one row. If you specify a large number of rows and columns for the array, AutoCAD might take a while to create the copies. By default, the maximum number of array elements that you can generate in one command is 100,000. The limit is set by the MAXARRAY setting in the registry. To reset the limit to 200,000, for example, enter (setenv “MaxArray” “200000”) at the Command prompt. Offset Distance and Direction Provides a space for you to specify the distance and direction of the array’s offset. Row Offset - Specifies the distance (in units) between rows. To add rows downward, specify a negative value. To specify row spacing with the pointing device, use the Pick Both Offsets button or the Pick Row Offset button. Column Offset - Specifies the distance (in units) between columns. To add columns to the left, specify a negative value. To specify column spacing with the pointing device, use the Pick Both Offsets button or the Pick Column Offset button. Angle of Array - Specifies the angle of rotation. This angle is normally 0, so the rows and columns are orthogonal with respect to the X and Y drawing axes of the current UCS. You can change the measurement conventions for angles using UNITS. The ANGBASE and ANGDIR system variables affect the angle of arrays. Pick Both Offsets - Temporarily closes the Array dialog box so that you can use the pointing device to set the row and column spacing by specifying two diagonal corners of rectangle. Pick Row Offset - Temporarily closes the Array dialog box so that you can use the pointing device to specify the distance between rows. AutoCAD prompts you to specify two points and uses the distance and direction between the points to specify the value in Row Offset. Pick Column Offset - Temporarily closes the Array dialog box so that you can use the pointing device to specify the distance between columns. AutoCAD prompts you to specify two points and uses the distance and direction between the points to specify the value in Column Offset. Pick Angle of Array - Temporarily closes the Array dialog box so that you can specify the angle of rotation by entering a value or using the pointing device to specify two points. You can change the measurement conventions for angles using UNITS. The ANGBASE and ANGDIR system variables affect the angle of arrays. Polar Array Creates an array by copying the selected objects around a center point.
Prepared by: Yamanta Raj Niroula
77
An Introduction to AutoCAD
PENTASOFT
Center Point Specifies the center point of the polar array. Enter coordinate values for X and Y, or choose Pick Center Point to use the pointing device to specify the location. Pick Center Point Temporarily closes the Array dialog box so that you can use the pointing device to specify the center point in the AutoCAD drawing area. Method and Values Specifies the method and values used to position objects in the polar array. Method - Sets the method used to position objects. This setting controls which of the method and Value fields are available for specifying values. For example, if the method is Total Number of Items & Angle to Fill, the related fields are available for specifying values; the Angle Between Items field is not available. Total Number of Items - Sets the number of objects that appear in the resultant array. The default value is 4. Angle to Fill - Sets the size of the array by defining the included angle between the base points of the first and last elements in the array. A positive value specifies counterclockwise rotation. A negative value specifies clockwise rotation. The default value is 360. A value of 0 is not permitted. Angle Between Items - Sets the included angle between the base points of the arrayed objects and the center of the array. Enter a positive value. The default direction value is 90. Note - You can choose the Pick buttons and use the pointing device to specify the values for Angle to Fill and Angle between Items. Pick Angle to Fill - Temporarily closes the Array dialog box so that you can define the included angle between the base points of the first and last elements in the array. AutoCAD prompts you to select a point relative to another point in the AutoCAD drawing area. Pick Angle Between Items - Temporarily closes the Array dialog box so that you can define the included angle between the base points of the arrayed objects and the center of
Prepared by: Yamanta Raj Niroula
78
An Introduction to AutoCAD
PENTASOFT
the array. AutoCAD prompts you to select a point relative to another point in the AutoCAD drawing area. Rotate Items as Copied Rotates the items in the array, as shown in the preview area. More/Less Turns the display of additional options in the Array dialog box on and off. When you choose More, additional options are displayed, and the name of this button changes to Less. Object Base Point Specifies a new reference (base) point relative to the selected objects that will remain at a constant distance from the center point of the array as the objects are arrayed. To construct a polar array, AutoCAD determines the distance from the array’s center point to a reference (base) point on the last object selected. The point used depends on the type of object, as shown in the following table.
Set to Object’s Default - Uses the default base point of the object to position the arrayed object. To manually set the base point, clear this option. Base Point - Sets a new X and Y base point coordinate. Choose Pick Base Point to temporarily close the dialog box and specify a point. After you specify a point, the Array dialog box is redisplayed. Note - To avoid unexpected results, set the base point manually if you are constructing a polar array and do not want to rotate the objects.
Select Objects Specifies the objects used to construct the array. You can select objects before or after the Array dialog box is displayed. To select objects when the Array dialog box is displayed, choose Select Objects. The dialog box temporarily closes. When you finish selecting objects, press ENTER. The Array dialog box is redisplayed, and the number of objects selected is shown below the Select Objects button.
Prepared by: Yamanta Raj Niroula
79
An Introduction to AutoCAD
PENTASOFT
Note - If you select multiple objects, the base point of the last selected object is used to construct the array. Preview Area Shows a preview image of the array based on the current settings in the dialog box. The preview image is dynamically updated when you move to another field after changing a setting. Preview Closes the Array dialog box and displays the array in the current drawing. Choose Modify to return to the Array dialog box to make changes.
Create Breaks Using BREAK is a convenient way to create a gap in an object, resulting in two objects with a space between them. BREAK is often used to create space for block or text insertion.
You can create breaks in • • • • • • • •
Arcs Circles Ellipses and elliptical arcs Lines Polylines Rays Splines Xlines
When breaking an object, you can either • •
Select the object at the first break point and then specify a second break point Select the entire object and then specify two break points
Prepared by: Yamanta Raj Niroula
80
An Introduction to AutoCAD
PENTASOFT
The BREAK Command Breaks the selected object between two points
Modify toolbar: Modify menu: Break Command: break Select object: Use an object selection method, or specify the first break point (1) on an object
The prompts that are displayed next depend on how you select the object. If you select the object by using your pointing device, AutoCAD both selects the object and treats the selection point as the first break point. At the next prompt you can continue by specifying the second point or overriding the first point. Specify second break point or [First point]: Specify the second break point (2) or enter f
Second Break Point - Specifies the second point for AutoCAD to use to break the object. First Point - Overrides the original first point with the new point that you specify. Specify first break point: Specify second break point:
AutoCAD erases the portion of the object between the two points that you specify. If the second point is not on the object, AutoCAD selects the nearest point on the object; therefore, to break off one end of a line, arc, or polyline, specify the second point beyond the end to be removed. To split an object in two without erasing a portion, enter the same point for both the first and second points. You can do this by entering @ to specify the second point. Lines, arcs, circles, polylines, ellipses, splines, donuts, and several other object types can be split into two objects or have one end removed. AutoCAD converts a circle to an arc by removing a piece of the circle starting counterclockwise from the first to the second point.
Prepared by: Yamanta Raj Niroula
81
An Introduction to AutoCAD
PENTASOFT
Mirror Objects: Mirroring creates a mirror image of objects. It is useful for creating symmetrical objects because you can quickly draw half the object and then mirror it instead of drawing the entire object. You flip objects about an axis called a mirror line to create a mirror image. To specify this temporary mirror line, you enter two points. You can choose whether to delete or retain the original objects. Mirroring works in any plane parallel to the XY plane of the current UCS.
When you mirror text, attributes, and attribute definitions, they are reversed or turned upside down in the mirror image. To prevent this, set the MIRRTEXT system variable to 0 (off). Text then has the same alignment and justification as before the mirroring. Compare the following illustrations.
By default, MIRRTEXT is off. This system variable affects text that is created with the TEXT, ATTDEF, or MTEXT commands; attribute definitions; and variable attributes. Text and constant attributes within an inserted block are mirrored as a consequence of mirroring the entire block. These objects are inverted regardless of the MIRRTEXT setting.
Prepared by: Yamanta Raj Niroula
82
An Introduction to AutoCAD
PENTASOFT
Mirror in 3D With MIRROR3D, you can mirror objects along a specified mirroring plane. The mirroring plane can be one of the following: • • •
The plane of a planar object A plane parallel to the XY, YZ, or XZ plane of the current UCS that passes through a point you select A plane defined by three points that you select
The MIRROR Command Creates a mirror image copy of objects
Modify toolbar: Modify menu: Mirror Command line: mirror Select objects: Use an object selection method and press ENTER to finish Specify first point of mirror line: Specify a point (1) Specify second point of mirror line: Specify a point (2)
The two specified points become the endpoints of a line about which the selected objects are reflected. In 3D, this line orients a mirroring plane perpendicular to the XY plane of the user coordinate system (UCS) containing the mirror line. Delete source objects? [Yes/No] : Enter y or n, or press ENTER
Yes - Places the reflected image into the drawing and deletes the original objects. No - Places the reflected image into the drawing and retains the original objects. To manage the reflection properties of text objects, use the MIRRTEXT system variable. The default setting of MIRRTEXT is 1 (on), which causes a text object to be mirrored just like any other object. When MIRRTEXT is off (0), text is not mirrored
Prepared by: Yamanta Raj Niroula
83
An Introduction to AutoCAD
PENTASOFT
Offset an Object: Offsetting creates a new object whose shape parallels the shape of a selected object. Offsetting a circle or an arc creates a larger or smaller circle or arc, depending on which side you specify for the offset.
A highly effective drawing technique is to offset objects and then trim or extend their ends.
2D polylines and splines are trimmed automatically when the offset distance is larger than can otherwise be accommodated.
You can offset • • • • • • •
Lines Arcs Circles Ellipses and elliptical arcs (resulting in an oval-shaped spline) 2D polylines Construction lines (xlines) and rays Splines
Prepared by: Yamanta Raj Niroula
84
An Introduction to AutoCAD
PENTASOFT
The OFFSET Command Creates concentric circles, parallel lines, and parallel curves Offset is probably one of the most useful commands for constructing drawings. OFFSET creates a new object at a specified distance from an existing object or through a specified point.
Modify toolbar: Modify menu: Offset Command: offset Specify offset distance or [Through] enter t, or press ENTER
: Specify
a distance,
Offset Distance - Creates an object at a specified distance from an existing object. Select object to offset or : Select one object or press ENTER to end the command Specify point on side to offset?: Specify a point (1) on the side of the object you want to offset
AutoCAD® repeats the two prompts so that you can create multiple offset objects. To end the command, press ENTER at the Select Object to Offset prompt. Through - Creates an object passing through a specified point. Select object to offset or : Select one object or press ENTER to end the command Specify through point: Specify a point (1) through which you want the offset object to pass
Prepared by: Yamanta Raj Niroula
85
An Introduction to AutoCAD
PENTASOFT
AutoCAD repeats the two prompts so that you can create multiple offset objects. To end the command, press ENTER at the Select Object to Offset prompt.
Scale Objects: With scaling you can make an object larger or smaller, but you cannot alter its proportions. You can scale it by specifying a base point and a length, which is used as a scale factor based on the current drawing units, or by entering a scale factor. You can also specify the current length and a new length for the object. Scaling changes the size of all dimensions of the selected object. A scale factor greater than 1 enlarges the object. A scale factor less than 1 shrinks the object.
You can also scale by reference. Scaling by reference uses an existing measurement as a basis for the new size. To scale by reference, specify the current measurement and then the new desired size. For example, if one side of an object is 4.8 units long and you want to expand it to 7.5 units, use 4.8 as the reference length. You can use the Reference option to scale an entire drawing. For example, use this option when the original drawing units need to be changed. Select all objects in the drawing. Then use Reference to select two points and specify the intended distance. All the objects in the drawing are scaled accordingly.
The SCALE Command Enlarges or reduces selected objects proportionally in the X, Y, and Z directions
Modify toolbar: Modify menu: Scale Shortcut menu: Select the objects to scale, right-click in the drawing area, and choose Scale. Command: scale Select objects: Use an object selection method and press ENTER when you finish Specify base point: Specify a point (1)
Prepared by: Yamanta Raj Niroula
86
An Introduction to AutoCAD
PENTASOFT
The base point you specify identifies the point that remains in the same location as the selected objects change size (and thus move away from the stationary base point). Drag the cursor to make the image larger or smaller.
Specify scale factor or [Reference]: Specify a scale or enter r
Scale Factor - Multiplies the dimensions of the selected objects by the specified scale. A scale factor greater than 1 enlarges the objects. A scale factor between 0 and 1 shrinks the objects.
Reference - Scales the selected objects based on a reference length and a specified new length. Specify reference length <1>: Specify a distance or press ENTER Specify new length: Specify a distance
If the new length is longer than the reference length, the objects are enlarged.
Trim or Extend Objects: You can shorten or lengthen objects to meet the edges of other objects. This means you can create an object such as a line first and then later adjust it to fit exactly between other objects. Objects you select as cutting edges or boundary edges are not required to intersect the object being trimmed. You can trim or extend an object to a projected edge or to an extrapolated intersection; that is, where the objects would intersect if they were extended. If you do not specify a boundary and press ENTER at the Select Objects prompt, all objects become potential boundaries. This is called implied selection.
Prepared by: Yamanta Raj Niroula
87
An Introduction to AutoCAD
PENTASOFT
To select geometry within blocks as boundaries, you must use single, crossing, fence, or implied boundaries. Trim Objects You can trim objects so that they end precisely at boundary edges defined by other objects. Cutting edges can be lines, arcs, circles, polylines, ellipses, splines, xlines, regions, blocks, and rays. They can also be layout viewport objects in paper space. You can extend objects without leaving the TRIM command. Hold down SHIFT and select the objects to be extended. In this example, you clean up the intersection of two walls smoothly by trimming.
An object can be one of the cutting edges and one of the objects being trimmed. For example, in the illustrated light fixture, the circle is a cutting edge for the construction lines and is also being trimmed.
When you trim several objects, the different selection methods can help you choose the current cutting edges and objects to trim. In the following example, the cutting edges are selected using crossing selection.
Prepared by: Yamanta Raj Niroula
88
An Introduction to AutoCAD
PENTASOFT
The following example uses the fence selection method to select a series of objects for trimming.
You can trim objects to their nearest intersection with other objects. Instead of selecting cutting edges, you press ENTER. Then, when you select the objects to trim, AutoCAD automatically chooses the nearest objects in the drawing as cutting edges. In this example, the walls are trimmed so that they intersect smoothly.
The TRIM Command: Trims objects at a cutting edge defined by other objects
Modify toolbar: Modify menu: Trim Command line: trim Current settings: Projection = current Edge = current Select cutting edges... Select objects: Select one or more objects and press ENTER, or press ENTER to select all objects (implied selection)
Objects that can be trimmed include arcs, circles, elliptical arcs, lines, open 2D and 3D polylines, rays, splines, hatches, and xlines.
Prepared by: Yamanta Raj Niroula
89
An Introduction to AutoCAD
PENTASOFT
Select the objects that define the cutting edges at which you want to trim an object, or press ENTER to select all objects as potential cutting edges. Valid cutting edge objects include 2D and 3D polylines, arcs, circles, ellipses, lines, layout viewports, rays, regions, splines, text, and xlines. TRIM projects the cutting edges and the objects to be trimmed onto the XY plane of the current user coordinate system (UCS). Select object to trim or [Project/Edge/Undo]: Select an object to trim, press SHIFT and select an object to extend, or enter an option
When AutoCAD prompts you to select boundary edges, you can press ENTER and select the object to be trimmed. AutoCAD trims the object against the nearest candidate. You can use only the single, crossing, fence, and implied selection options to select boundaries that include blocks. Object to Trim Specifies the object to trim. AutoCAD repeats the prompt for the object to trim so that you can trim multiple objects. Pressing SHIFT while selecting an object extends it to the nearest boundary rather than trimming it. Pressing ENTER ends the command. If the selection point is between the end of the object and a cutting edge, TRIM removes the portion of the object that extends beyond the cutting edge. If the selection point is between two cutting edges, the portion between is deleted and the portions outside are preserved, turning one object into two. AutoCAD trims 2D wide polylines at their center lines. If the polyline is tapered, the width at the cutting edge is the same after trimming. The ends of a wide polyline are always square. Cutting a wide polyline at an angle causes portions of the end to extend beyond the cutting edge. Trimming a spline-fit polyline removes the curve-fit information and changes the splinedit segments into ordinary polyline segments. Project Specifies the projection AutoCAD uses when trimming objects. Enter a projection option [None/Ucs/View] : Enter an option or press ENTER
None - Specifies no projection. AutoCAD trims only objects that intersect with the cutting edge in 3D space.
Prepared by: Yamanta Raj Niroula
90
An Introduction to AutoCAD
PENTASOFT
UCS - Specifies projection onto the XY plane of the current UCS. AutoCAD trims objects that do not intersect with the cutting edge in 3D space.
View - Specifies projection along the current view direction. AutoCAD trims objects that intersect the boundary in the current view. Edge Determines whether an object is trimmed at another object’s implied edge or only to an object that intersects it in 3D space. Enter an implied edge extension mode [Extend/No extend] : Enter an option or press ENTER
Extend - Extends the cutting edge along its natural path to intersect an object in 3D space.
No Extend - Specifies that the object is trimmed only at a cutting edge that intersects it in 3D space.
Prepared by: Yamanta Raj Niroula
91
An Introduction to AutoCAD
PENTASOFT
Note - When trimming hatches, do not set Edge to Extend. If you do, gaps in the trim boundaries will not be bridged when trimming hatches, even when the gap tolerance is set to a correct value. Undo Reverses the most recent change made by TRIM. Extend Objects Extending operates the same way as trimming. You can extend objects so they end precisely at boundary edges defined by other objects. In this example, you extend the lines precisely to a circle, which is the boundary edge.
You can extend objects without leaving the TRIM command. Hold down SHIFT and select the objects to be extended.
The EXTEND Command Extends an object to meet another object EXTEND command elongates an object to a boundary. Objects that you can extend include arcs, elliptical arcs, lines, open 2D and 3D polylines, and rays.
Modify toolbar: Modify menu: Extend Command line: extend Select boundary edges... Select objects: Select one or more objects and press ENTER, or press ENTER to select all objects (implied selection) Select object to extend or shift-select to trim or [Project/Edge/Undo]: Select an object to extend, or hold down SHIFT and select an object to trim, or enter an option
Prepared by: Yamanta Raj Niroula
92
An Introduction to AutoCAD
PENTASOFT
Boundary Object Selection Uses selected objects to define the boundary edges to which you want to extend the object. Valid boundary objects include 2D and 3D polylines, arcs, blocks, circles, ellipses, layout viewports, lines, rays, regions, splines, text, and xlines. If you select a 2D polyline as a boundary object, AutoCAD ignores its width and extends objects to the centerline of the polyline. You can use only the single, crossing, fence, and implied selection options to select boundaries that include blocks. If you extend a tapered polyline segment, AutoCAD corrects the width of the extended end to continue its original taper to the new endpoint. If this causes the segment to have a negative ending width, the ending width becomes zero.
Extending a spline-fit polyline adds a new vertex to the control frame for the polyline. Object to Extend Specifies the object to extend. AutoCAD repeats the main prompt so that you can extend multiple objects. Pressing SHIFT while selecting an object trims it to the nearest boundary rather than extending it. Pressing ENTER ends the command. Project Specifies the projection method that AutoCAD uses when extending objects. Enter a projection option [None/Ucs/View] : Enter an option or press ENTER
None - Specifies no projection. AutoCAD extends only objects that intersect with the boundary edge in 3D space.
Prepared by: Yamanta Raj Niroula
93
An Introduction to AutoCAD
PENTASOFT
UCS - Specifies projection onto the XY plane of the current user coordinate system (UCS). AutoCAD extends objects that do not intersect with the boundary objects in 3D space.
View - Specifies projection along the current view direction.
Edge Extends the object to another object’s implied edge, or only to an object that actually intersects it in 3D space. Enter an implied edge extension mode [Extend/No extend] : Enter an option or press ENTER Extend - Extends the boundary object along its natural path to intersect another object or its implied edge in 3D space.
Prepared by: Yamanta Raj Niroula
94
An Introduction to AutoCAD
PENTASOFT
No Extend - Specifies that the object is to extend only to a boundary object that actually intersects it in 3D space.
Undo Reverses the most recent changes made by EXTEND. left viewport right viewport selected boundary selected object to extend extended not extended. Trim and Extend Wide Polylines Wide polylines trim and extend so that the centerline intersects the boundary. Because the ends of wide polylines are right-angle corners, part of the end extends past the boundary if the boundary is not perpendicular to the extended segment. If you trim or extend a tapered polyline segment, the width of the extended end is corrected to continue the original taper to the new endpoint. If this correction gives the segment a negative ending width, the ending width is forced to 0. Trim or Extend in 3D You can trim or extend an object to any other object in 3D space, regardless of whether the objects are on the same plane or parallel to the cutting or boundary edges. By using the PROJMODE and EDGEMODE system variables, you can choose one of three projections for trimming or extending: the XY plane of the current UCS, the current view plane, or true 3D, which is not a projection. In true 3D trimming or extending, objects must intersect with the boundaries in 3D space. If the two do not intersect when you trim or extend an object in the current UCS XY plane, the trimmed or extended object might not end precisely at the boundary in 3D space.
Stretch Objects: To stretch an object, you specify a base point and then a point of displacement. Because stretching moves the endpoints that lie within the crossing selection window, you must select the object with a crossing selection. To stretch with greater accuracy, you can combine grip editing with object snaps, grid snaps, and relative coordinate entry.
Prepared by: Yamanta Raj Niroula
95
An Introduction to AutoCAD
PENTASOFT
The STRETCH Command Moves or stretches objects
Modify toolbar: Modify menu: Stretch Command: stretch Select objects to stretch by crossing-window or crossing-polygon... Select objects: Use the cpolygon or crossing object selection method (1 and 2) and press ENTER when you finish
AutoCAD stretches arcs, elliptical arcs, lines, polyline segments, 2D solids, rays, traces, and splines that cross the selection window. STRETCH moves the endpoints that lie inside the window, leaving those outside the window unchanged. STRETCH also moves vertices of traces and 2D solids that lie inside the window and leaves those outside unchanged. Polylines are handled segment by segment, as if they were primitive lines or arcs. STRETCH does not modify 3D solids, polyline width, tangent, or curve-fitting information.
AutoCAD moves any objects entirely within the window or polygon, as if you were using MOVE. Specify base point or displacement: Specify a point (3) or press ENTER Specify second point of displacement: Specify a point (4) or press ENTER
Prepared by: Yamanta Raj Niroula
96
An Introduction to AutoCAD
PENTASOFT
If you enter a second point, the objects are stretched the vector distance from the base point to the second point. If you press ENTER at the Second Point of Displacement prompt, STRETCH treats the first point as the X,Y displacement. The STRETCH command can be used to move one or more vertices of an object whilst leaving the rest of the object unchanged. In the example below, a rectangle has been stretched by moving one vertex to create an irregular shape.
Use Grips to Edit Objects Grips are small squares that are displayed at strategic points on objects that you have selected with a pointing device. You can drag these grips to edit objects directly and quickly. •
•
•
Use Grip Modes You can drag grips to perform any stretch, move, rotate, scale, or mirror operations. You choose the editing operation to be performed by specifying a grip mode. Make Multiple Copies with Grips You can create multiple copies of objects as you modify them with any of the grip modes. Control Grips in Blocks You can specify whether a block displays a single grip or multiple grips.
Use Grip Modes Grips are small, solid-filled squares that are displayed at strategic points on objects that you have selected with a pointing device. You can drag these grips to stretch, move, rotate, scale, or mirror objects quickly. When grips are on, you select the objects you want before entering a command, and then you manipulate the objects with the pointing device.
Prepared by: Yamanta Raj Niroula
97
An Introduction to AutoCAD
PENTASOFT
To use grips, select a grip to act as the base point for the action. Then select one of the grip modes. You can cycle through these modes by pressing ENTER or SPACEBAR. You can also use shortcut keys or right-click to see all of the modes and options. You can use multiple grips as the base grips to keep the shape of the object intact between the selected grips. Hold down SHIFT as you select the grips. For quadrant grips on circles and ellipses, distance is measured from the center point, not the selected grip. For example, in Stretch mode, you can select a quadrant grip to stretch a circle and then specify a distance on the command line for the new radius. The distance is measured from the center of the circle, not the selected quadrant. If you select the center point to stretch the circle, the circle moves. When a 2D object lies on a plane other than the current UCS, the object is stretched on the plane on which it was created, not on the plane of the current UCS. You can limit the display of grips on selected objects. The GRIPOBJLIMIT system variable suppresses the display of grips when the initial selection set includes more than the specified number of objects. If you add objects to the current selection set, the limit does not apply. For example, if GRIPOBJLIMIT is set to 20, you can select 15 objects and then add 25 objects to the selection, and all objects display grips. Stretch with Grips Although the Stretch command can be very useful, it has largely been superseded by the use of "Grips" which allow this sort of modification to be made much more intuitively. To stretch an object using grips, simply select the object by clicking on it (you can do this without starting a command). The object becomes highlighted and small square grips appear at each vertex and various snap points, depending upon the object type. Click a grip to activate it and click again to reposition it. You can stretch an object by moving selected grips to new locations. Grips on text, block references, midpoints of lines, centers of circles, and point objects move the object rather than stretching it. This is an excellent method for moving block references and adjusting dimensions. Move with Grips You can move objects by the grip selected. Selected objects are highlighted and are moved the direction and distance of the next point location you specify. Rotate with Grips You can rotate selected objects around a base point by dragging and specifying a point location. Alternatively, you can enter an angle value. This is an excellent method for rotating block references.
Prepared by: Yamanta Raj Niroula
98
An Introduction to AutoCAD
PENTASOFT
Scale with Grips You can scale selected objects relative to a base point. Increase the size of an object by dragging outward from the base grip and specifying a point location, or decrease the size by dragging inward. Alternatively, you can enter a value for relative scaling. Mirror with Grips You can mirror selected objects across a temporary mirror line. Turning Ortho on helps you specify a vertical or horizontal mirror line.
Make Multiple Copies with Grips You can create multiple copies of objects as you modify them with any of the grip modes. For example, by using the Copy option, you can rotate the selected objects, leaving copies at each location you specify with the pointing device.
You can also make multiple copies by holding down SHIFT as you select the first point. For example, with the Stretch grip mode, you can stretch an object, such as a line, and then copy it to any point in the drawing area. AutoCAD continues to make multiple copies until you turn off grips. Define an Offset Snap or a Rotation Snap You can place multiple copies at regularly spaced intervals with an offset snap. The offset snap is defined by the distance between an object and the next copy. In the lighting layout below, the first copy of the light fixture symbol is placed at an offset of two units. All subsequent copies are then placed two units apart.
If you hold down SHIFT while you select multiple copy points with the pointing device, the graphics cursor snaps to an offset point based on the last two points you selected. In the illustration below, the midpoint of line 1 is at coordinate 8,5. Based on
Prepared by: Yamanta Raj Niroula
99
An Introduction to AutoCAD
PENTASOFT
that midpoint, line 2 was copied using the SHIFT key and Stretch grip mode; its midpoint is at 9,5. The third line snaps to an offset based on the coordinate values 10,5.
Similarly, you can place multiple copies at angular intervals around a base grip with a rotation snap. The rotation snap is defined as the angle between an object and the next copy when you are using Rotate grip mode. Hold down SHIFT to use the rotation snap.
Control Grips in Blocks You can specify whether a selected block reference displays a single grip at its insertion point or displays multiple grips associated with the objects grouped within the block.
Prepared by: Yamanta Raj Niroula
100
An Introduction to AutoCAD
PENTASOFT
Lengthen Objects You can change the included angle of arcs and the length of some objects. You can change the length of open lines, arcs, open polylines, elliptical arcs, and open splines. The results are similar to extending and trimming. You can alter length in several ways: •
Dragging an object endpoint (dynamically)
• •
Specifying a new length or angle as a percentage of the total length or angle Specifying an incremental length or angle measured from an endpoint
•
Specifying the object' s total absolute length or included angle
The LENGTHEN Command Changes the length of objects and the included angle of arcs LENGTHEN does not affect closed objects. The extrusion direction of the selected object need not be parallel to the Z axis of the current user coordinate system (UCS). Modify menu: Lengthen Command: lengthen Select an object or [DElta/Percent/Total/DYnamic]: Select one object or enter an option
Object Selection Displays the length and, where applicable, the included angle of the object. Current length: , included angle: Select an object or [DElta/Percent/Total/DYnamic]: Select one object, enter an option, or press ENTER to end the command
Delta Changes the length of an object by a specified increment, measured from the endpoint that is closest to the selection point. Delta also changes the angle of an arc by a specified increment, measured from the endpoint that is closest to the selection point. A positive value extends the object; a negative value trims it. Enter delta length or [Angle] : Specify a distance, enter a, or press ENTER
Delta Length Changes the length of the object by the specified increment. Select an object to change or [Undo]: Select one object or enter u
Prepared by: Yamanta Raj Niroula
101
An Introduction to AutoCAD
PENTASOFT
The prompt repeats until you press ENTER to end the command.
Angle Changes the included angle of the selected arc by the specified angle. Enter delta angle : Specify an angle or press ENTER Select an object to change or [Undo]: Select one object or enter u
The prompt repeats until you press ENTER to end the command.
Percent Sets the length of an object by a specified percentage of its total length. Percent also changes the angle of an arc by a specified percentage of the total included angle of the arc. Enter percentage length : Enter a positive nonzero value or press ENTER Select an object to change or [Undo]: Select one object or enter u
The prompt repeats until you press ENTER to end the command. Total Sets the length of a selected object by specifying the total absolute length from the fixed endpoint. Total also sets the included angle of a selected arc by a specified total angle. Specify total length or [Angle] : Specify a distance, enter a positive nonzero value, enter a, or press ENTER
Prepared by: Yamanta Raj Niroula
102
An Introduction to AutoCAD
PENTASOFT
Total Length Lengthens the object to the specified value from the endpoint that is closest to the selection point. Select an object to change or [Undo]: Select one object or enter u
The prompt repeats until you press ENTER to end the command. Angle Sets the included angle of the selected arc. Specify total angle : Specify an angle or press ENTER Select an object to change or [Undo]: Select one object or enter u
The prompt repeats until you press ENTER to end the command.
Dynamic Turns on Dynamic Dragging mode. You change the length of a selected object by dragging one of its endpoints. The other end remains fixed. Select an object to change or [Undo]: Select one object or enter u
The prompt repeats until you press ENTER to end the command.
Create Fillets Filleting connects two objects with a smoothly fitted arc of a specified radius. An inside corner is called a fillet and an outside corner is called a round; you can create both using FILLET in AutoCAD.
Prepared by: Yamanta Raj Niroula
103
An Introduction to AutoCAD
PENTASOFT
You can fillet • • • • • • • •
Arcs Circles Ellipses and elliptical arcs Lines Polylines Rays Splines Xlines
Using FILLET is also a convenient method of creating an arc with a specified radius that is tangent to two selected objects. FILLET can be used to round all corners on a polyline using a single command. If both objects being filleted are on the same layer, the fillet arc is created on that layer. Otherwise, the fillet arc is created on the current layer. The layer affects object properties including color and linetype. Use the Multiple option to fillet more than one set of objects without leaving the command.
Set the Fillet Radius The fillet radius is the radius of the arc that connects filleted objects. Changing the fillet radius affects subsequent fillets. If you set the fillet radius to 0, filleted objects are trimmed or extended until they intersect, but no arc is created.
Prepared by: Yamanta Raj Niroula
104
An Introduction to AutoCAD
PENTASOFT
Trim and Extend Filleted Objects You can use the Trim option to specify whether the selected objects are trimmed or extended to the endpoints of the resulting arc or left unchanged. By default, all objects except circles, full ellipses, closed polylines, and splines are trimmed or extended when filleted.
Control the Location of the Fillet Depending on the locations you specify, more than one possible fillet can exist between the selected objects. Compare the selection points and resulting fillets in the illustrations.
Fillet Line and Polyline Combinations For you to fillet line and polyline combinations, the line or its extension must intersect one of the polyline line segments. If the Trim option is on, the filleted objects and the fillet arc join to form a single new polyline.
Prepared by: Yamanta Raj Niroula
105
An Introduction to AutoCAD
PENTASOFT
Fillet an Entire Polyline You can fillet an entire polyline or remove fillets from an entire polyline. If you set a nonzero fillet radius, AutoCAD inserts fillet arcs at the vertex of each polyline segment that is long enough to accommodate the fillet radius.
If two polyline line segments converge as they approach an arc segment that separates them, AutoCAD removes the arc segment and replaces it with a fillet arc.
If you set the fillet radius to 0, no fillet arcs are inserted. If two polyline line segments are separated by one arc segment, AutoCAD removes that arc and extends the lines until they intersect.
Fillet Parallel Lines You can fillet parallel lines, xlines, and rays. AutoCAD ignores the current fillet radius and creates an arc that is tangent to both parallel objects and located in the plane common to both objects.
Prepared by: Yamanta Raj Niroula
106
An Introduction to AutoCAD
PENTASOFT
The first selected object must be a line or a ray, but the second object can be a line, an xline, or a ray. The fillet arc connects as shown in the illustration.
Fillet in 3D You can fillet coplanar objects with extrusion directions not parallel to the Z axis of the current UCS. AutoCAD determines the extrusion direction for the fillet arc in 3D space as follows. For objects on the same plane with the same extrusion direction normal to that plane, the fillet arc is on that plane and has the same extrusion direction. If the objects are on the same plane but have opposite or different extrusion directions, the fillet arc is placed on that object plane with an extrusion direction normal to the object plane and inclined towards the positive Z direction of the current UCS. For example, suppose two arcs, A and B, are on the same plane in 3D space but have opposite extrusion directions (0,0.5,0.8) and (0,–0.5,–0.8) relative to the current UCS. The fillet arc adopts the extrusion direction (0,0.5,0.8).
The FILLET Command: Rounds and fillets the edges of objects The FILLET Command rounds the edges of two arcs, circles, elliptical arcs, lines, polylines, rays, splines, or xlines with an arc of a specified radius. FILLET also rounds the edges of 3D solids. If the TRIMMODE system variable is set to 1, FILLET trims the intersecting lines to the endpoints of the fillet arc. If the selected lines do not intersect, AutoCAD® extends or trims them so that they do. If both objects you want to fillet are on the same layer, AutoCAD creates the fillet line on that layer. Otherwise, AutoCAD creates the fillet line on the current layer. The same is true for the fillet color, lineweight, and linetype. You can fillet line segments of a polyline that are adjacent, nonadjacent, intersecting, or separated by one segment. If they are nonadjacent, the polyline segments are extended to accommodate the fillet. If they are intersecting, the polyline segments are trimmed to accommodate the fillet. To create a fillet, the polyline segments must converge within the grid limits when limits checking is on.
Prepared by: Yamanta Raj Niroula
107
An Introduction to AutoCAD
PENTASOFT
The result is a single polyline that includes the fillet as an arc segment. All the properties of this new polyline, such as its layer, color, and linetype, are inherited from the first polyline selected. Note - Filleting an associative hatch whose boundary was defined from line segments removes hatch associativity. If the boundary was defined from a polyline, associativity is maintained.
Modify toolbar: Modify menu: Fillet Command: fillet Current settings: Mode = current, Radius = current Select first object or [Polyline/Radius/Trim/mUltiple]: Use an object selection method or enter an option
First Object Selects the first of two objects required to define a 2D fillet or the edge of a 3D solid to fillet. Select second object:
If you select lines, arcs, or polylines, AutoCAD extends them until they intersect or trims them at the intersection. You can fillet two lines with different extrusion directions only if the Z values of the endpoints of both lines are equal in the current user coordinate system (UCS). If the selected objects are straight line segments of a 2D polyline, they can be adjacent or separated by one other segment. If they are separated by another polyline segment, FILLET deletes the segment that separates them and replaces it with the fillet. More than one fillet can exist between arcs and circles. AutoCAD chooses the fillet with endpoints closest to the points you select.
Prepared by: Yamanta Raj Niroula
108
An Introduction to AutoCAD
PENTASOFT
FILLET does not trim circles; the fillet arc meets the circle smoothly.
If you select a 3D solid, you can select multiple edges, but you must select the edges individually. Enter fillet radius : Specify a distance or press ENTER Select an edge or [Chain/Radius]: Select edge(s), enter c, or enter r
Edge Selects a single edge. You can continue to select single edges until you press ENTER.
Prepared by: Yamanta Raj Niroula
109
An Introduction to AutoCAD
PENTASOFT
If you select three or more edges that converge at a vertex to form the corner of a box, AutoCAD computes a vertex blend that is part of a sphere if the three incident fillets have the same radii. Chain Toggles from selection of single edges to selection of sequential tangent edges. Select edge chain or : Select an edge chain, enter e, or enter r
Edge Chain - Selects a tangential sequence of edges when you select a single edge. For example, if you select an edge on the top of a 3D solid box, AutoCAD also selects the other tangential edges on the top. Edge - Switches to a single edge selection mode. Radius - Defines the radius of the fillet arc.
Radius Defines the radius of the fillet arc. Enter fillet radius : Specify a distance or press ENTER
AutoCAD displays the previous prompt: Select an edge or [Chain/Radius]: Select one or more edges or enter c or r
Polyline Inserts fillet arcs at each vertex of a 2D polyline where two line segments meet. Prepared by: Yamanta Raj Niroula
110
An Introduction to AutoCAD
PENTASOFT
Select 2D polyline:
If one arc segment separates two line segments that converge as they approach the arc segment, AutoCAD removes the arc segment and replaces it with a fillet arc.
Radius Defines the radius of the fillet arc. Specify fillet radius : Specify a distance or press ENTER
The value you enter becomes the current radius for subsequent VR commands. Changing this value does not affect existing fillet arcs. Trim Controls whether AutoCAD trims the selected edges to the fillet arc endpoints. Enter Trim mode option [Trim/No trim] : Enter an option or press ENTER
Trim - Trims the selected edges to the fillet arc endpoints. No Trim - Does not trim the selected edges. Multiple Rounds the edges of more than one set of objects. AutoCAD displays the main prompt and the Select Second Object prompt repeatedly until you press ENTER to end the command. If you enter an option other than First Object at the main prompt, the prompts for that option are displayed and then the main prompt is displayed again. All the fillets you created with the Multiple option are removed if you click Undo.
Create Chamfers Using CHAMFER is a fast way of creating a line between two nonparallel lines. It is usually used to represent a beveled edge on a corner. CHAMFER can also be used to bevel all corners of a polyline. You can chamfer lines, polylines, xlines, and rays. With the distance method, you specify the amount that each line should be trimmed or extended. With the angle method, you can also specify the length of the chamfer and the angle it forms with the first line.
Prepared by: Yamanta Raj Niroula
111
An Introduction to AutoCAD
PENTASOFT
You can retain the chamfered objects as they were before the chamfer, or you can trim or extend them to the chamfer line. If both objects being chamfered are on the same layer, the chamfer line is created on that layer. Otherwise, the chamfer line is created on the current layer. The layer affects object properties including color and linetype. Use the Multiple option to chamfer more than one set of objects without leaving the command.
Chamfer by Specifying Distances The chamfer distance is the amount each object is trimmed or extended to meet the chamfer line or to intersect the other. If both chamfer distances are 0, chamfering trims or extends the two objects until they intersect but does not create a chamfer line. The default setting for the first distance is the last distance specified. Because symmetrical distances are common, the default setting for the second distance is whatever you chose for the first distance. However, you can reset the chamfer distances. In this example, you set the chamfer distance to 0.5 for the first line and 0.25 for the second line. After you specify the chamfer distance, you select the two lines as shown.
Trim and Extend Chamfered Objects By default, objects are trimmed when chamfered, but you can use the Trim option to specify that they remain untrimmed. Chamfer by Specify Length and Angle You can chamfer two objects by specifying where on the first selected object the chamfer line starts, and then the angle the chamfer line forms with this object.
Prepared by: Yamanta Raj Niroula
112
An Introduction to AutoCAD
PENTASOFT
In this example, you chamfer two lines so that the chamfer line starts 1.5 units from the intersection along the first line and forms an angle of 30 degrees with this line.
Chamfer Polylines and Polyline Segments If the two objects you select for chamfering are segments of a polyline, they must be adjacent or separated by no more than one arc segment. If they are separated by an arc segment, as shown in the illustration, chamfering deletes the arc and replaces it with a chamfer line.
Chamfer an Entire Polyline When you chamfer an entire polyline, each intersection is chamfered. For best results, keep the first and second chamfer distances equal. In this example, the chamfer distances are set to equal values.
Prepared by: Yamanta Raj Niroula
113
An Introduction to AutoCAD
PENTASOFT
When you chamfer an entire polyline, AutoCAD chamfers only the segments that are long enough to accommodate the chamfer distance. The polyline in the following illustration has some segments too short to be chamfered.
The CHAMFER Command Bevels the edges of objects The Chamfer command enables you to create a chamfer between any two nonparallel lines as in the illustration below. Usually, the Chamfer command is used to set the chamfer distances before drawing the chamfer. If both objects you want to chamfer are on the same layer, the chamfer is created on that layer. Otherwise, the chamfer is created on the current layer. This is also true for color, linetype, and lineweight.
Modify toolbar: Modify menu: Chamfer Command: chamfer (TRIM mode) Current chamfer Dist1 = current, Dist2 = current Select first line or [Polyline/Distance/Angle/Trim/Method/mUltiple]:
Note - Chamfering an associative hatch whose boundary was defined from line segments removes hatch associativity. If you defined the boundary from a polyline, associativity is maintained. First Line Specifies the first of two edges required to define a two-dimensional chamfer, or the edge of a three-dimensional solid to chamfer. Select second line:
Prepared by: Yamanta Raj Niroula
114
An Introduction to AutoCAD
PENTASOFT
If the two lines you select are polyline segments, they must be adjacent to each other or separated by no more than one segment. If they’re separated by one line or arc segment, AutoCAD deletes the segment and replaces it with a chamfer line. If you select an edge on a 3D solid, you must indicate which one of the two surfaces adjacent to the edge is the base surface. Base surface selection... Enter surface selection option [Next/OK (current)] : Enter n or o, or press ENTER
Entering o or pressing ENTER sets the selected surface as the base surface. Entering n selects either of the two surfaces adjacent to the selected edge. Specify base surface chamfer distance : Specify other surface chamfer distance :
After you select the base surface and the chamfer distances, select the edges of the base surface to chamfer. You can select edges individually or all the edges at once. Select an edge or [Loop]: Select an edge, enter l, or press ENTER
Edge Selects an individual edge to chamfer. Loop Switches to Edge Loop mode. Select an edge loop or [Edge]: Select an edge, enter e, or press ENTER
Edge Loop - Selects all edges on the base surface.
Prepared by: Yamanta Raj Niroula
115
An Introduction to AutoCAD
PENTASOFT
Edge - Switches to Edge mode. Polyline Chamfers an entire 2D polyline. Select 2D polyline:
AutoCAD chamfers the intersecting line segments at each vertex of the polyline. Chamfers become new segments of the polyline. If the polyline includes segments that are too short to accommodate the chamfer distance, those segments are not chamfered.
Distance Sets the distance of the chamfer from the endpoint of the selected edge. Specify first chamfer distance : Specify second chamfer distance :
If you set both distances to zero, AutoCAD extends or trims the two lines so they end at the same point. Angle Sets the chamfer distances using a chamfer distance for the first line and an angle for the second line. Specify chamfer length on the first line : Specify chamfer angle from the first line :
Trim Controls whether AutoCAD trims the selected edges to the chamfer line endpoints. Prepared by: Yamanta Raj Niroula
116
An Introduction to AutoCAD
PENTASOFT
Enter Trim mode option [Trim/No trim] :
Note: Trim sets the TRIMMODE system variable to 1; No Trim sets TRIMMODE to 0. If the TRIMMODE system variable is set to 1, CHAMFER trims the intersecting lines to the endpoints of the chamfer line. If the selected lines do not intersect, AutoCAD extends or trims them so that they do. If TRIMMODE is set to 0, AutoCAD creates the chamfer without trimming the selected lines. Method Controls whether AutoCAD uses two distances or a distance and an angle to create the chamfer. Enter trim method [Distance/Angle] :
Multiple Bevels the edges of more than one set of objects. AutoCAD displays the main prompt and the Select Second Object prompt repeatedly until you press ENTER to end the command. If you enter an option other than First Object at the main prompt, the prompts for that option are displayed and then the main prompt is displayed again. Undo.
All the chamfers you created with the Multiple option are removed if you click
Disassociate Compound Objects (Explode) You can explode a compound object, such as a polyline, dimension, hatch, or block reference, to convert it into individual elements. For example, exploding a polyline breaks it down to simple lines and arcs. Exploding a block reference or an associative dimension replaces it with copies of the objects that compose the block or dimension.
Explode Dimensions and Hatches When you explode a dimension or a hatch, all associativity is lost and the dimension or hatch object is replaced by individual objects such as lines, text, points, and 2D solids.
Explode Polylines When you explode a polyline, AutoCAD discards any associated width information. The resulting lines and arcs follow the polyline' s centerline. If you explode a block that contains a polyline, you need to explode the polyline separately. If you explode a donut, its width becomes 0.
Explode Block References
Prepared by: Yamanta Raj Niroula
117
An Introduction to AutoCAD
PENTASOFT
If you explode a block with attributes, the attribute values are lost, leaving only the attribute definitions. The colors and linetypes of objects in exploded block references can change.
Explode External References An external reference (xref) is a drawing file linked (or attached) to another drawing. You cannot explode xrefs and their dependent blocks.
The EXPLODE Command Breaks a compound object into its component objects A compound object comprises more than one AutoCAD object. For example, a block is a compound object.
Modify toolbar: Modify menu: Explode Command: explode Select objects: Use an object selection method and press ENTER when you finish
The color, linetype, and lineweight of any exploded object might change. Other results differ depending on the type of compound object you’re exploding. See the following list of objects that can be exploded and the results for each. Note If you’re using a script or an ObjectARX™ function, you can explode only one object at a time. 2D and Lightweight Polyline Discards any associated width or tangent information. For wide polylines, AutoCAD places the resulting lines and arcs along the center of the polyline. 3D Polyline - Explodes into line segments. Any linetype assigned to the 3D polyline is applied to each resulting line segment. 3D Solid - Explodes planar surfaces into regions. Nonplanar surfaces explode into bodies. Arc - If within a nonuniformly scaled block, explodes into elliptical arcs. Block - Removes one grouping level at a time. If a block contains a polyline or a nested block, exploding the block exposes the polyline or nested block object, which must then be exploded to expose its individual objects.
Prepared by: Yamanta Raj Niroula
118
An Introduction to AutoCAD
PENTASOFT
Blocks with equal X, Y, and Z scales explode into their component objects. Blocks with unequal X, Y, and Z scales (nonuniformly scaled blocks) might explode into unexpected objects. When nonuniformly scaled blocks contain objects that cannot be exploded, they are collected into an anonymous block (named with a “*E” prefix) and referenced with the nonuniform scaling. If all the objects in such a block cannot be exploded, the selected block reference will not be exploded. Body, 3D Solid, and Region entities in a nonuniformly scaled block cannot be exploded. Exploding a block that contains attributes deletes the attribute values and redisplays the attribute definitions. Blocks inserted with MINSERT and external references (xrefs) and their dependent blocks cannot be exploded. Body - Explodes into a single-surface body (nonplanar surfaces), regions, or curves. Circle - If within a nonuniformly scaled block, explodes into ellipses. Leaders - Explodes into lines, splines, solids (arrow heads), block inserts (arrow heads, annotation blocks), multiline text, or tolerance objects, depending on the leader. Multiline Text - Explodes into text objects. Multiline - Explodes into lines and arcs. Polyface Mesh - Explodes one-vertex meshes into a point object. Twovertex meshes explode into a line. Three-vertex meshes explode into 3D faces. Region - Explodes into lines, arcs, or splines.
The RENAME Command Changes the names of objects Blocks, layers, linetypes, and other special objects are stored by name and are called named objects. Use RENAME to change the names of these objects. You can also use RENAME to view a list of all blocks and definition table entries in the current drawing. You can use the wild-card characters * and ? to rename groups of objects. You can' t rename some standard objects, such as layer 0 and the CONTINUOUS linetype. Format menu: Rename Command: rename
The Rename dialog box is displayed. If you enter -rename at the Command prompt, RENAME displays prompts on the command line.
Prepared by: Yamanta Raj Niroula
119
An Introduction to AutoCAD
PENTASOFT
Rename Dialog Box Renames named objects.
Named Objects - Lists named objects in a drawing by category: blocks, dimension styles, layers, linetypes, plot styles, table styles, text styles, UCSs, views, and model space viewport configurations. Select the objects you want to rename. Items - Displays named objects of the type specified in Named Objects. Select the name you want to change. Old Name - Specifies the named object to be renamed. Enter a name or select a name from the Items list. Rename To - Specifies the new name you want to assign to the object. Enter a name and choose Rename To to apply the name change. RENAME Command Line If you enter -rename at the Command prompt, RENAME displays prompts on the command line. Enter object type to rename [Block/Dimstyle/LAyer/LType/Plotstyle/textStyle/ Tablestyle/Ucs/VIew/VPort]: Enter a named object type to rename an object Enter old object name: Enter the old name Enter new object name: Enter the new name
Prepared by: Yamanta Raj Niroula
120
An Introduction to AutoCAD
PENTASOFT
Copy Properties Between Objects You can copy some or all properties of one object to other objects using Match Properties. The types of properties that can be copied include, but are not limited to, color, layer, linetype, linetype scale, lineweight, plot style, and 3D thickness. By default, all applicable properties are automatically copied from the first object you selected to the other objects. If you don' t want a specific property or properties to be copied, use the Settings option to suppress the copying of that property. You can choose the Settings option at any time during the command.
The MATCHPROP Command Applies the properties of a selected object to other objects
Standard toolbar: Modify menu: Match Properties Command line: matchprop or painter Select source object: Select the object whose properties you want to copy Current active settings: Currently selected matchprop settings Select destination object(s) or [Settings]: Enter s or select one or more objects to copy properties to
Destination Object(s) - Specifies the objects to which you want to copy the properties of the source object. You can continue selecting destination objects, or press ENTER to apply the properties and end the command. Settings - Displays the Property Settings dialog box, in which you can control which object properties to copy to the destination objects. By default, AutoCAD selects all object properties in the Property Settings dialog box for copying. Property Settings Dialog Box Specifies properties to be copied with MATCHPROP. Select one or more settings.
Prepared by: Yamanta Raj Niroula
121
An Introduction to AutoCAD
PENTASOFT
Color - Changes the color of the destination object to that of the source object. Available for all objects. Layer - Changes the layer of the destination object to that of the source object. Available for all objects. Linetype - Changes the linetype of the destination object to that of the source object. Available for all objects except attributes, hatches, multiline text, points, and viewports. Linetype Scale - Changes the linetype scale factor of the destination object to that of the source object. Available for all objects except attributes, hatches, multiline text, points, and viewports. Lineweight - Changes the lineweight of the destination object to that of the source object. Available for all objects. Thickness - Changes the thickness of the destination object to that of the source object. Available only for arcs, attributes, circles, lines, points, 2D polylines, regions, text, and traces. Plot Style - Changes the plot style of the destination object to that of the source object. If you are working in color dependent plot style mode (PSTYLEPOLICY is set to 1), this option is unavailable. Available for all objects. Dimension - In addition to basic object properties, changes the dimension style of the destination object to that of the source object. Available only for dimension, leader, and tolerance objects. Polyline - In addition to basic object properties, changes the width and linetype generation properties of the destination polyline to those of the source polyline. The fit/smooth property and the elevation of the source polyline are not transferred to the destination polyline. If the source polyline has variable width, the width property is not transferred to the destination polyline. Text - In addition to basic object properties, changes the text style of the destination object to that of the source object. Available only for single-line and multiline text objects. Viewport - In addition to basic object properties, changes the following properties of the destination paper space viewport to match those of the source viewport: on/off, display locking, standard or custom scale, shade plot, snap, grid, and UCS icon visibility and location. The settings for clipping and for UCS per viewport and the freeze/thaw state of the layers are not transferred to the destination object. Hatch - In addition to basic object properties, changes the hatch pattern of the destination object to that of the source object. Available only for hatch objects. Table - In addition to basic object properties, changes the table style of the destination object to that of the source object. Available only for table objects.
Prepared by: Yamanta Raj Niroula
122
An Introduction to AutoCAD
PENTASOFT
Tips & Tricks Always look at the command line for guidance when you are learning new AutoCAD commands. The command line will prompt you for information and this is the easiest way to find out how a new command works. This is especially true for the more complicated commands like Trim and Extend. The command line window displays 3 lines of text by default. You can change this by clicking and dragging the top of the window frame. When you are starting with AutoCAD you may like to see more than 3 lines. The illustration below shows the command line window increased in size to 6 lines. The command line can also be displayed as a floating text window. The AutoCAD text window is displayed by pressing the F2 key on the keyboard. See Function Keys on the Drawing Aids section for more details. You can control the way text is mirrored using the MIRRTEXT variable. You can use the Fillet command with a radius of zero to trim intersecting lines back to their intersection. Of course, you could also achieve this effect with the Trim command but if you have a number of operations to complete, the Fillet method is much quicker.
Prepared by: Yamanta Raj Niroula
123
An Introduction to AutoCAD
PENTASOFT
Creating and Working with Polylines The Polyline Family Polylines differ from lines in that they are more complex objects. A single polyline can be composed of a number of straight-line or arc segments. Polylines can also be given line widths to make them appear solid. You may be wondering, if Polylines are so useful, why bother using ordinary lines at all? There are a number of answers to this question. The most frequently given answer is that because of their complexity, polylines use up more disk space than the equivalent line. As it is desirable to keep file sizes as small as possible, it is a good idea to use lines rather than polylines unless you have a particular requirement. You will also find, as you work with AutoCAD that lines and polylines are operationally different. Sometimes it is easier to work with polylines for certain tasks and at other times lines are best. You will quickly learn the pros and cons of these two sorts of line when you begin drawing with AutoCAD. PLINE command lets you draw the line and arc segments, but from start to end, it is treated as a single object. With PLINE command, you can draw the objects with line width also. The PLINE can be edited and converted in to a spline (smooth polyline) which makes it ideal for drawing contour profile. Plines have the following characteristics: • • • • • • •
They can be drawn with dot-dash or complex linetypes. They can be of uniform width or nonuniform width (tapered). The sequence of lines and arcs can form a closed polygon or an ellipse. 2D polylines can be edited to insert, move or delete vertices or to join several lines, arcs and polylines into one polyline. Fillets and chamfers can be added wherever desired. Spline and curve fitting can be performed on a 2D polyline. The area and perimeter of a 2D polyline can be calculated.
The Polyline or PLINE command is similar to the line command except that the resulting object may be composed of a number of segments which form a single object. In addition to the two ends a polyline is said to have vertices (singular vertex) where intermediate line segments join. In practice the Polyline command works in the same way as the Line command allowing you to pick as many points as you like. Again, just hit Enter to end. As with the Line command, you also have the option to automatically close a polyline end to end. To do this, type C to use the close option instead of hitting Enter. Follow the command sequence below to see how this works.
Prepared by: Yamanta Raj Niroula
124
An Introduction to AutoCAD
PENTASOFT
Multisegmented lines provide editing capabilities unavailable for single lines. For example, you can adjust their width and curvature. After you' ve created a polyline, you can edit it with PEDIT or use EXPLODE to convert it to individual line and arc segments. You can •
Convert a spline-fit polyline into a true spline with SPLINE
•
Use closed polylines to create a polygon
•
Create a polyline from the boundaries of overlapping objects
Create Arc Polylines When you draw arc segments in a polyline, the first point of the arc is the endpoint of the previous segment. You can specify the angle, center point, direction, or radius of the arc. You can also complete the arc by specifying a second point and an endpoint.
Create Closed Polylines You can draw a closed polyline to create a polygon. To close a polyline, specify the starting point of the last side of the object, enter c (Close), and press ENTER.
Create Wide Polylines You can draw polylines of various widths by using the Width and Halfwidth options. You can set the width of individual segments and make them taper gradually from one width to another. These options become available after you specify a starting point for the polyline.
The Width and Halfwidth options set the width of the next polyline segments you draw. Zero (0) width produces a thin line. Widths greater than zero produce wide lines, which are filled if Fill mode is on and outlined if Fill mode is off. The Halfwidth option sets width by specifying the distance from the center of the wide polyline to an outside edge.
Taper When you use the Width option, you are prompted for both a starting and an ending width. By entering different values, you can taper the polyline. The starting and ending points of wide polyline segments are in the center of the line. Intersections of adjacent wide segments are usually beveled. However, nontangent arc segments, acute angles, or segments that use a dash-dot linetype are not beveled. Prepared by: Yamanta Raj Niroula
125
An Introduction to AutoCAD
PENTASOFT
Create Polylines from the Boundaries of Objects You can create a polyline from the boundaries of overlapping objects that form a closed area. A polyline created using the boundary method is a separate object, distinct from the objects used to create it. You can edit it using the same methods used to edit other polylines. To expedite the boundary selection process in large or complex drawings, you can specify a group of boundary candidates, called a boundary set. You create this set by selecting the objects you want to use define the boundary.
The PLINE Command Creates two-dimensional polylines
Draw toolbar: Draw menu: Polyline Command: PLINE Specify start point: Use one of the point fixing methods Current line-width is 0.0000 Specify next point or [Arc/Halfwidth/Length/Undo/Width]: Use one of the point fixing methods or enter an option Specify next point or [Arc/Close/Halfwidth/Length/Undo/Width]: Use one of the point fixing methods or enter an option
It is worth while taking some time to familiarize you with the Polyline command as it is an extremely useful command to know The Undo option is particularly useful. This allows you to unpick polyline vertices, one at a time so that you can easily correct mistakes. Polylines can be edited after they are created to, for example, change their width. You can do this using the PEDIT command, Modify Object Polyline from the pulldown menu. Specify start point: Specify a point (1) Current line-width is Specify next point or [Arc/Close/Halfwidth/Length/Undo/Width]: Specify a
Prepared by: Yamanta Raj Niroula
126
An Introduction to AutoCAD
PENTASOFT
point (2) or enter an option
The PLINEGEN system variable controls the linetype pattern display around and the smoothness of the vertices of a 2D polyline. Setting PLINEGEN to 1 generates new polylines in a continuous pattern around the vertices of the completed polyline. Setting PLINEGEN to 0 starts and ends the polyline with a dash at each vertex. PLINEGEN does not apply to polylines with tapered segments.
Next Point Draws a line segment. AutoCAD repeats the previous prompt. Arc Adds arc segments to the polyline. Specify endpoint of arc or [Angle/CEnter/CLose/Direction/Halfwidth/Line/Radius/Second pt/Undo/ Width]: Specify a point (2) or enter an option
Note: For the Center option of the PLINE command, enter ce; for the Center object snap, enter cen or center. Endpoint of Arc Draws an arc segment. The arc segment starts at the last point tangent to the previous segment of the polyline. AutoCAD repeats the previous prompt. Angle Specifies the included angle of the arc segment from the start point. Specify included angle:
Entering a positive number creates counterclockwise arc segments. Entering a negative number creates clockwise arc segments. Specify endpoint of arc or [Center/Radius]: Specify a point or enter an option
Prepared by: Yamanta Raj Niroula
127
An Introduction to AutoCAD
PENTASOFT
Endpoint of Arc -Specifies the endpoint and draws the arc segment. Center - Specifies the center of the arc segment. Specify center point of arc:
Radius - Specifies the radius of the arc segment. Specify radius of arc: Specify a distance Specify direction of chord for arc : Specify a point or press ENTER
Center -Specifies the center of the arc segment. Specify center point of arc: Specify a point (2) Specify endpoint of arc or [Angle/Length]: Specify a point (3) or enter an option
Endpoint of Arc - Specifies the endpoint and draws the arc segment. Angle - Specifies the included angle of the arc segment from the start point. Specify included angle:
Length - Specifies the chord length of the arc segment. If the previous segment is an arc, AutoCAD draws the new arc segment tangent to the previous arc segment. Specify length of chord:
Close Closes a polyline with an arc segment. Direction Specifies a starting direction for the arc segment. Specify the tangent direction from the start point of arc: Specify a point (2) Specify endpoint of arc: Specify a point (3)
Halfwidth Specifies the width from the center of a wide polyline segment to one of its edges. Specify starting half-width : Enter a value or press ENTER Specify ending half-width : Enter a value or press ENTER
The starting half-width becomes the default ending half-width. The ending halfwidth becomes the uniform half-width for all subsequent segments until you change the half-width again. The starting and ending points of wide line segments are at the center of the line. Prepared by: Yamanta Raj Niroula
128
An Introduction to AutoCAD
PENTASOFT
Typically, the intersections of adjacent wide polyline segments are beveled. No beveling is performed for nontangent arc segments or very acute angles or when a dot-dash linetype is used. Line Exits the Arc option and returns to the initial PLINE command prompts. Radius Specifies the radius of the arc segment. Specify radius of arc: Specify a distance Specify endpoint of arc or [Angle]: Specify a point or enter a
Endpoint of Arc - Specifies the endpoint and draws the arc segment. Angle - Specifies the included angle for the arc segment. Specify included angle: Specify direction of chord for arc : Specify an angle or press ENTER
Second Pt Specifies the second point and endpoint of a threepoint arc. Specify second point on arc: Specify a point (2) Specify end point of arc: Specify a point (3)
Undo Removes the most recent arc segment added to the polyline. Width Specifies the width of the next arc segment. Specify starting width : Enter a value or press ENTER Specify ending width : Enter a value or press ENTER
The starting width becomes the default ending width. The ending width becomes the uniform width for all subsequent segments until you change the width again. The starting and ending points of wide line segments are at the center of the line. Typically, the intersections of adjacent wide polyline segments are beveled. No beveling is performed for nontangent arc segments, very acute angles, or when a dot-dash linetype is used.
Prepared by: Yamanta Raj Niroula
129
An Introduction to AutoCAD
PENTASOFT
Close Draws a line segment from the current position to the starting point of the polyline, creating a closed polyline.
Halfwidth edges.
Specifies the width from the center of a wide polyline line segment to one of its
Specify starting half-width : Enter a value or press ENTER Specify ending half-width : Enter a value or press ENTER
The starting half-width becomes the default ending half-width. The ending half-width becomes the uniform half-width for all subsequent segments until you change the half-width again. The starting and ending points of wide line segments are at the center of the line. Typically, the intersections of adjacent wide polyline segments are beveled. No beveling is performed for nontangent arc segments or very acute angles or when a dot-dash linetype is used. Length Draws a line segment of a specified length at the same angle as the previous segment. If the previous segment is an arc, AutoCAD draws the new line segment tangent to that arc segment. Specify length of line: Specify a distance
Undo Removes the most recent line segment added to the polyline. Width Specifies the width of the next line segment. Specify starting width : Enter a value or press ENTER Specify ending width : Enter a value or press ENTER
The starting width becomes the default ending
Prepared by: Yamanta Raj Niroula
130
An Introduction to AutoCAD
PENTASOFT
width. The ending width becomes the uniform width for all subsequent segments until you change the width again. The starting and ending points of wide line segments are at the center of the line. Typically, the intersections of adjacent wide polyline segments are beveled. No beveling is performed for nontangent arc segments or very acute angles or when a dot-dash linetype is used.
The RECTANGLE Command The Rectangle command is used to draw a rectangle whose sides are vertical and horizontal. The position and size of the rectangle are defined by picking two diagonal corners. The rectangle isn' t really an AutoCAD object at all. It is, in fact, just a closed polyline which is automatically drawn for you. Command line: rectang or rectangle Specify first corner point or [Chamfer/Elevation/Fillet/Thickness/Width]: Enter an option or specify a point
First Corner Specifies a corner point of the rectangle. Specify other corner point or [Dimensions]: Specify a point (2) or enter d
Other Corner - Creates a rectangle using the specified points as diagonally opposite corners. The sides of the rectangle are parallel to the X and Y axis of the current UCS. Dimensions - Creates a rectangle using length and width values. A second specified point locates the rectangle in one of four locations relative to the first corner point. Specify length for rectangles <0.0000> Enter the length of the rectangle Specify width for rectangles <0.0000> Enter the width of the rectangle Specify other corner point or [Dimensions] Specify a point; move the cursor to display one of four possible locations for the rectangle and click the one that you want
Chamfer Sets the chamfer distances for the rectangle. Specify distance Specify distance
first chamfer distance for rectangles : Specify a or press ENTER second chamfer distance for rectangles : Specify a or press ENTER
The values become the current chamfer distances for subsequent RECTANG commands. Elevation Specifies the elevation of the rectangle.
Prepared by: Yamanta Raj Niroula
131
An Introduction to AutoCAD
PENTASOFT
Specify the elevation for rectangles : Specify a distance or press ENTER
The value becomes the current elevation for subsequent RECTANG commands. Fillet Specifies the fillet radius of the rectangle. Specify fillet radius for rectangles : Specify a distance or press ENTER
The value becomes the current fillet radius for subsequent RECTANG commands. Thickness Specifies the thickness of the rectangle. Specify thickness for rectangles : Specify a distance or press ENTER
The value becomes the current thickness for subsequent RECTANG commands. Width Specifies the polyline width of the rectangle to be drawn. Specify line width for rectangles : Specify a distance or press ENTER
The value becomes the current polyline width for subsequent RECTANG commands.
Modifying Polylines You can edit polylines by closing and opening them and by moving, adding, or deleting individual vertices. You can straighten the polyline between any two vertices and toggle the linetype so that a dash appears before and after each vertex. You can set a uniform width for the entire polyline or control the width of each segment. You can also create a linear approximation of a spline from a polyline.
Joined Polyline Segments You can join a line, an arc, or another polyline to an open polyline if their ends connect or are close to each other. If the ends are not coincident but are within a distance that you can set, called the fuzz distance, the ends are joined by either trimming them, extending them, or connecting them with a new segment.
Properties of Modified Polylines If the properties of several objects being joined into a polyline differ, the resulting polyline inherits the properties of the first object that you selected. If two lines meet a
Prepared by: Yamanta Raj Niroula
132
An Introduction to AutoCAD
PENTASOFT
polyline in a Y shape, AutoCAD selects one of the lines and joins it to the polyline. Joining also causes an implicit decurve, with AutoCAD discarding the spline information of the original polyline and any polylines being joined to it. Once the joining is completed, you can fit a new spline to the resulting polyline.
Additional Editing Options for Polylines In addition to the general editing operations available for most objects, there are additional options available for editing and joining polylines with PEDIT.
The PEDIT Command: Edits polylines and three-dimensional polygon meshes
Modify II toolbar: Modify menu: Object
Polyline
Shortcut menu: Select a polyline to edit, right-click in the drawing area, and choose Polyline Edit. Command : pedit Select polyline or [Multiple]: Use an object selection method or enter m
Multiple Enables selection for more than one object. The remaining prompts depend on whether you have selected a 2D polyline, a 3D polyline, or 3D polygon mesh. If the selected object is a line or an arc, AutoCAD prompts: Object selected is not a polyline. Do you want it to turn into one? : Enter y or n, or press ENTER
If you enter y, the object is converted into a single-segment 2D polyline that you can edit. You can use this operation to join lines and arcs into a polyline. When the PEDITACCEPT system variable is set to 1, this prompt is suppressed, and the selected object is automatically converted to a polyline. 2D Polyline Selection If you select a 2D polyline, AutoCAD prompts: Enter an option [Close/Join/Width/Edit vertex/Fit/Spline/Decurve/Ltype gen/Undo]: Enter an option or press ENTER to end the command
Prepared by: Yamanta Raj Niroula
133
An Introduction to AutoCAD
PENTASOFT
If the polyline you select is a closed polyline, Open replaces the Close option in the prompt. You can edit a 2D polyline if its normal is parallel to and in the same direction as the Z axis of the current UCS. Close Creates the closing segment of the polyline, connecting the last segment with the first. AutoCAD considers the polyline open unless you close it using the Close option. Open Removes the closing segment of the polyline. AutoCAD considers the polyline closed unless you open it using the Open option. Join Adds lines, arcs, or polylines to the end of an open polyline and removes the curve fitting from a curve-fit polyline. For objects to join the polyline, their endpoints must touch unless you use the Multiple option at the first PEDIT prompt. In this case, you can join polylines that do not touch if the fuzz distance is set to a value large enough to include the endpoints. Select objects: Use an object selection method
If you previously selected multiple objects using the Multiple option, AutoCAD displays the following prompt: Enter fuzz distance or [Jointype]<0.0000>: Enter a distance or j
Jointype Sets the method of joining selected polylines. Enter a vertex editing option Enter join type [Extend/Add/Both}: Enter e, a, or b
Extend - Joins the selected polylines by extending or trimming the segments to the nearest endpoints. Add - Joins the selected polylines by adding a straight segment between the nearest endpoints. Both - Joins the selected polylines by extending or trimming if possible. Otherwise joins the selected polylines by adding a straight segment between the nearest endpoints.
Prepared by: Yamanta Raj Niroula
134
An Introduction to AutoCAD
PENTASOFT
Width Specifies a new uniform width for the entire polyline. Specify new width for all segments:
You can use the Width option of the Edit Vertex option (see page 694) to change the starting and ending widths of a segment.
Edit Vertex Marks the first vertex of the polyline by drawing an X on the screen. If you have specified a tangent direction for this vertex, an arrow is also drawn in that direction. AutoCAD prompts: [Next/Previous/Break/Insert/Move/Regen/Straighten/Tangent/Width/eXit] : Enter an option or press ENTER
Pressing ENTER accepts the current default, which is either Next or Previous.
Next Moves the X marker to the next vertex. The marker does not wrap around from the end to the start of the polyline even if the polyline is closed. selected open polyline other objects selected polyline and objects joined varying width uniform width beginning vertex next vertex back to previous vertex Previous Moves the X marker to the previous vertex. The marker does not wrap around from the start to the end of the polyline even if the polyline is closed. Break Saves the location of the marked vertex while you move the X marker to any other vertex.
Prepared by: Yamanta Raj Niroula
135
An Introduction to AutoCAD
PENTASOFT
Enter an option [Next/Previous/Go/eXit] : Enter an option or press ENTER
If one of the specified vertices is at an end of the polyline, the result is one truncated polyline. If both specified vertices are at endpoints of the polyline, or if just one vertex is specified and it is at an endpoint, you cannot use Break. Next Moves the X marker to the next vertex. The marker does not wrap around from the end to the start of the polyline, even if the polyline is closed. Previous - Moves the X marker to the previous vertex. The marker does not wrap around from the start to the end of the polyline, even if the polyline is closed. Go - Deletes any segments and vertices between the two vertices you specify and returns to Edit Vertex mode. Exit - Exits Break and returns to Edit Vertex mode. Insert Adds a new vertex to the polyline after the marked vertex. Specify location for new vertex: Specify a point (1)
Move Moves the marked vertex. Specify new location for marked vertex: Specify a point (1)
Regen Regenerates the polyline.
Prepared by: Yamanta Raj Niroula
136
An Introduction to AutoCAD
PENTASOFT
Straighten vertex.
Saves the location of the marked vertex while you move the X marker to any other
If you want to remove an arc segment that connects two straight segments of a polyline and then extend the straight segments until they intersect, use the FILLET command with a fillet radius of 0. Enter an option [Next/Previous/Go/eXit] : Enter an option or press ENTER
Next - Moves the X marker to the next vertex. Previous - Moves the X marker to the previous vertex. Go - Deletes any segments and vertices between the two vertices you select, replaces them with single straight line segments, and returns to Edit Vertex mode. If you specify only one vertex by entering go without moving the X marker, the segment following that vertex is straightened if it is an arc. Exit - Exits Straighten and returns to Edit Vertex mode. marked vertex Tangent Attaches a tangent direction to the marked vertex for use later in curve fitting. AutoCAD prompts: Specify direction of vertex tangent: Specify a point or enter an angle
Width Changes the starting and ending widths for the segment that immediately follows the marked vertex. Specify enter a Specify enter a
starting width for next segment : Specify a point, value, or press ENTER ending width for next segment : Specify a point, value, or press ENTER
You must regenerate the polyline to display the new width. Prepared by: Yamanta Raj Niroula
137
An Introduction to AutoCAD
PENTASOFT
Exit Exits Edit Vertex mode. Fit Creates an arc-fit polyline, a smooth curve consisting of arcs joining each pair of vertices. The curve passes through all vertices of the polyline and uses any tangent direction you specify.
Spline Uses the vertices of the selected polyline as the control points, or frame, of a curve approximating a B-spline. This curve, called a spline-fit polyline, passes through the first and last control points unless the original polyline was closed. The curve is pulled toward the other points but does not necessarily pass through them. The more control points you specify in a particular part of the frame, the more pull they exert on the curve. AutoCAD can generate quadratic and cubic spline-fit polylines. Spline-fit polylines are very different from the curves produced by the Fit option. Fit constructs pairs of arcs that pass through every control point. Both of these curves are different from true B-splines produced with the SPLINE command. If the original polyline included arc segments, they are straightened when the spline' s frame is formed. If the frame has width, the resulting spline tapers smoothly from the width of the first vertex to the width of the last vertex. All intermediate width information is ignored. Once spline-fit, the frame, if displayed, is shown with zero width and CONTINUOUS linetype. Tangent specifications on control point vertices have no effect on splinefitting. When a spline-fit curve is fit to a polyline, the spline-fit curve' s frame is stored so that it can be recalled by a subsequent decurving. You can turn a spline-fit curve back into its frame polyline by using the PEDIT Decurve option. This option works on fit curves in the same manner as it does on splines. Spline frames are not usually displayed on the screen. If you want to see them, set the SPLFRAME system variable to 1. Next time the drawing is regenerated, AutoCAD draws both the frame and the spline curve.
Prepared by: Yamanta Raj Niroula
138
An Introduction to AutoCAD
curves.
PENTASOFT
Most editing commands act the same when applied to spline-fit polylines or fit
•
MOVE, ERASE, COPY, MIRROR, ROTATE, and SCALE operate on both the spline curve and its frame, whether the frame is visible or not.
•
EXTEND changes the frame by adding a new vertex where the initial or final line of the frame intersects the boundary geometry.
•
BREAK, TRIM, and EXPLODE delete the frame and generate a polyline with only the fit spline, which is consistent with fit curves, where the curve fitting is permanent.
•
OFFSET generates a polyline with only the fit spline, which is consistent with its behavior with fit curves.
•
DIVIDE, MEASURE, the Object option of AREA, HATCH, FILLET, and CHAMFER see only the fit spline, not the frame.
•
STRETCH refits the spline to the stretched frame after a spline is stretched
The Join option of PEDIT decurves the spline and discards the spline information of the original and any added polylines. Once the Join operation is complete, you can fit a new spline to the resulting polyline. The Edit Vertex options of PEDIT have the following effect: •
The Next and Previous options move the X marker only to points on the frame of the spline, whether visible or not.
•
The Break option discards the spline.
•
The Insert, Move, Straighten, and Width options automatically refit the spline.
•
The Tangent option has no effect on splines.
Object snap uses only the spline-fit curve itself, not the frame. If you want to snap to the frame control points, use PEDIT to recall the polyline frame first. The SPLINETYPE system variable controls the type of spline curve approximated. Setting SPLINETYPE to 5 approximates a quadratic B-spline. Setting SPLINETYPE to 6 approximates a cubic B-spline.
Prepared by: Yamanta Raj Niroula
139
An Introduction to AutoCAD
PENTASOFT
You can examine or change the fineness or coarseness of the spline approximation with the SPLINESEGS system variable, or you can use AutoLISP®. The default value is 8. If you set the value higher, a greater number of line segments are drawn and the approximation to the ideal spline becomes more precise. The generated spline occupies more space in the drawing file and takes longer to generate. If you set SPLINESEGS to a negative value, AutoCAD generates segments using the absolute value of the setting and then applies a fit-type curve to those segments. Fittype curves use arcs as the approximating segments. Using arcs yields a smoother generated curve when few segments are specified, but the curve can take longer to generate.
To change the number of segments used to fit an existing spline, change SPLINESEGS and respline the curve. You do not have to decurve it first. Decurve Removes extra vertices inserted by a fit or spline curve and straightens all segments of the polyline. Retains tangent information assigned to the polyline vertices for use in subsequent fit curve requests. If you edit a spline-fit polyline with a command such as BREAK or TRIM, you cannot use the Decurve option. Ltype Gen Generates the linetype in a continuous pattern through the vertices of the polyline. When turned off, this option generates the linetype starting and ending with a dash at each vertex. Ltype Gen does not apply to polylines with tapered segments. Enter polyline linetype generation option [ON/OFF] : Enter on or off, or press ENTER
Undo Reverses operations as far back as the beginning of the PEDIT session. Prepared by: Yamanta Raj Niroula
140
An Introduction to AutoCAD
PENTASOFT
Spline The SPLINE command creates a particular type of spline known as a nonuniform rational B-spline (NURBS) curve. A NURBS curve produces a smooth curve between control points. You create splines by specifying points. You can close the spline so that the start and endpoints are coincident and tangent. Tolerance describes how closely the spline fits the set of fit points you specify. The lower the tolerance, the more closely the spline fits the points. At zero tolerance, the spline passes through the points. You can change the spline-fitting tolerance while drawing the spline to see the effect.
You can use two methods for creating splines: •
Create spline curves with the Spline option of PEDIT to smooth existing polylines created with PLINE. Such spline-fit polylines are created with uniform knot vectors and are more likely to be included in drawings created with earlier versions of AutoCAD and AutoCAD LT.
•
Create splines, which are NURBS curves, with SPLINE. Drawings containing splines use less memory and disk space than those containing spline-fit polylines of similar shape. You can easily convert spline-fit polylines into true splines with SPLINE
Splines can be edited after they have been created using the SPLINEDIT command, Modify Object Spline from the pull-down menu. Using this command, you can change the tolerance, add more control points move control points and close splines, amongst other things. However, if you just want to move spline control points, it is best to use grips. SPLINE command Creates a nonuniform rational B-spline (NURBS) curve. SPLINE fits a smooth curve to a sequence of points within a specified tolerance. AutoCAD uses NURBS (nonuniform rational B-splines) mathematics, which stores and defines a class of curve and surface data.
Draw toolbar: Draw menu: Spline Command: spline Specify first point or [Object]: Specify a point or enter o
Prepared by: Yamanta Raj Niroula
141
An Introduction to AutoCAD
PENTASOFT
First Point Creates a spline using points you specify. Specify next point: Specify a point
Enter points until you have defined the spline curve. After you enter two points, AutoCAD displays the following prompt: Specify next point or [Close/Fit Tolerance] : Specify a point, enter an option, or press ENTER
Next Point - Continuing to enter points adds additional spline curve segments until you press ENTER. Enter undo to remove the last point specified. Once you press ENTER, AutoCAD prompts you to specify the start tangent for the spline curve. See “Start Tangent” Close - Closes the spline curve by defining the last point as coincident with the first and making it tangent to the joint. Specify tangent: Specify a point or press ENTER
Specify a point to define the tangent vector or use the Tangent and Perpendicular object snap modes to make the spline tangent or perpendicular to existing objects.
Fit Tolerance - Changes the tolerance for fitting of the current spline curve. The spline curve is redefined so that it fits through the existing points according to the new tolerance. You can repeatedly change the fit tolerance, but doing so changes the fit tolerance for all the control points regardless of the control point that is selected. Specify fit tolerance : Enter a value or press ENTER
Prepared by: Yamanta Raj Niroula
142
An Introduction to AutoCAD
PENTASOFT
If you set the tolerance to 0, the spline curve passes through the fit points. Entering a tolerance greater than 0 allows the spline curve to pass through the fit points within the specified tolerance. AutoCAD returns to the previous prompt.
Start Tangent - Defines the tangency for the first and last points of the spline curve. Specify start tangent: Specify a point or press ENTER
The Specify Start Tangent prompt specifies the tangency of the spline curve at the first point. Specify end tangent: Specify a point or press ENTER
The Specify End Tangent prompt specifies the tangency of the spline curve at the last point. If you specify tangency at both endpoints of the spline, you can enter a point or use the Tangent and Perpendicular object snap modes to make the spline tangent or perpendicular to existing objects. If you press ENTER, AutoCAD calculates default tangents. Object Converts 2D or 3D quadratic or cubic spline-fit polylines to equivalent splines and (depending on the setting of the DELOBJ system variable) deletes the polylines. Select objects to convert to splines... Select objects: Select 2D or 3D spline-fit polylines and press ENTER when you finis
You can create linear approximations to splines by smoothing polylines with the PEDIT command, Modify Polyline from the pull-down menu. However, you can also turn polylines into true splines using the Object option of the Spline command.
Prepared by: Yamanta Raj Niroula
143
An Introduction to AutoCAD
PENTASOFT
Modify Splines Introduction In addition to the general editing operations available for most objects, there are additional options available for editing splines with SPLINEDIT. •
Fit Data - Edits the fit point data that defines the spline, including changing the tolerance.
•
Close - Changes an open spline into a continuous, closed loop.
•
Move Vertex - Moves a fit point to a new location.
•
Refine - Modifies a spline definition by adding and weighting control points and levating the order of the spline.
•
Reverse - Changes the direction of the spline.
You also can change the tolerance of the spline. Tolerance refers to how closely the spline fits the set of fit points you specify. The lower the tolerance, the more closely the spline fits the points.
Edit Splines with Grips When you select a spline, grips are displayed on its fit points (the GRIPS system variable must be set to 1). You can use grips to modify the shape and location of the spline. After certain operations, fit points are discarded and grips are displayed on control points instead. These operations include trimming the spline, moving the control points, and purging the fit data. If the spline' s control frame is turned on (the SPLFRAME system variable is set to 1), grips are displayed on both the spline' s control points and its fit points, when available.
You can delete fit points of a spline, add fit points for greater accuracy, or move fit points to alter the shape of a spline. You can open or close a spline and edit the spline start and end tangents. Spline direction is reversible. You can change the tolerance of the
Prepared by: Yamanta Raj Niroula
144
An Introduction to AutoCAD
PENTASOFT
spline also. Tolerance refers to how closely the spline fits the set of fit points you specify. The lower the tolerance, the more closely the spline fits the points.
Refine the Shape of a Spline You can refine a spline by increasing the number of control points in one portion of the spline or by changing the weight of specific control points. Increasing the weight of a control point pulls the spline more towards that point. You can also refine a spline by changing its order. A spline' s order is the degree of the spline polynomial + 1. A cubic spline, for example, has order 4. The higher a spline' s order, the more control points it has. Consider the following example. You have created a spline to represent a geographic contour. Grips are turned on, and you need to move the fourth fit point to increase accuracy. When you select the spline, grips appear at the control points. If you created the spline by fitting it through a set of points, and you haven' t purged this information using the Purge option of the SPLINEDIT command, and you select the Fit Data option, grips appear at the fit points on the selected spline instead of at the control points.
The SPLINEDIT Command: Edits a spline or spline-fit polyline
Modify II toolbar: Modify menu: Object
Prepared by: Yamanta Raj Niroula
Spline
145
An Introduction to AutoCAD
PENTASOFT
Shortcut menu: Select a spline to edit, right-click in the drawing area, and choose Spline Edit. Command line: splinedit Select spline: Enter an option [Fit data/Close/Move vertex/Refine/rEverse/Undo]:
points.
When you select a spline object or spline-fit polyline, grips appear at the control
If the selected spline is closed, the Close option changes to Open. If the selected spline has no fit data, the Fit Data option is not available. Fit data consists of all fit points, the fit tolerance, and tangents associated with splines created with the SPLINE command. A spline can lose its fit data if you •
Use the Purge option while editing fit data
•
Refine the spline by elevating the order, adding a control point, or changing the weight of a control point
•
Change the fit tolerance
•
Move a control point
•
Trim, break, stretch, or lengthen the spline
Note - SPLINEDIT automatically converts splined polylines to spline objects. A splined polyline is converted even if you select it and immediately exit SPLINEDIT. Fit Data Edits fit data using the following options: Enter a fit data option [Add/Close/Delete/Move/Purge/Tangents/toLerance/eXit] option or press ENTER
:
Enter
an
Note - If the selected spline is closed, AutoCAD replaces the Close option with the Open option. Add Adds fit points to a spline. Specify control point : Specify a control point or press ENTER Specify new point : Specify a point or press ENTER Specify new point : Specify a point or press ENTER
When you select a point, AutoCAD highlights it and the next point and interprets the new point to go between the highlighted points. Use the Undo option to remove the last point added. Selecting the last point on an open spline highlights only that point, and
Prepared by: Yamanta Raj Niroula
146
An Introduction to AutoCAD
PENTASOFT
AutoCAD adds the new point after the last. If you select the first point on an open spline, you have the option of placing the new point before or after the first point. Specify new point or [After/Before] : Specify a point, enter an option, or press ENTER Specify new point : Specify a point or press ENTER
AutoCAD adds the point and refits the spline through the new set of points.
Close/Open option.
If the selected spline is closed, AutoCAD replaces the Close option with the Open
Close - Closes an open spline and makes it tangent continuous (smooth) at its endpoints. If the spline’s start point and endpoint are the same, this option makes the spline tangent continuous at both points.
Open - Opens a closed spline. If the spline’s start point and endpoint were the same before you used the Close option to make it tangent continuous at both points, the Open option returns the spline to its original state. The start point and endpoint remain the same but lose their tangent continuity (smoothness). If the spline was open (its start point and endpoint were not the same) before you used the Close option to make it tangent continuous where the start point and endpoint meet, this option returns the spline to its original open state and removes tangent continuity.
Prepared by: Yamanta Raj Niroula
147
An Introduction to AutoCAD
PENTASOFT
Delete points.
Removes fit points from a spline and refits the spline through the remaining
Specify control point : Specify a control point or press ENTER
Move Moves fit points to a new location. Specify new location or [Next/Previous/Select Point/eXit] : Specify a point, enter an option, or press ENTER
New Location - Moves the selected point to the new location you specify. AutoCAD repeats the previous prompt.
Next - Moves selection to the next point. Previous - Moves selection to the previous point. Select Point - Selects a point from the set of fit points. Specify fit point : Specify a fit point or press ENTER
Exit - Returns to the Enter a Fit Data Option prompt. Purge Removes a spline’s fit data from the drawing database. After purging the spline’s fit data, AutoCAD redisplays the main SPLINEDIT prompt without the Fit Data option.
Prepared by: Yamanta Raj Niroula
148
An Introduction to AutoCAD
PENTASOFT
Tangents Edits the start and end tangents of a spline. Specify start tangent or [System default]: Specify a point, enter an option, or press ENTER Specify end tangent or [System default]: Specify a point, enter an option, or press ENTER
If the spline is closed, the prompt becomes Specify Tangent or [System Default]. The System Default option calculates the default tangents at the ends. You can specify a point or use the Tangent or Perpendicular object snap mode to make the spline tangential or perpendicular to existing objects. Tolerance Refits the spline to the existing points with new tolerance values. Enter fit tolerance : Enter a value or press ENTER
Exit Returns to the main SPLINEDIT prompt. Close/Open If the selected spline is closed, the Close option changes to Open. Close - Closes an open spline and makes it tangent continuous (smooth) at its endpoints. If the spline’s start point and endpoint are the same, this option makes the spline tangent continuous at both points. Open - Opens a closed spline. If the spline’s start point and endpoint were the same before you used the Close option to make it tangent continuous at both points, the Open option returns the spline to its original state. The start point and endpoint remain the same but lose their tangent continuity (smoothness). If the spline was open (its start point and endpoint were not the same) before you used the Close option to make it tangent continuous where the start point and endpoint meet, this option returns the spline to its original open state and removes tangent continuity. Move Vertex Relocates a spline’s control vertices and purges the fit points. Specify new location or [Next/Previous/Select Point/eXit] : Specify a point, enter an option, or press ENTER
New - Location Moves the selected point to the new location you specify.
Prepared by: Yamanta Raj Niroula
149
An Introduction to AutoCAD
PENTASOFT
After you specify a new location for the selected point, AutoCAD recalculates and displays the spline with a new set of control points. Next - Moves selection to the next point. The point marker does not wrap around from the end to the start of the spline, even if the spline is closed. Previous - Moves selection to the previous point. The point marker does not wrap around from the start to the end of the spline, even if the spline is closed. Select Point - Selects a point from the set of control points. Specify fit point : Specify a point or press ENTER
Exit - Returns to the main SPLINEDIT prompt. Refine Fine-tunes a spline definition. Enter a refine option [Add control point/Elevate : Enter an option or press ENTER
order/Weight/eXit]
Add Control Point Increases the number of control points that control a portion of a spline. Specify a point on the spline : Specify a point or press ENTER
AutoCAD adds a new control point close to the point you select, between the two control points affecting that portion of the spline.
Elevate Order Increases the number of control points on the spline. Enter new order : Enter an integer or press ENTER
Entering a value greater than the current value increases the number of control points uniformly across the spline for more localized control. The maximum value for order is 26. Weight
Prepared by: Yamanta Raj Niroula
150
An Introduction to AutoCAD
PENTASOFT
Changes the weight at various spline control points. A larger weight value pulls the spline closer to the control point. Enter new weight (current = current) or [Next/Previous/Select point/eXit] : Enter a value, enter an option, or press ENTER
New Weight - Recalculates the spline based on the new weight value at the selected control point. The larger the integer value, the more the spline is pulled toward the control point. Next - Moves selection to the next point. The point marker does not wrap around from the end to the start of the spline, even if the spline is closed. Previous - Moves selection to the previous point. The point marker does not wrap around from the start to the end of the spline, even if the spline is closed. Select Point - Selects a point from the set of control points. Specify fit point : Specify a point or press ENTER
Exit - Returns to the main Refine prompt. Exit Returns to the main SPLINEDIT prompt. Reverse Reverses the spline’s direction. This option is intended primarily for third-party applications. Undo Cancels the last editing action.
Prepared by: Yamanta Raj Niroula
151
An Introduction to AutoCAD
PENTASOFT
Zooming and Panning Introduction: You can change the magnification of a view by zooming in and out, which is similar to zooming in and out with a camera. ZOOM does not change the absolute size of objects in the drawing; it changes only the magnification of the view. uses.
Here we' ll take a quick look at the various zoom commands available, and their
EFFECTIVE ZOOMING CAN DRAMATICALLY INCREASE YOUR SPEED
The ZOOM Command Increases or decreases the apparent size of objects in the current viewport One single command will give you the versatility to move around your drawing. This is the ZOOM command. Another useful command is PAN. These are both quicker than using the scroll bars on the side of the drawing area, unless you have a very short distance to move your drawing.
Standard toolbar: View menu: Zoom Shortcut menu: With no objects selected, right-click in the drawing area and choose Zoom to zoom in real time. Comman: zoom Specify corner of window, enter a scale factor (nX or nXP), or [All/Center/Dynamic/Extents/Previous/Scale/Window/Object] :
Remember that to invoke any option, just type the capital letter of your choice. (e.g.: type: E for "zoom extents". The default is "Realtime" which you invoke by pressing . One by one, here are the options available to you.
Prepared by: Yamanta Raj Niroula
152
An Introduction to AutoCAD
COMMAND OPTION
PENTASOFT
DESCRIPTION Zooms to display the entire drawing in the current viewport. In a plan view, AutoCAD® zooms to the grid limits or current extents, whichever is greater. In a 3D view, ZOOM All is equivalent to ZOOM Extents. The display shows all objects even if the drawing extends outside the grid limits. In the illustration, LIMITS is greater than the extents of the drawing. Because it always regenerates the drawing, you cannot use ZOOM All transparently.
Zoom All
Zooms to display a window defined by a center point and a magnification value or height. A smaller value for the height increases the magnification. A larger value decreases the magnification. Specify center point: Specify a point (1) Enter magnification or height : Enter a value or press ENTER
Zoom Center
Zooms to display the generated portion of the drawing with a view box. The view box represents your viewport, which you can shrink or enlarge and move around the drawing. Positioning and sizing the view box pans or zooms to fill the viewport with the image inside the view box.
Zoom Dynamic
The panning view box is displayed first. Drag it to the location you want and click. The zooming view box is then displayed. Resize it and press ENTER to zoom, or click to return to the panning view box. Press ENTER to fill the current viewport with the area currently enclosed by the view box.
Prepared by: Yamanta Raj Niroula
153
An Introduction to AutoCAD
PENTASOFT
This option will display all the graphics that are contained in the drawing (referred to as the drawing extents) with the largest image possible. Zooms to display the drawing extents and results in the largest possible display of all the objects.
Zoom Extents
This option restores the displayed view prior to the current one. For the purpose of this option, up to 10 views are saved so that the last ten views can be recalled. This option includes every time you use the scroll bar, which is one reason to avoid the scroll bars for panning a lot in your drawing
Zoom Previous
Note: If you change the shading with the SHADEMODE command, the view is changed. If you enter ZOOM Previous after changing the shading, it restores the previous view, which is shaded differently, but not zoomed differently. Zooms the display at a specified scale factor. Enter a scale factor (nX or nXP): Specify a value
Enter a value followed by x to specify the scale relative to the current view. For example, entering .5x causes each object to be displayed at half its current size on the screen.
Zoom Scale
Enter a value followed by xp to specify the scale relative to paper space units. For example, entering .5xp displays model space at half the scale of paper space units. You can create a layout with each viewport displaying objects at a different scale. Enter a value to specify the scale relative to the limits of the drawing. (This option is rarely used.) For example, entering 2 displays objects at twice the size they would appear if you were zoomed to the limits of the drawing.
Zooms to display an area specified by two opposite corners of a rectangular window. Specify first corner: Specify a point (1) Specify opposite corner: Specify a point (2)
Zoom Window
Prepared by: Yamanta Raj Niroula
154
An Introduction to AutoCAD
Object
PENTASOFT
Zooms to display one or more selected objects as large as possible and in the center of the drawing area. You can select objects before or after you start the ZOOM command. Using the pointing device, zooms interactively to a logical extent. Press ESC or ENTER to exit, or right-click to display the shortcut menu The cursor changes to a magnifying glass with plus (+) and minus (–) signs. See “Zoom Shortcut Menu” on for a description of the options that are available while zooming in real time. The current drawing area is used to determine the zooming factor. ZOOM uses half of the window height to move to a zoom factor of 100%. Holding down the pick button at the midpoint of the window and moving vertically to the top of the window zooms in to 100%.
Zoom Realtime
Conversely, holding the pick button down at the midpoint of the window and moving vertically to the bottom of the window zooms out by 100%. Note If you place the cursor at the bottom of the window, hold down the pick button, and move vertically to the top of the window, the zoom-in factor is 200%. When you have reached the zoom-in limit, the plus sign in the cursor disappears, indicating that you can no longer zoom in. When you have reached the zoomout limit, the minus sign in the cursor disappears, indicating that you can no longer zoom out. When you release the pick button, zooming stops. You can release the pick button, move the cursor to another location in the drawing, and then press the pick button again and continue to zoom the display from that location. To exit zooming at the new position, press ENTER or ESC.
Zoom In
Clicking this icon will zoom in to the drawing by about 50%. This option is only available as an icon and cannot be invoked by the command line.
Zoom Out
Similar to ' Zoom In'- this icon will zoom out of your drawing and allow you to see about 50% more of your drawing space.
Mouse Scroll
If you have a scrolling wheel on your mouse, you can use it to zoom in and out of your drawing. Scroll towards you to zoom out and away from you to zoom in. You have the option to change the amount of zoom per wheel click with the Zoomfactor system variable.
Zoom Shortcut Menu When the ZOOM command is active, you can exit ZOOM or switch to PAN or 3DORBIT using the options on the Zoom shortcut menu. To access the Zoom shortcut menu, right-click in the drawing area while ZOOM is active. Exit - Cancels ZOOM or PAN. Pan - Switches to PAN. Zoom - Switches to ZOOM in real time. 3D Orbit - Switches to 3DORBIT. Zoom - Window Zooms to display an area specified by a rectangular window. Zoom Object - Zooms to display one or more selected objects as large as possible and in the center of the drawing area. Zoom Original - Restores the original view. Prepared by: Yamanta Raj Niroula
155
An Introduction to AutoCAD
PENTASOFT
Zoom Extents - Zooms to display the drawing extents. As you can see there are quite a few options. To begin with I would strongly recommend getting good at these 3. Use the Zoom Use the Zoom Use the Zoom
Extents whenever you want to see everything you have drawn. Window option to ' close-in'on one area. Previous option to return to where you were.
I generally use them in conjunction with each other. I' ll do a zoom extents to see what state the drawing is at, then perform a Zoom Window to get to the area I need to work in, then do a Zoom Extents when I am done in that area. In between, I may need to use a combination of Zoom Window and Zoom Previous. The zoom command can also be invoked transparently. This means that you can start it up in the middle of a command. For example, if you are in the trim command and want to see a bit more of your drawing, just type ' Z (note the apostrophe) at the command line and you can then zoom using any of the available options. Press to get back to your command. To see all of the available zoom commands, the zoom toolbar needs to be visible. Load in the zoom toolbar (For those who can' t remember: Go to the ' view'drop down menu, then select toolbars. Check the ' zoom'box then choose close. Move the toolbar to a convenient location).
Panning a View You can shift the location of your view by using PAN or by using the window scroll bars. With the Realtime option of PAN, you pan dynamically by moving your pointing device. Like panning with a camera, PAN does not change the location or magnification of objects on your drawing; it changes only the view. By right-clicking, you can display a shortcut menu with additional viewing options.
Standard toolbar: View menu: Pan Realtime Shortcut menu: With no objects selected, right-click in the drawing area and choose Pan. Command line: pan
time.
AutoCAD displays the following prompt; you can pan the drawing display in real
Press ESC or ENTER to exit, or right-click to display a shortcut menu.
If you enter -pan at the Command prompt, PAN displays alternative prompts on the command line, and you can specify a displacement to pan the drawing display.
Prepared by: Yamanta Raj Niroula
156
An Introduction to AutoCAD
PENTASOFT
Panning in Real Time The cursor changes to a hand cursor. By holding down the pick button on the pointing device, you lock the cursor to its current location relative to the viewport coordinate system. The drawing display is moved in the same direction as the cursor. When you reach a logical extent (edge of the drawing space), a bar is displayed on the hand cursor on that edge. Depending on whether the logical extent is at the top, bottom, or side of the drawing, the bar is either horizontal (top or bottom) or vertical (left or right side).
When you release the pick button, panning stops. You can release the pick button, move the cursor to another location in the drawing, and then press the pick button again to pan the display from that location. To stop panning at any time, press ENTER or ESC. PAN Command Line If you enter -pan at the Command prompt, PAN presents alternative prompts on the command line. This version of PAN works in two ways. You can specify a single point, indicating the relative displacement of the drawing with respect to the current location, or (more commonly) you can specify two points, in which case AutoCAD computes the displacement from the first point to the second point. You cannot use PAN transparently during VPOINT or DVIEW, or while another ZOOM, PAN, or VIEW command is in progress. Specify base point or displacement: Specify a point (1)
The point you specify indicates either the amount to move the drawing or the location in the drawing to be moved, depending on how you respond to the next prompt. Specify second point: Press ENTER or specify a point (2)
Prepared by: Yamanta Raj Niroula
157
An Introduction to AutoCAD
PENTASOFT
If you press ENTER, AutoCAD moves the drawing by the amount you specified in the Specify Base Point or Displacement prompt. For example, if you specify 2,2 at the first prompt and press ENTER at the second prompt, AutoCAD moves the drawing 2 units in the X direction and 2 units in the Y direction. If you specify a point at the Specify Second Point prompt, AutoCAD moves the location of the first point to the location of the second point. Pan Shortcut Menu When the PAN command is active, you can exit PAN or switch to ZOOM or 3DORBIT using the options on the Pan shortcut menu. To access the Pan shortcut menu, right-click in the drawing area while PAN is active. Exit - Cancels PAN or ZOOM. Pan - Switches to PAN. Zoom - Switches to ZOOM in real time. 3D Orbit - Switches to 3DORBIT. Zoom - Window Zooms to display an area specified by a rectangular window. Zoom Original - Restores the original view. Zoom Extents - Zooms to display the drawing extents.
Pan and Zoom with the Aerial View Window You can use the Aerial View window to change the view in your current viewport quickly. If you keep the Aerial View window open as you work, you can zoom and pan without interrupting your current command. You can also specify a new view without having to choose a menu option or enter a command. Use the View Box to Pan and Zoom Within the Aerial View window is a view box, a heavy rectangle that displays the boundary of the view in your current viewport. You can change the view in the drawing by changing the view box in the Aerial View window. To zoom in to the drawing, make the view box smaller. To zoom out of the drawing, make the view box larger. All pan and zoom operations are performed by left-clicking. Right-click to end a pan or zoom operation.
Prepared by: Yamanta Raj Niroula
158
An Introduction to AutoCAD
PENTASOFT
To pan the drawing, move the view box.
Change the View Displayed Inside the Aerial View Window You can use the Aerial View toolbar buttons to change the magnification of the image in the Aerial View window, or you can resize the image incrementally. These changes do not affect the view in the drawing itself.
Use the Aerial View Window with Multiple Viewports Only the view in the current viewport is used in the Aerial View window. The Aerial View image is updated as you make changes to your drawing and as you select different viewports. In complex drawings, you may want to turn off this dynamic updating to improve drawing speed. If you turn off this feature, AutoCAD updates the Aerial View image only when you activate the Aerial View window.
Prepared by: Yamanta Raj Niroula
159
An Introduction to AutoCAD
PENTASOFT
The DSVIEWER Command Opens the Aerial View window The Aerial View window is a navigation tool. It displays a view of the entire drawing in a separate window so that you can quickly locate and move to a specific area. With the Aerial View window open, you can zoom and pan without choosing a menu option or entering a command. In paper space, the Aerial View window shows only paper space objects, including viewport borders. Real-time updating of the AutoCAD window from the Aerial View window is not available in paper space. View menu: Aerial View Command: dsviewer
The Aerial View window is displayed. Aerial View Window Displays the entire drawing; AutoCAD marks the current view with a wide outline box. View Menu (Aerial View Window) Changes the magnification of the Aerial View by zooming in and out of the drawing or by displaying the entire drawing in the Aerial View window. When the entire drawing is displayed in the Aerial View window, the Zoom Out menu option and button are unavailable. When the current view nearly fills the Aerial View window, the Zoom In menu option and button are unavailable. If both of these conditions exist at the same time, such as after using ZOOM Extents, both options are unavailable. All of the menu options are also available from a shortcut menu you can access by right-clicking in the Aerial View window. Zoom In - Increases the magnification of the drawing in the Aerial View window by zooming in by a factor of 2, centered on the current view box.
Prepared by: Yamanta Raj Niroula
160
An Introduction to AutoCAD
PENTASOFT
Zoom Out - Decreases the magnification of the drawing in the Aerial View window by zooming out by a factor of 2, centered on the current view box.
Global - Displays the entire drawing and the current view in the Aerial View window.
Options Menu (Aerial View Window) Provides toggles for automatic viewport display and dynamic updating of the drawing. All of the menu options are also available from a shortcut menu you can access by right-clicking in the Aerial View window. Auto Viewport - Displays the model space view of the current viewport automatically when multiple viewports are displayed. When Auto Viewport is off, AutoCAD does not update the Aerial View window to match the current viewport. Dynamic Update - Updates the Aerial View window while you edit the drawing. When Dynamic Update is off, AutoCAD does not update the Aerial View window until you click in the Aerial View window. Realtime Zoom - Updates the drawing area in real time when you zoom using the Aerial View window.
Prepared by: Yamanta Raj Niroula
161
An Introduction to AutoCAD
PENTASOFT
Units & Scales Introduction Among the most important concepts that newcomers to AutoCAD need to get to grips with are those of drawing scale and drawing units. You cannot start creating sensible drawings with AutoCAD until you are familiar with scale, units and the commands you use to control them. This tutorial discusses these concepts, starting with the two most commonly asked questions in this subject area. At what scale should I draw? As a general rule, everything you draw with AutoCAD will be drawn full size. This often comes as quite a surprise to those who are new to CAD and have spent a number of years working on a drawing board. When you start drawing with AutoCAD you do not have to decide upon a drawing scale as you do when using a drawing board. When drawing on paper you must decide do draw at say, 1:20 or 1:200 depending upon the size of the object that you are drawing so that your scaled drawing will fit on the drawing sheet, be that A3 or A1. In AutoCAD you do not need to decide upon a drawing scale until you come to print the drawing and because the scaling of your drawing takes place at the printing stage, you can create drawings at a scale of 1:1. This has particular advantages because you can, for example, measure lengths, areas and volumes within an AutoCAD drawing and not need to compensate for any scale factor.
Am I drawing in metres or millimetres? Most people who use AutoCAD, draw using decimal drawing units. What these drawing units represent is entirely up to the individual. However, you must decide what units you will use before you start drawing. One drawing unit could represent one millimetre, one centimetre, one metre, kilometre, mile, furlong or fathom. It is entirely up to you. However, in most parts of the world it is common practice to work in either millimetres or metres. Which of these two units you use will largely depend upon the type of drawing you are creating. For example, if you were creating a detail drawing of a flight of steps, you would most likely use millimetres (Architects will almost always use millimetres). If, on the other hand you are drawing a landscape masterplan, you would probably want to work in metres (Landscape Architects and Civil Engineers usually use metres). By way of example, consider a drawing where you need to draw a footpath in plan. The footpath is two metres wide. If you are working in millimetres, the footpath would be drawn 2,000 drawing units wide but if you are working in metres, the footpath would be drawn just 2 drawing units wide. To translate this into practical terms, if you had drawn one edge of the path and you intended to draw the other edge using the Offset command, you would enter either "2,000" or "2" for the offset value depending upon whether you were using millimetres or metres respectively. Although decimal drawing units are the most commonly used, you can configure AutoCAD to work with other types of drawing units. To change the unit type, you must use the Drawing Units dialogue box.
Prepared by: Yamanta Raj Niroula
162
An Introduction to AutoCAD
PENTASOFT
Units Control The UNITS Command Controls coordinate and angle display formats and precision Format menu: Units Command: units
The Drawing Units dialog box is displayed. If you enter -units at the Command prompt, UNITS displays prompts on the command line. Drawing Units Dialog Box Defines the unit and angle formats.
Length Specifies the current unit of measurement and the precision for the current units. Type - Sets the current format for units of measure. The values include Architectural, Decimal, Engineering, Fractional, and Scientific. The Engineering and Architectural formats produce feet-and-inches displays and assume that each drawing unit represents one inch. The other formats can represent any real-world unit.
Prepared by: Yamanta Raj Niroula
163
An Introduction to AutoCAD
PENTASOFT
Precision - Sets the number of decimal places or fractional size displayed for linear measurements. Angle Specifies the current angle format and the precision for the current angle display. Type - Sets the current angle format. Precision - Sets the precision for the current angle display. AutoCAD uses the following conventions for the various angle measures: decimal degrees appear as decimal numbers, grads appear with a lowercase g suffix, and radians appear with a lowercase r suffix. The degrees/minutes/seconds format uses d for degrees, 'for minutes, and " for seconds; for example: 123d45' 56.7". Surveyor’s units show angles as bearings, using N or S for north or south, degrees/minutes/seconds for how far east or west the angle is from direct north or south, and E or W for east or west; for example: N 45d0' 0" E. The angle is always less than 90 degrees and is displayed in the degrees/minutes/seconds format. If the angle is precisely north, south, east, or west, only the single letter representing the compass point is displayed. Clockwise - Calculates positive angles in the clockwise direction. The default direction for positive angles is counterclockwise. When AutoCAD prompts for an angle, you can point in the desired direction or enter an angle regardless of the setting specified for Clockwise. Drag and Drop Scale Controls the unit of measurement for blocks that are dragged into the current drawing using a tool palette, DesignCenter™ , or i-drop™ . A block or a drawing that is created with units that are different from the units specified with this option is scaled when inserted. The insertion scale is the ratio of the units used in the source block or drawing and the units used in the target drawing. Select Unitless to insert the block without scaling it to match the specified units. Note - In the Options dialog box, User Preferences tab, the Source Content Units and Target Drawing Units settings are used when, either in the source block or the target drawing, the Drag-and-Drop Scale is set to Unitless. Sample Output Displays an example of the current settings for units and angles. Direction Displays the Direction Control dialog box.
Prepared by: Yamanta Raj Niroula
164
An Introduction to AutoCAD
PENTASOFT
Direction Control Dialog Box Defines the angle for 0 degrees and specifies the direction in which angles are measured. When AutoCAD prompts for an angle, you can locate a point in the desired direction or enter an angle.
Base Angle Sets the direction of the zero angle. The following options affect the entry of angles, the display format, and the entry of polar, cylindrical, and spherical coordinates. East - Specifies the compass direction east (the default). North- Specifies the compass direction north. West - Specifies the compass direction west. South - Specifies the compass direction south. Other - Specifies a direction different from the points of the compass. Angle - Specifies a value for the zero angle when Other is selected. You can specify the angle by entering a value. Pick an Angle Button Defines the zero angle in the graphics area based on the angle of an imaginary line that connects any two points you specify with the pointing device. Available only when Other is selected.
Linear Units You can see from the dialogue box that there are five different linear unit types for you to choose from, one of which is "Decimal", the default. The table below shows the effect of the different unit settings on two drawing unit values to give you an idea how the various settings might be used along with a brief description.
Prepared by: Yamanta Raj Niroula
165
An Introduction to AutoCAD
PENTASOFT
Unit Type
1.5 Drawing Units
1500 Drawing Units
Decimal
1.5000
1500.0000
Scientific
1.5000E+00
1.5000E+03
Engineering
0' -1.5000"
125' -0.0000"
Architectural
0' -1 1/2"
125' -0"
Fractional
1 1/2
1500
Description Metric or SI Units Decimal value raised to a power Feet and decimal inches Feet and fractional inches Whole numbers and fractions
Notice that when you change the unit type, the co-ordinate display on the status bar changes to show co-ordinates using the current unit type. Changing the unit type also affects the way distances, areas and volumes are reported when using the appropriate inquiry command. For the most part you should not need to change the unit type. Units such as "Architectural" and "Engineering" are there mainly for AutoCAD users in the USA where Feet and Inches are still in common use.
Angular Units Looking at the Drawing Units dialogue box again, you will notice that there are also five angular unit types. The default is decimal degrees, but there are other options. The table below shows the effect of the different unit types on two angular unit values. As with the linear units, there are not many circumstances under which you would want to use anything other than the default. Unit Type Decimal Degrees
12.5 Angular Units 12.500
180 Drawing Units 180.000
Deg/Min/Sec
12d 30'0"
Grads
13.889g
200.000g
Radians
0.218r
3.142r
Surveyor
N 77d30' 0" E
S 77d30' 0" W
180d 0'0"
Description Metric or SI Units Degrees, Minutes and Seconds 400 grads = 360 degrees 2 Pi radians = 360 degrees Compass bearings
AutoCAD also allows you to control the direction in which angular units are measured and the position of the start angle. By default, AutoCAD starts with the zero angle at the 3 o' clock position (East) with angles increasing in an anti-clockwise direction. For the most part this does not present any problems once you get used to the idea. However, there are specific situations where it may be desirable to have the zero angle at the 12 o' clock position (North) and angles increasing in a clockwise direction. For example, if you are working on a surveyors drawing or a map base, this latter situation enables you to specify angles with respect to North. To change the direction of angular measurement, use the Clockwise check box in the Angle section of the Drawing Units dialogue box. When this box is checked, positive angles are measured in a Prepared by: Yamanta Raj Niroula
166
An Introduction to AutoCAD
PENTASOFT
clockwise direction, when it is not checked (the default), positive angles are measured in an anti-clockwise direction. To change the start angle, click on the "Direction…" button in the Drawing Units dialogue box. The Direction Control dialogue box appears. You can set the Base Angle to any of the circle quadrants by clicking on the appropriate radio button or you can set it to a specific angle with the "Other" option. You can enter a specific angle into the edit box or you can pick an angle using the Pick an angle button. The ability to specify an "Other" or user angle can be useful if, for example, your drawing is not oriented to North but where you still want angular measurements to be made with respect to North. To change the direction of angular measurement, simply click on the appropriate radio button.
Unit Precision The Drawing Units dialogue box can also be used to set the precision of linear and angular units. By default, AutoCAD sets the linear unit precision to four places of decimal, so distances appear in the form 0.0000. Angular unit precision is set to whole degrees only. To change the precision with which linear and angular values are displayed, simply click the down arrow against the appropriate drop-down list (see illustration on the left) and select the number of decimal places required. The default setting of four decimal places is usually adequate for linear units. It is, however, often necessary to change the precision for angular units. Working in whole degrees does not usually give an adequate level of detail for many drawing functions. However, you do not need to change the precision of either linear or angular units unless you have a specific reason for doing so. Changing the unit precision does not make your drawing more accurate, it just means that the co-ordinate display on the status bar and the results from the various inquiry commands will be displayed with a higher degree of precision. The accuracy of your drawing will be determined by the values you enter for the size of objects when you draw and edit them and by the correct use of the various object snaps and drawing aids.
Prepared by: Yamanta Raj Niroula
167
An Introduction to AutoCAD
PENTASOFT
Drawing Limits In the previous tutorial, drawing limits were mentioned while explaining the use of the zoom all command. When the zoom all command is chosen, AutoCAD zooms to the extent of the user defined limits. Limits can be thought of as the extent of the drawing area. The AutoCAD drawing area is, in theory, infinite. As long as you continue to draw, AutoCAD will continue to give you the drawing space. If thought of in practical terms, if we were to manually pencil draw a 1:1 scale (full size) drawing of a wrist watch, why draw it on an A0 sized sheet of paper when A4 size is adequate? AutoCAD drawing limits follow the same logic. We can tell AutoCAD the drawing space we require (although we have the option to increase this if we so desire at a later stage). AutoCAD will display a grid to the extent of the drawing limits specified.
The LIMITS Command tab
Sets and controls the limits of the grid display in the current Model or layout
Grid limits determine the area of the drawing that can display grid dots, the area displayed by one of the scale options of ZOOM, and the minimum area displayed by ZOOM All. When plotting a drawing, you can also specify the grid limits as the area to plot. When limits checking is turned on, the grid limits restrict the coordinates you can enter to the specified rectangular area. From a layout tab, when either the paper background or the printable area is displayed, you cannot set the grid limits with LIMITS. In this case, limits are calculated and set by the layout according to the selected paper size. You can control the display of the paper background and printable area from the Display tab of the Options dialog box. Format menu: Drawing Limits Command: limits Specify lower left corner or [ON/OFF] : Specify a point, enter on or off, or press ENTER
Lower-Left Corner Specifies the lower-left corner for the grid limits. Specify upper right corner : Specify a point or press ENTER
On - Turns on limits checking. When limits checking is on, you cannot enter points outside the grid limits. Because limits checking tests only points that you enter, portions of objects such as circles can extend outside the grid limits.
Prepared by: Yamanta Raj Niroula
168
An Introduction to AutoCAD
PENTASOFT
Off - Turns off limits checking but maintains the current values for the next time you turn on limits checking. Lets have a go: • • • • •
Start a new AutoCAD drawing. Start the line command For the start point , enter 0.2,0.2 For the next point enter @0,0.52 For the next point enter @0.37,0 For the next point enter @0,-0.52
To close the box, we' ll try a new technique. Normally, we would now enter @ 0.37,0 to draw a horizontal line back to the start position to close the box. As behave drawn all 3 lines keeping the line command open, there is a quicker way to draw the box. Type the letter c in the command line (the c stands for close) to draw a line from the current location back to the start point. Now try using the zoom all command. The drawing will be barely visible (if at all). This is because the default limits are not set correctly for our drawing. We need to enter new drawing limits. Type limits directly into AutoCAD' s command line. You will be asked to specify the lower left co-ordinates (remember - in relation to the UCS). Hit enter to accept the default value of 0.0000, 0.0000. AutoCAD now wants us to specify the upper right limit co-ordinates. There is no right or wrong value, but it should be set to a sensible value for the drawing size. Our drawing is only 0.52m x 0.37m. Lets enter an upper limit of say, 1m,1m from the UCS. Enter 1,1 into the command line and hit enter. Now try the zoom all command again. The view should be much closer as it is set to the drawing limits. Some professional AutoCAD users manage to go their whole careers without ever altering AutoCAD' s limit setting, and quite frankly:- it' s easily done! There will be many times (especially if like me, you never use the zoom all command and grid!) that adjusting AutoCAD' s default limit settings has no advantage. Why mention it then? Well... occasionally while panning your pan icon may gain a line next to it (dependant on the pan direction) and you can' t pan any further. This is because the limits have been reached and AutoCAD refuses to let you see beyond your defined drawing areas. You may then require to enter the limits command and change the default setting. Try panning away from the drawing we just made, as soon as you hit the 1m drawing limit we set, we can' t pan any further. Just in case you were curious, the drawing is of a DVD case (520mmx370mm). If we were to have drawn the case in millimetres instead of metres (i.e. we decide one AutoCAD unit shall equal 1mm instead of 1m - perfectly acceptable to do) then a much larger upper right drawing limit would have been required, perhaps 1000,1000.
Prepared by: Yamanta Raj Niroula
169
An Introduction to AutoCAD
PENTASOFT
Selecting Objects in AutoCAD By now you have probably seen a rectangle appear on your screen when you leftclick and the move the crosshairs around. You' ll learn all about these in this lesson. AutoCAD uses what' s called a selection set to allow you to group objects together and then modify them. For example, if you want to erase several lines, you could press E , pick on the line, press again and repeat until you' re done. Another way would be to press E , and then pick the lines one by one until they are all selected, and press . By selecting a group of objects, you have created a selection set. Whenever you want to modify an object, and are asked by AutoCAD to "select objects" you can create a selection set and then apply the command. REMEMBER TO PRESS ENTER WHEN YOU ARE FINISHED SELECTING THE OBJECTS YOU WANT There are also a few other ways to create a selection set. The most common way is to use a window. There are two very different types of windows you can use. One is a ' crossing window'and the other is a box. If you create the window from right to left, you make a crossing window. This means that any object that crosses the border of the window is added to the selection set. This is shown as a dotted line on the screen. If you create the window from left to right, you create a box. Using this method you' ll add only the items that are completely within the box. This is shown as a solid line on the screen. The difference is very important. To summarize: Direction
Called
Display
Effect
Left To Right
Window Selection
Solid
Selects On Objects That Are Completely Within The Box
Right To Left
Crossing Selection
Dotted
Selects Any Object That Either Crosses The Boundary Or Is Inside It
There are other ways to select objects and here a few of the more common ways. These can also be used in combination.
The SELECT Command Places selected objects in the Previous selection set Command: SELECT Select objects: Use an object selection method
A small box, called the object selection target, replaces the crosshairs on the graphics cursor.
Prepared by: Yamanta Raj Niroula
170
An Introduction to AutoCAD
PENTASOFT
AutoCAD requires that objects be selected in order to be processed. The Select Objects prompt occurs after many commands, including the SELECT command itself. You can select objects individually with the pointing device, by drawing a selection window around them, by entering coordinates, or by using one of the selection methods listed below. These methods can be used to select objects regardless of the command that initiated the Select Objects prompt. To view all options, enter ? on the command line. Expects a point or Window/Last/Crossing/BOX/ALL/Fence/WPolygon/CPolygon/Group/Add/ Remove/Multiple/Previous/Undo/AUto/SIngle Select objects: Specify a point or enter an option
Window Selects all objects completely inside a rectangle defined by two points. Specifying the corners from left to right creates a window selection. (Specifying the corners from right to left creates a crossing selection.) Specify first corner: Specify a point (1) Specify opposite corner: Specify a point (2)
LAST - Selects the most recently created visible object. CROSSING - Selects objects within and crossing an area defined by two points. A crossing selection is displayed as dashed or otherwise highlighted to differentiate it from window selection. Specifying the corners from right to left creates a crossing selection. (Specifying the corners from left to right creates a window selection.) First corner: Specify a point (1) Other corner: Specify a point (2)
BOX - Selects all objects inside or crossing a rectangle specified by two points. If the rectangle’s points are specified from right to left, Box is equivalent to Crossing. Otherwise, Box is equivalent to Window. Specify first corner: Specify a point Specify opposite corner: Specify a point
ALL - Selects all objects on thawed layers. FENCE - Selects all objects crossing a selection fence. The Fence method is similar to CPolygon except that AutoCAD does not close the fence, and a fence can cross itself. Fence is not affected by the PICKADD system variable. First fence point: Specify a point Specify endpoint of line or [Undo]: Specify a point or enter u to undo the last point
WPOLYGON - Selects objects completely inside a polygon defined by points. The polygon can be any shape but cannot cross or touch itself. AutoCAD draws the last segment of the polygon so that it is closed at all times. WPolygon is not affected by the PICKADD system variable.
Prepared by: Yamanta Raj Niroula
171
An Introduction to AutoCAD
PENTASOFT
First polygon point: Specify a point Specify endpoint of line or [Undo]: Specify a point or enter u to undo the last point
CPOLYGON - Selects objects within and crossing a polygon defined by specifying points. The polygon can be any shape but cannot cross or touch itself. AutoCAD draws the last segment of the polygon so that it is closed at all times. CPolygon is not affected by the PICKADD system variable. First polygon point: Specify a point Specify endpoint of line or [Undo]: Specify a point or enter u to undo the last point
GROUP - Selects all objects within a specified group. Enter group name: Enter a name list
ADD - Switches to the Add method: selected objects can be added to the selection set by using any of the object selection methods. Auto and Add are the default methods. REMOVE - Switches to the Remove method: objects can be removed from the current selection set using any object selection method. An alternative to Remove mode is to hold down SHIFT while selecting single objects or use the Automatic option. MULTIPLE - Specifies multiple points without highlighting the objects, thus speeding up the selection process for complex objects. The Multiple method also selects two intersecting objects if the intersection point is specified PREVIOUS - Selects the most recent selection set. The Previous selection set is cleared by operations that delete objects from the drawing. AutoCAD keeps track of whether each selection set was specified in model space or paper space. The Previous selection set is ignored if you switch spaces. UNDO - Cancels the selection of the object most recently added to the selection set. AUTO - Switches to automatic selection: pointing to an object selects the object. Pointing to a blank area inside or outside an object forms the first corner of a box defined by the Box method. Auto and Add are the default methods. SINGLE - Switches to the Single method: selects the first object or set of objects designated rather than continuing to prompt for further selections.
Object Cycling: AutoCAD supports the concept of object cycling. When two objects lie in a very close proximity, you may find it difficult to pick one out of them. You don’t have to try too hard to pick exactly what you want. Just hold the CTRL key while you pick on the objects, which are close to each other. One of the objects get highlighted. If that is not what you want to pick as you keep holding the CTRL key, just keep picking the drawing screen. AutoCAD will cycle
Prepared by: Yamanta Raj Niroula
172
An Introduction to AutoCAD
PENTASOFT
through all the objects that it could find on the place where you picked. Repeat the process until what you want gets highlighted. Press ENTER when you got it.
Creating Quick Selection Sets A quick way to create a selection set is to use the Quick Select, QSELECT command. With this command, you can set criteria drawing objects must meet to be added to the selection set.
The QSELECT Command Creates a selection set based on filtering criteria QSELECT creates a selection set that either includes or excludes all objects matching the filtering criteria you specify. QSELECT can apply to the entire drawing or to an existing selection set. The selection set created by QSELECT replaces or is appended to the current selection set. If you have partially opened the current drawing, QSELECT does not consider objects that you have not loaded. For more advanced filtering operations, see FILTER. Note - QSELECT supports custom objects (created by another application) and their properties. If a custom object uses properties other than AutoCAD properties, the custom object' s source application must be running in order for the properties to be available to QSELECT. In addition to the following access methods, you can also access QSELECT by choosing the Quick Select button in the Properties palette (see page 758). Tools menu: Quick Select Shortcut menu: End any active commands, right-click in the drawing area, and choose Quick Select. Command: qselect
The Quick Select dialog box is displayed. Quick Select Dialog Box Specifies the filtering criteria and how you want AutoCAD to create the selection set from that criteria. Apply To - Applies the filtering criteria to the entire drawing or to the current selection set (if one exists). To select a group of objects to which you
Prepared by: Yamanta Raj Niroula
173
An Introduction to AutoCAD
PENTASOFT
want to apply the filtering criteria, use the Select Objects button. When you have finished selecting objects, press ENTER to redisplay the dialog box. AutoCAD sets Apply To to Current Selection. If Append to Current Selection Set is selected, AutoCAD applies the filtering criteria to the entire drawing. Select Objects - Temporarily closes the Quick Select dialog box so that you can select the objects to which you want to apply the filter criteria. Press ENTER to return to the Quick Select dialog box. AutoCAD changes the Apply To box to show Current Selection. The Select Objects button is available only when you select Include In New Selection Set and clear Append to Current Selection Set. Object Type - Specifies the type of objects to include in the filtering criteria. If the filtering criteria are being applied to the entire drawing, the Object Type list includes all object types, including custom. Otherwise, the list includes only the object types of the selected objects. If an application such as Autodesk Map was used to add a feature classification to an object, you can select a classification. Properties - Specifies the object property for the filter. This list includes all searchable properties for the selected object type. The property you select determines the options available in Operator and Value. If an application such as Autodesk Map was used to add a feature classification to an object, you can select a classification property. Operator - Controls the range of the filter. Depending on the selected property, options may include Equals, Not Equal To, Greater Than, Less Than, and *Wildcard Match. Greater Than and Less Than are not available for some properties. *Wildcard Match is available only for text fields that can be edited. For information about the available wildcard characters. Value - Specifies the property value for the filter. If known values for the selected property are available, Value becomes a list in which you can choose a value. Otherwise, enter a value. How to Apply - Specifies whether you want the new selection set to include or exclude objects that match the specified filtering criteria. Choose Include in New Selection Set to create a new selection set composed only of objects that match the filtering criteria. Choose Exclude from New Selection Set to create a new selection set composed only of objects that do not match the filtering criteria. Append to Current Selection Set - Specifies whether the selection set created by QSELECT replaces or is appended to the current selection set. Note - QSELECT supports custom objects (objects created by another application) and their properties. If a custom object uses properties other than AutoCAD properties, the custom object’s source application must be running in order for the properties to be available to QSELECT.
Selection Set Filters Using either Quick Select (QSELECT) from the Properties palette or the Object Selection Filters dialog box (FILTER), you can filter selection sets by property (such as Prepared by: Yamanta Raj Niroula
174
An Introduction to AutoCAD
PENTASOFT
color) and by object type. For example, you can select all of the red circles in a drawing without selecting any other object, or you can select all objects except the red circles. With Quick Select, you can quickly define a selection set based on filtering criteria that you specify, and if an Autodesk or a third-party application was used to add a feature classification to an object, you can select objects by classification property. With object selection filters, you can name and save filters for future use. With either Quick Select or object selection filters, if you want to filter your selection set based on color, linetype, or lineweight, first consider whether these properties are set to BYLAYER for any objects in your drawing. For example, an object may appear red because its color is set to BYLAYER and the layer color is red.
The FILTER Command Creates reusable filters for object selection FILTER creates a list of requirements that an object must meet to be included in a selection set. Use FILTER to •
Select objects before using an editing command
•
Select objects during an editing command; at any Select Objects prompt, use FILTER transparently to select objects to use with the current command
•
Create named filters to use later at any Select Objects prompt
FILTER finds objects by property only when you have assigned those properties to the object directly. If objects assume properties from the layer on which they reside, FILTER does not find them. You can, however, use FILTER to find objects with properties set by layer or by block. Command: filter
The Object Selection Filters dialog box is displayed. Object Selection Filters Dialog Box Selects, edits, and names filters for object selection. Filter Property List Displays a list of the filter properties that compose the current filter. The current filter is the filter that you select in Current in the Named Filters area.
Prepared by: Yamanta Raj Niroula
175
An Introduction to AutoCAD
PENTASOFT
Select Filter Adds filter properties to the current filter. Object Types and Logical Operators - Lists object types that you can filter and logical operators (AND, OR, XOR, and NOT) for grouping the filter expressions. If you use logical operators, make sure that you pair and balance them correctly in the filter list. The number of operands you can enclose depends on the operation.
For example, the following filter selects all circles except the ones with a radius greater than or equal to 1.0: Object=Circle **Begin NOT Circle Radius>= 1.00 **End NOT X, Y, Z Parameters - Define additional filter parameters depending on the object. For example, if you select Line Start, you can enter the X, Y, and Z coordinate values that you want to filter. In the filter parameters, you can use relative operators such as < (less than) or > (greater than). For example, the following filter selects all circles with center points greater than or equal to 1,1,0 and radii greater than or equal to 1: Object=Circle Circle CenterX >= 1.0000 Y >= 1.0000 Z >= 0.0000 Circle Radius>= 1.0000 Select - Displays a dialog box listing all items of the specified type in the drawing. Select the items to filter. For example, if you select the object type Color, Select displays a list of colors to choose for the filter. Add to List - Adds the current Select Filter property to the filter list. Filter properties that you add to the unnamed filter remain available during the current AutoCAD session unless you manually delete them. Substitute - Replaces the filter property selected in the filter property list with the one displayed in Select Filter.
Prepared by: Yamanta Raj Niroula
176
An Introduction to AutoCAD
PENTASOFT
Add Selected Object - Adds one selected object in the drawing to the filter list. Edit Item Moves the selected filter property into the Select Filter area for editing. To edit a filter property, select it and choose Edit Item. Edit the filter property and choose Substitute. The edited filter replaces the selected filter property. Delete Deletes a selected filter property from the current filter. Clear List Deletes all the listed properties from the current filter. Named Filters Displays, saves, and deletes filters. Current - Displays saved filters. Select a filter list to make it current. AutoCAD loads the named filter and its list of properties from the default file, filter.nfl. Save As - Saves a filter and its list of properties. AutoCAD saves the filter in the filter.nfl file. Names can contain up to 18 characters. Delete Current Filter List - Deletes a filter and all its properties from the default filter file. Apply Exits the dialog box and displays the Select Objects prompt, where you create a selection set. AutoCAD uses the current filter on the objects you select Relational Operator < <= > >= = != *
Meaning Lesser than Lesser than or equal to Greater than Greater than or equal to Equal to Not equal to Equal to any value
Creating Named Selection Set of Objects (Group) A group is a saved set of objects that you can select and edit together or separately as needed. Groups provide an easy way to combine drawing elements that you need to manipulate as a unit. You can change the components of groups as you work by adding or removing objects.
Prepared by: Yamanta Raj Niroula
177
An Introduction to AutoCAD
PENTASOFT
In some ways, groups resemble blocks, which provide another method of combining objects into a named set. For example, the groups you create are saved from session to session. However, you can edit individual objects in groups more easily than you can edit them in blocks, which must be exploded first. Unlike blocks, groups cannot be shared with other drawings. When you create a group, you can give the group a name and description. If you copy a group, the copy is given the default name Ax and is considered unnamed. Unnamed groups are not listed in the Object Grouping dialog box unless you select Include Unnamed. If you choose a member of a group that can be selected for inclusion in a new group, all members of the former group are included in the new group. The objects in your drawing can be members of more than one group, and groups themselves can be nested in other groups. You can ungroup a nested group to restore the original group configuration. Named groups are not maintained when you use a drawing as an external reference or insert it as a block. However, you can bind and then explode the external reference or explode the block to make the group available as an unnamed group. Note - Avoid creating large groups containing hundreds or thousands of objects. A large group significantly degrades the performance of AutoCAD.
The GROUP Command Creates and manages saved sets of objects called groups Command: group
The Object Grouping dialog box is displayed. If you enter -group at the Command prompt, GROUP displays prompts the command line. Object Grouping Dialog Box Displays, identifies, names, and changes object groups.
Prepared by: Yamanta Raj Niroula
178
An Introduction to AutoCAD
PENTASOFT
Group Name Displays the names of existing groups. Selectable Specifies whether a group is selectable. When a group is selectable, selecting one object in the group selects the whole group. Objects on locked or frozen layers are not selected. When the PICKSTYLE system variable is set to 0, no groups are selectable. Group Identification Displays the name and description (if any) of the group selected in the Group Name list. Group Name - Specifies the group name. Group names can be up to 31 characters long and can include letters, numbers, and the special characters dollar sign ($), hyphen (-), and underscore (_) but not spaces. AutoCAD converts the name to uppercase characters. Description - Displays the description of the selected group, if there is one. Find Name - Lists the groups to which an object belongs. Pick a member of a group: Select one object
AutoCAD displays the Group Member List dialog box, showing the groups to which the object belongs.
Prepared by: Yamanta Raj Niroula
179
An Introduction to AutoCAD
PENTASOFT
Highlight - Shows the members of the selected group. AutoCAD highlights the member objects in the drawing area. Include Unnamed - Specifies whether unnamed groups are listed. When this option is cleared, only named groups are displayed. Create Group Specifies properties of new groups. New - Creates a new group from the selected objects. After you select the objects, AutoCAD creates a group using the name and description under Group Name and Description. AutoCAD displays the group name in the Group Name list. Selectable - Specifies that a new group is selectable. Unnamed - Indicates that a new group is unnamed. AutoCAD assigns a default name, *An, to unnamed groups. The n represents a number that increases with each new group. Change Group Modifies existing groups. Remove - Removes objects from the selected group. To use this option, clear the Selectable option. Remove objects: Use an object selection method
AutoCAD removes the selected objects from the group and redisplays the Object Grouping dialog box.
If you remove all the group’s objects, the group remains defined. You can remove the group definition from the drawing by using the Explode option. Note - When you remove objects from a group and then later add them back during the same drawing session, AutoCAD returns them to their previous position in the numerical order of the group.
Prepared by: Yamanta Raj Niroula
180
An Introduction to AutoCAD
PENTASOFT
Add - Adds objects to the selected group. Select objects: Use an object selection method
AutoCAD adds the selected objects to the group and redisplays the Object Grouping dialog box.
Note - AutoCAD alphabetizes the order of the group names. telephone selected telephone removed from group Rename - Renames the selected group to the name entered in Group Name under Group Identification. Re-Order - Displays the Order Group dialog box, in which you can change the numerical order of objects within the selected group. AutoCAD numbers objects in the order in which you select them for inclusion in the group. Reordering is useful when creating tool paths. For example, you can change the order in which AutoCAD cuts the horizontal and vertical lines of a tool path pattern. You can either change the numerical position of individual group members or ranges of group members or reverse the order of all members. The first object in a group is number 0, not number 1. Description - Updates the selected group’s description to the name that you enter in Description. AutoCAD accepts up to 64 characters for a description name. Explode - Deletes the definition of the selected group. The group’s objects remain in the drawing. Selectable - Specifies whether the group is selectable. Order Group Dialog Box Reorders objects in groups.
Prepared by: Yamanta Raj Niroula
181
An Introduction to AutoCAD
PENTASOFT
Group Name - Displays the names of all groups. Description - Displays the description of the selected group. Remove from Position (0–n) - Specifies the current position of the object to reorder. Replace at Position (0–n) - Specifies the position to which the object moves. Number of Objects (1–n) - Specifies the object number or range of numbers to reorder. Re-Order - Changes the numerical order of objects as specified. Highlight - Displays the members of the selected group. AutoCAD highlights the group members in the drawing area, one by one, in the current group order. Reverse Order - Reverses the order of all group members. GROUP Command Line If you enter -group at the Command prompt, GROUP displays prompts on the command line. Enter a group option [?/Order/Add/Remove/Explode/REName/Selectable/Create] : Enter an option or press ENTER
?—List Groups Lists names and descriptions of groups defined in the drawing. Enter group name(s) to list <*>: Enter a name list or press ENTER to list all groups
Prepared by: Yamanta Raj Niroula
182
An Introduction to AutoCAD
PENTASOFT
Order Changes the numerical order of objects within a group. Reordering is useful when creating tool paths. For example, you can change the order in which AutoCAD cuts the horizontal and vertical lines of a tool path pattern. Enter a group name or [?]: Enter a name list or enter ? to list all groups Enter position number of the object to reorder (0 - n) or [Reverse order]: Enter a position number or enter r
Position Number - Specifies the position number of the object to reorder. To reorder a range of objects, specify the first object’s position number. Replace at position <0 - n>: Enter the position number to which you want the object to move Number of objects to re-order <0 - n>: Enter the number of objects to reorder
Reverse Order - Reverses the order of all members in a group. Add Adds objects to a group. Enter a group name or [?]: Enter a name or enter ? to list all groups Select objects to add to group... Select objects:
Remove Removes objects from a group. Enter a group name or [?]: Enter a name or enter ? to list all groups Select objects to remove from group... Remove objects:
If you remove all the group’s objects, the group remains defined. You can remove the group definition from the drawing by using the Explode option. Explode Deletes a group definition by exploding the group into its component objects. Enter a group name or [?]: Enter a name or enter ? to list all groups
Rename Assigns a new name to an existing group. Enter a group name to rename or [?]: Enter an existing group name or enter ? to list all groups Enter a new name for group or [?]: Enter a new name or enter ? to list all groups
Prepared by: Yamanta Raj Niroula
183
An Introduction to AutoCAD
PENTASOFT
Selectable Specifies whether a group is selectable. When a group is selectable, selecting one object in the group selects the whole group. Objects on locked or frozen layers are not selected. Enter a group name or [?]: Enter a name or enter ? to list all groups This group is current, do you want to change it [Yes/No]? : Enter y or n, or press ENTER
Create Creates a group. Enter a group name or [?]: Enter a name or enter ?
Group names can be up to 31 characters long and can include letters, numbers, and special characters dollar sign ($), hyphen (-), and underscore (_) but not spaces. AutoCAD converts the name to uppercase characters. Enter a group description: Enter up to 64 text characters or press ENTER Select objects:
Prepared by: Yamanta Raj Niroula
184
An Introduction to AutoCAD
PENTASOFT
Working with Layers and Linetypes Now that you' ve learned a lot of the drawing and modifying commands, it' s time to go to the next level. This lesson will introduce you to concept of layers and linetypes.
Layers: Layers are the equivalent of the overlays used in paper-based drafting. They are the primary organizational tool in AutoCAD, and you use them to group information by function and to enforce linetype, color, and other standards.
Imagine a stack of thin glass sheets that could individually be drawn on. Each sheet, or layer, would be the same size so that the sides could easily be aligned with each other. When you looked straight down through the stack of glass layers, you would be able to see everything that was drawn on each layer. This concept can be used to define drawing layers, in which you can control both the visibility of the layers and the linetype and color of the objects on each of the layers. This is achieved through the Layer Properties Manager dialog box, which is opened via the Layers button on the Object properties toolbar. By creating layers, you can associate similar types of objects by assigning them to the same layer. For example, you can put construction lines, text, dimensions, and title blocks on separate layers. You can then control • • • • •
Whether objects on a layer are visible in any viewports Whether and how objects are plotted What color is assigned to all objects on a layer What default linetype and lineweight are assigned to all objects on a layer Whether objects on a layer can be modified
Every drawing includes a layer named 0. Layer 0 cannot be deleted or renamed. It has two purposes: • •
Ensure that every drawing includes at least one layer Provide a special layer that relates to controlling colors in blocks
Prepared by: Yamanta Raj Niroula
185
An Introduction to AutoCAD
PENTASOFT
Note - It is recommended that you create several new layers with which to organize your drawing rather than create your entire drawing on layer 0.
The LAYER Command Manages layers and layer properties
Layers toolbar: Format menu: Layer Command: layer The Layer Properties Manager is displayed. If you enter -layer at the Command prompt, LAYER displays prompts on the command line.
Prepared by: Yamanta Raj Niroula
186
An Introduction to AutoCAD
PENTASOFT
Layer Properties Manager The Layer Properties Manager dialog box lists all the layers contained in the current drawing. From here, you can toggle the display of layers and also modify their properties. It displays a list of the layers in the drawing and their properties. You can add, delete, and rename layers, change their properties, or add descriptions. Layer filters control which layers are displayed in the list and can also be used to make changes to more than one layer at a time. It also makes a layer current, adds new layers, deletes layers, and renames layers. You can assign properties to layers, turn layers on and off, freeze and thaw layers globally or by viewport, lock and unlock layers, set plot styles for layers, and turn plotting on and off for layers. You can filter the layer names displayed in the Layer Properties Manager, and you can save and restore layer states and properties settings.
New: Creates a new layer. After you choose New, the lists displays a layer named LAYER1. You can edit this layer immediately. To create multiple layers more quickly, you can select a layer name for editing and enter multiple layer names separated by commas. If you create a new layer, the new layer inherits the properties of the currently selected layer in the layer list (Color, On/Off state, and so on). To create layers with default settings, make sure that there are no selected layers in the list or that you select a layer with default settings before beginning layer creation.
Current: Sets the selected layer as a current layer.
Delete: Deletes the selected layers from the drawing file definition. You can delete only unreferenced layers. Referenced layers include layers 0 and DEFPOINTS, layers containing objects (including objects in block definitions), the current layer, and xrefdependent layers. Layers that don’t contain objects (including objects in block definitions), are not current, and are not xref-dependent can be deleted by using the PURGE command.
Show details: Controls whether the Details section is displayed in the Layer Properties Manager.
Layer Property Types: Opening the details section of the Layer Manager dialog box gives you access to the individual layer property types. Each layer has five properties and six display states that can be set, which define the color, linetype, lineweight, or visibility of the layer. The
Prepared by: Yamanta Raj Niroula
187
An Introduction to AutoCAD
PENTASOFT
individual properties are set by pull-down lists that contain the possible layer values or check boxes that set a current state. The layer properties are as follows: • • • • •
Name Color Lineweight Linetype Plot style The layer display states include the following:
• • • • • •
Off for display Lock for editing Do not plot Freeze in all viewports Freeze in active viewport Freeze in new viewports
Name: The name of the layer is displayed here unless the name of the layer is 0 or DEFPOINTS or unless the layer is part of an external reference (xref) file. To modify a property, click its icon. To quickly select all layers, right-click your pointing device and use the shortcut menu. When you create multiple new layers and after you key in the layer name, type a comma to add a new layer to the list. This is convenient because you need to provide only the names of the layers separated by a comma to quickly create new layers.
Color: The color assigned to the can be selected from here. The default color for a new layer is white. You can choose a different color from a list of colors; alternatively, you can select the Other option to bring up a color palette that contains a broader choice of color to pick from.
Lineweight: Lineweight can de defined as the thickness or width of an object. The thickness of an object determines how the object is displayed on the screen, as well as how it will be plotted. Selecting a varying thickness from the list defines the default thickness for all objects on the layer. Lineweights can be used to specify an area or significant part, or just to outline the part you want to bring attention of the viewer.
Plot Styles:
Plot styles classify the plotted characteristics of objects that determine how they will appear on the plotted sheet. Through the Layer Properties Manager, you can assign plot styles to individual layers. Prepared by: Yamanta Raj Niroula
188
An Introduction to AutoCAD
PENTASOFT
Layer Display States The layer display states for a layer define the visibility and selectability of objects on each layer. These states can easily be changed, or toggled, to the opposite effect to display or select objects from the drawing.
Applying Specific Display States: The specific layer display states are available from the Show details option within the Layer Properties Manager dialog box. These enable you to apply certain display states to layers during these situations: •
Off for display – When this check box is selected, the objects on this layer will not be displayed.
•
Lock for editing - Lock for Editing defines a layer as noneditable, which essentially makes the layer read-only; it can be displayed but not modified.
•
Do not plot - Layers can also be marked to not plot using this check box. This can be to not plot non-essential layers, such as personal notes layer you may use contain notes about the drawing but that you do not want plotted.
•
Freeze in all viewports – This option turns off the visibility of the layer, making the items on this layer nonselectable, enabling you to quickly apply this to all viewports you have in the drawing.
•
Freeze in active viewports – This option turns off the selected layer visibility in only the active viewport.
•
Freeze in new viewports – This option turns off the visibility of the highlighted layer in every new viewport created in the layer.
Prepared by: Yamanta Raj Niroula
189
An Introduction to AutoCAD
PENTASOFT
Changing Layer Display Properties: Three sets of layer display properties can be modified: • • •
On/Off Thaw/Freeze Lock/Unlock
On/Off: This option turns the visibility of the selected layer off, and items on the layer cannot be selected. When the layer state is toggled back on, only the items on this layer are regenerated. This property is represented by lighted light bulb when on, and unlighted light bulb when off.
Thaw/Freeze: Like the Off state, when a layer is frozen, objects on that layer cannot be viewed or selected. The difference exists when the layer is thawed: The entire drawing will regenerate, not just the items on the layer. This property is represented by a sun when thawed and a snowflake when frozen.
Lock/Unlock: When a layer is locked, the objects on that layer cannot be selected even though they are visible on the screen. Object snaps can still be applied to objects on a locked layer.
Named Layer Filters This feature allows you to determine which layers will be displayed in the list by filtering the layers that are in the drawing by a specific property. Clicking ellipsis button from the Named layer filters box opens the Named Layer Filters dialog box. From the Named Layer Filters dialog box, filter criteria can be chosen based on layer property or state. With the Named Layer Filters dialog box, you can set which layers are displayed in the Layer properties Manager based on property setting or state. When applied, this displays only those layers affected. This dialog box enables you to set only specific layer criteria, so filter criteria must be saved to a file and recalled in the Layer Properties Manager dialog box. To apply filter criteria to the list of layers, select the filter criteria name from the Named layer filters pull-down menu. You’ll notice three default choices available to you, in addition to the named filters you have created:
Prepared by: Yamanta Raj Niroula
190
An Introduction to AutoCAD
PENTASOFT
•
Show all layers – No filter is applied, and all layers in the drawing (including xref layers) are visible.
•
Show all used layers – This shows only those layers that are being used in the drawing. In other words, only those layers that have objects on them will be shown in the list.
•
Show all Xref dependent layers – This lists only those layers that are part of an external reference file.
Looking at the rest of the Named Layer Filters box, you’ll see two other options that control how the Named Layer Filters addect the layer listing shown in the Layer Properties Manager. •
Invert filter – This option gives you the inverse, or opposite, of the current filter criteria. For example, if the filter criteria were set to show only those layers that were frozen, inversing the filter would then show you only the layers that are thawed.
•
Apply to object properties toolbar – This option applies the layer matching the filter criteria to the Object Properties toolbar. Only those layers that have not been filtered out will appear when you access the toolbar.
Prepared by: Yamanta Raj Niroula
191
An Introduction to AutoCAD
PENTASOFT
Working with Linetypes: The linetype can be defined as the physical description of the object and typically is used to represent how an object is displayed in a drawing. Examples of linetype are dashed, hidden, and continuous; numerous linetypes can be assigned in AutoCAD. Linetypes are typically used to indicate what is occurring within the drawing, such as hidden lines to represent a hole nor visible from the side the part is viewed from, or a centerline to indicate the alignment of a series of holes. As defined above, a linetype is a repeating pattern of dashes, dots, and blank spaces displayed in a line or a curve. You assign linetypes to objects either by layer or by specifying the linetype explicitly, independent of layers. In addition to choosing a linetype, you can set its scale to control the size of the dashes and spaces, and you can create your own custom linetypes. Note - These linetypes should not be confused with the hardware linetypes provided by some plotters. The two types of dashed lines produce similar results. Do not use both types at the same time, however, because the results can be unpredictable.
Loading Linetypes: At the start of a project, you load the linetypes that are required for the project so that they are available when you need them. If you want to know what linetypes are already available, you can display a list of linetypes that are loaded in the drawing or stored in an LIN (linetype definition) file. AutoCAD includes the linetype definition files acad.lin and acadiso.lin. Which linetype file is appropriate depends on whether you use imperial or metric measurements. •
For imperial units, use the acad.lin file.
•
For metric measurements, use the acadiso.lin file. Both linetype definition files contain several complex linetypes.
If you select a linetype whose name begins with ACAD_ISO, you can use the ISO pen-width option when you plot. From here you can select which linetype from the default acad.lin file you want to have available in the current drawing. Select the linetypes using the SHIFT or CTRL keys and then click OK button. The selected layer will then appear in the Linetype Manager dialog box. You can load a different linetype file from here by clicking the File button and selecting a new linetype file from the Select Linetype File dialog box. If you select the Hide/Show Details button from the Linetype Manager, you gain access to the properties of the individual linetypes. These properties are available via the Details section in the Linetype Manager dialog box: •
Global scale factor
Prepared by: Yamanta Raj Niroula
192
An Introduction to AutoCAD • •
PENTASOFT
Current object scale Use paper space units for scaling
Setting Current Linetype: All objects are created using the current linetype, which is displayed in the Linetype control on the Properties toolbar. You can also set the current linetype with the Linetype control. If the current linetype is set to BYLAYER, objects are created with the linetype assigned to the current layer. If the current linetype is set to BYBLOCK, objects are created using the CONTINUOUS linetype until the objects are grouped into a block. When the block is inserted into the drawing, those objects acquire the current linetype setting. If you do not want the current linetype to be the linetype assigned to the current layer, you can specify a different linetype explicitly. AutoCAD does not display the linetype of certain objects: text, points, viewports, hatches, and blocks.
Changing the Linetype of an Object: You have three choices for changing the linetype of an object: • •
•
Reassign the object to another layer with a different linetype. If an object' s linetype is set to BYLAYER, and you reassign the object to a different layer, it acquires its linetype from the new layer. Change the linetype assigned to the layer that the object is on. If an object' s linetype is set to BYLAYER, it acquires the linetype of its layer. When you change the linetype assigned to a layer, all objects on that layer assigned the BYLAYER linetype are updated automatically. Specify a linetype for an object to override the layer' s linetype. You can specify the linetype of each object explicitly. If you want to override the layer-determined linetype of an object with a different one, change an existing object' s linetype from BYLAYER to a specific linetype, such as DASHED.
If you want to set a specific linetype for all subsequently created objects, change the current linetype setting on the Properties toolbar from BYLAYER to a specific linetype.
Prepared by: Yamanta Raj Niroula
193
An Introduction to AutoCAD
PENTASOFT
Controlling Linetype Scale: You can use the same linetype at different scales by changing the linetype scale factor either globally or individually for each object. By default, both global and individual linetype scales are set to 1.0. The smaller the scale, the more repetitions of the pattern are generated per drawing unit. For example, with a setting of 0.5, two repetitions of the pattern in the linetype definition are displayed for each drawing unit. Short line segments that cannot display one full linetype pattern are displayed as continuous. You can use a smaller linetype scale for lines that are too short to display even one dash sequence. The Linetype Manager displays the Global Scale Factor and Current Object Scale. •
The Global Scale Factor value controls the LTSCALE system variable, which changes the linetype scale globally for both new and existing objects.
•
The Current Object Scale value controls the CELTSCALE system variable, which sets the linetype scale for new objects.
The CELTSCALE value is multiplied by the LTSCALE value to get the displayed linetype scale. You can easily change linetype scales in your drawing either individually or globally. In a layout, you can adjust the scaling of linetypes in different viewports with PSLTSCALE.
Global Scale Factor: This is the linetype scale factor for the whole drawing, or the Ltscale variable. This setting enables you to set a scale factor to increase or decrease the spacing of all linetypes throughout the drawing. Because the Ltscale factor directly affects the way a linetype is displayed, use this option to adjust the display of all linetypes in the drawing.
Current Object Scale:
Current Object Scale is the individual linetype scale factor, which can be applied to individual objects as needed. This is a factor of the Global Scale Factor, so objects that have this values set will change the Ltscale is changed.
Use paper space units for scaling: This setting uses the viewport scale factor to determine the size of the linetype, which affects how the linetype is displayed.
Prepared by: Yamanta Raj Niroula
194
An Introduction to AutoCAD
PENTASOFT
Displaying Linetypes on Short Segments and Polylines If a line is too short to hold even one dash sequence, the result is a continuous line between the endpoints, as shown below.
You can accommodate short segments by using a smaller value for their individual linetype scales. For more information, see Controlling Linetype Scale. For polylines, you can specify whether a linetype pattern is centered on each segment or is continuous across vertices throughout the entire length of the polyline. You do this by setting the PLINEGEN system variable.
The LINETYPE Command Loads, sets, and modifies linetypes Line characteristics consist of combinations of dashes, dots, and spaces. You can use LINETYPE to load linetype definitions from a linetype library (LIN) file, make a linetype current, or modify linetype scales. Format menu: Linetype Command: linetype
The Linetype Manager is displayed.
Prepared by: Yamanta Raj Niroula
195
An Introduction to AutoCAD
PENTASOFT
If you enter -linetype at the Command prompt, LINETYPE displays prompts on the command line.
Linetype Manager Loads linetypes and sets the current linetype.
Linetype Filters Determines which linetypes to display in the linetype list. You can filter linetypes based on whether they are xref-dependent, or whether they are referenced by objects. Invert Filter - Displays linetypes based on the opposites of the criteria you select. Linetypes that fit the inverse filter criteria are displayed in the linetype list. Load Displays the Load or Reload Linetypes dialog box, in which you can load into the drawing selected linetypes from the acad.lin file and add them to the linetype list. Current Sets the selected linetype to be the current linetype. Setting the current linetype to BYLAYER means that an object assumes the linetype that is assigned to a particular Prepared by: Yamanta Raj Niroula
196
An Introduction to AutoCAD
PENTASOFT
layer. Setting the linetype to BYBLOCK means that an object assumes the CONTINUOUS linetype until it is grouped into a block. Whenever the block is inserted, all objects inherit the block' s linetype. The CELTYPE system variable stores the linetype name. Delete Deletes selected linetypes from the list. You can only delete unreferenced linetypes. Default referenced linetypes include BYLAYER, BYBLOCK, and CONTINUOUS. Note - Be careful about deleting linetypes if you are working on a drawing in a shared project or one based on a set of layering standards. The deleted linetype definition remains stored in the acad.lin or acadiso.lin file and can be reloaded. Show Details or Hide Details Controls whether the Details section (see page 508) of the Linetype Manager is displayed. List of Linetypes Displays the loaded linetypes according to the option specified in Linetype Filters. To quickly select all or clear all linetypes, right-click in the linetype list to display the shortcut menu. Linetype Displays names of loaded linetypes. To rename a linetype, select it and then click it again and enter a new name. BYLAYER, BYBLOCK, CONTINUOUS, and xref-dependent linetypes cannot be renamed. The linetype name can include up to 255 characters. Linetype names can contain letters, digits, blank spaces, and the special characters dollar sign ($), hyphen (–), and underscore (_). Linetype names cannot include the special characters comma (,), colon (:), equal sign (=), question mark (?), asterisk (*), greater and lesser than symbols (< >), forward and back slashes (/ \), vertical bar (|), quote (“), or back quote (‘). Appearance - Displays a sample of selected linetypes. Description - Displays descriptions of the linetypes, which can be edited in the Details area. Details Displays an extension of the dialog box with alternative access to properties and additional settings.
Prepared by: Yamanta Raj Niroula
197
An Introduction to AutoCAD
PENTASOFT
Name - Displays the selected linetype name, which can be edited. The linetype name can include up to 255 characters. Linetype names can contain letters, digits, blank spaces, and the special characters dollar sign ($), hyphen (–), and underscore (_). Linetype names cannot include the special characters comma (,), colon (:), equal sign (=), question mark (?), asterisk (*), greater and lesser than symbols (< >), forward and back slashes (/ \), vertical bar (|), quote (“), or back quote (‘). Description - Displays the description of the selected linetype, which can be edited. Use Paper Space Units for Scaling - Scales linetypes in paper space and model space identically. Useful when working with multiple viewports. This option is also controlled by the PSLTSCALE system variable. Global Scale Factor - Displays the global scale factor for all linetypes. (LTSCALE system variable). Current Object Scale - Sets linetype scale for newly created objects. The resulting scale is the global scale factor multiplied by the object’s scale factor. This option is also controlled by the CELTSCALE system variable. ISO Pen Width - Sets the linetype scale to one of a list of standard ISO values. The resulting scale is the global scale factor multiplied by the object’s scale factor. Load or Reload Linetypes Dialog Box Loads a linetype whose definition exists in a linetype library (LIN) file. The acad.lin file contains the standard linetypes.
Prepared by: Yamanta Raj Niroula
198
An Introduction to AutoCAD
PENTASOFT
File - Displays the name of the current LIN file. You can enter the name of another LIN file or choose File to select a different file from the Select Linetype File dialog box. Available Linetypes - Displays the linetypes available to load. To select or clear all of the linetypes on the list, right-click and choose Select All or Clear All.
Prepared by: Yamanta Raj Niroula
199
An Introduction to AutoCAD
PENTASOFT
Object Properties Every object you draw has properties. Some properties are general and apply to most objects; for example, layer, color, linetype, and plot style. Other properties are object-specific; for example, the properties of a circle include radius and area, and the properties of a line include length and angle. Most general properties can be assigned to an object by layer or can be assigned to an object directly. •
When a property is set to the value BYLAYER, the object is assigned the same value as the layer on which it is drawn.
For example, if a line drawn on Layer0 is assigned the color BYLAYER, and Layer0 is assigned the color Red, the line is red. •
When a property is set to a specific value, that value overrides the value set for the layer.
For example, if a line drawn on Layer0 is assigned the color Blue, and Layer0 is assigned the color Red, the line is blue. Now that you have learned how to draw objects and modify them using special commands, you need to know one more way changing the properties of an object. For instance, you may have made a spelling mistake in your text. You could erase it and recreate it, or you could double-click on it and just correct the error. This method is an extremely important tool to help you with your CAD work. DON'T REDRAW AN OBJECT - CHANGE ITS PROPERTIES There are a few ways to change, or view an objects properties. First is by using the PROPERTIES command. Command Properties
Keystroke PROPERTIES
Toolbar
Menu
Result
Modify Properties
Displays the properties of the object in the Properties Palette
Display and Change the Properties of Objects You can display and change the current properties for any object in your drawing in the following ways: •
Open the Properties palette and view and change the settings for all properties of the object.
Prepared by: Yamanta Raj Niroula
200
An Introduction to AutoCAD
PENTASOFT
•
View and change the settings in the Layer control on the Layers toolbar and the Color, Linetype, Lineweight, and Plot Style controls on the Properties toolbar. Use LIST to view information in the text window.
•
Use the ID command to display a coordinate location.
•
Use the Properties Palette The Properties palette lists the current settings for properties of the selected object or set of objects. You can modify any property that can be changed by specifying a new value. •
When more than one object is selected, the Properties palette displays only those properties common to all objects in the selection set.
•
When no objects are selected, the Properties palette displays only the general properties of the current layer, the name of the plot style table attached to the layer, the view properties, and information about the UCS.
You can double-click most objects to open the Properties palette when the DBLCLKEDIT command is on (the default). The exceptions are blocks and attributes, hatches, gradient fills, text, multilines, and xrefs. If you double-click any of these objects, an object-specific dialog box displays instead of the Properties palette. Note - The DBLCLKEDIT command must be on and the PICKFIRST system variable must be on (set to 1, the default) for double-clicking to work
The PROPERTIES Command Controls properties of existing objects
Standard toolbar: Tools menu: Properties Shortcut menu: Select the objects whose properties you want to view or modify, rightclick in the drawing area, and choose Properties. Alternatively, you can double-click most objects to display the Properties palette. Command line: properties
The Properties palette is displayed. The Properties palette lists properties of the selected object or set of objects. You can also view or modify properties of third-party application objects that are based on AutoCAD Application Programming Interface (API) standards. There are eight general properties common to all objects. (See “General Properties
Prepared by: Yamanta Raj Niroula
201
An Introduction to AutoCAD
PENTASOFT
of Objects”) All other object properties are specific to the type of AutoCAD object, and are described in the following sections. Properties Palette
Displays the properties of the selected object or set of objects. You can specify a new value to modify any property that can be changed. •
When more than one object is selected, the Properties palette displays only those properties common to all objects in the selection set.
•
When no objects are selected, the Properties palette displays only the general properties of the current layer and layout, the name of the plot style table attached to the layer, the view properties, and information about the UCS.
Object Type - Displays the type of object that is selected. Toggle Value of PICKADD Sysvar - Turns the PICKADD system variable on (1) and off (0). When PICKADD is on, each object selected, either individually or by windowing, is added to the current selection set. When PICKADD is off, selected objects replace the current selection set. Select Objects - Selects desired objects using any selection method. The properties common to the selected objects are displayed in the Properties palette. You can then modify the properties of the selected objects in the Properties palette, or you can make other changes to the selected objects by entering an editing command.
Prepared by: Yamanta Raj Niroula
202
An Introduction to AutoCAD
PENTASOFT
Quick Select - Displays the Quick Select dialog box (see selecting objects). Use Quick Select to create selection sets based on filtering criteria. bar.
The following shortcut menu options are available when you right-click the title
Move - Displays a four-headed arrow cursor that you can use to move the palette. The palette does not dock. Size - Displays a four-headed arrow cursor that you can use to drag an edge or a corner to make the palette smaller or larger. Close - Closes the Properties palette. Allow Docking Controls whether the Properties palette docks when you drag it over a docking area at the side of the drawing. Auto-hide - Controls display of the Properties palette. When this option is checked, only the palette title bar is displayed when the cursor moves outside the palette. When this option is not checked, the full palette is displayed when the cursor moves. Description - Controls display of the description area at the bottom of the Properties palette. When this option is checked, descriptions are displayed. When this option is not checked, the description area is not displayed. General Properties of Objects The following general properties are common to most AutoCAD objects and custom objects (third-party application objects based on AutoCAD API standards). Color - Specifies the color for objects. Selecting Select Color in the color list displays the Select Color dialog box (see COLOR). You can use the Select Color dialog box to define the color of objects by selecting from the 255 AutoCAD Color Index (ACI) colors, true colors, and color book colors. Layer - Specifies the current layer of the object. The list shows all layers in current drawing (see LAYER). Linetype - Specifies the current linetype of the object. The list shows all linetypes in the current drawing (see LINETYPE). Linetype Scale - Specifies the linetype scale factor of the object (see LTSCALE). Plot Style - Lists NORMAL, BYLAYER, BYBLOCK, plus any plot styles contained in the current plot style table (see PLOTSTYLE). Lineweight - Specifies the lineweight of the object. The list shows all available lineweights in the current drawing (see LWEIGHT). Hyperlink - Attaches a hyperlink to a graphical object. If a description has been assigned to the hyperlink, the description is displayed. If no description has been assigned, the URL is displayed (see HYPERLINK).
Prepared by: Yamanta Raj Niroula
203
An Introduction to AutoCAD
PENTASOFT
Thickness - Sets the current 3D thickness. This property does not apply to all objects (see CHPROP). Commands - CHPROP changes an existing object’s color, layer, linetype, and thickness. COLOR sets the color of new objects. LAYER controls layer settings. LINETYPE loads, sets, and creates linetypes. ELEV sets elevation and extrusion thickness of new objects. STYLE creates text styles and changes existing text style settings. System Variables - CECOLOR sets the color of new objects. CELTSCALE sets the linetype scale factor for new objects. CELTYPE sets the linetype for new objects. CLAYER sets the current layer. ELEVATION stores the current 3D elevation. PALETTE-TRANSPARENCY controls the transparency of palettes. THICKNESS sets the current 3D thickness.
Prepared by: Yamanta Raj Niroula
204
An Introduction to AutoCAD
PENTASOFT
Annotating the Drawing Introduction Text conveys important information in your drawing. You use text for title blocks, to label parts of the drawing, to give specifications or to make annotations. AutoCAD provides various ways to create text. For short, simple entries, use single-line text. For longer entries with internal formatting, use multiline text (also called mtext). You can also create multiline text with leaders. Although all entered text uses the current text style, which establishes the default font and format settings, you can use several methods to customize the text appearance. AutoCAD also provides several tools that can change text scale and justification, find and replace text, and check for spelling errors.
Creating Text and Leaders The text you add to your drawings conveys a variety of information. It may be a complex specification, title block information, a label, or even part of the drawing.
Single-Line Text For short entries that do not require multiple fonts or lines, create single-line text. Single-line text is most convenient for labels.
Multiline Text For long, complex entries, create multiline, or paragraph text. Multiline text consists of any number of text lines or paragraphs that fit within a width you specify; it can extend vertically to an indefinite length. Regardless of the number of lines, each set of paragraphs created in a single editing session forms a single object, which you can move, rotate, erase, copy, mirror, or scale. There are more editing options for multiline text than there are for single-line text. For example, you can apply underlining, fonts, color, and text height changes to individual characters, words, or phrases within a paragraph.
Leader Objects A leader object is a line or a spline with an arrowhead at one end and a multiline text object at the other. The leader object is associated with the multiline text object, so when the text object is moved, rotated, or scaled, the leader object is updated accordingly. Similarly, when associative dimensioning is turned on, and object snaps are used to locate
Prepared by: Yamanta Raj Niroula
205
An Introduction to AutoCAD
PENTASOFT
the leader arrowhead, a leader object is also associated with any objects to which the arrowhead is attached. You can copy text used elsewhere in a drawing and append a leader to it. Note - The leader object should not be confused with the leader line that is automatically generated as part of a dimension line.
Creating Single Line Text Use single-line text ( TEXT) to create one or more lines of text, ending each line when you press ENTER. Each text line is an independent object that you can relocate, reformat, or otherwise modify. When you create single-line text, you assign a text style and set alignment on the command line. The text style sets the default characteristics of the text object. The alignment determines what part of the text character aligns with the insertion point. You can insert a field in single-line text. A field is text that is set up to display data that might change. When the field is updated, the latest value of the field is displayed. The text styles used for single-line text are the same as those used for multiline text. When you create text, you assign an existing style by entering its name at the Style prompt. If you need to apply formatting to individual words and characters, use multiline text instead of single-line text. You can also compress single-line text to fit between points that you specify. This option stretches or squeezes the text to fill the designated space.
Align Single-Line Text As you create text, you can align it. That is, you can justify it with one of the alignment options shown in the following illustrations. Left alignment is the default. To left-align text, do not enter an option at the Justify prompt.
Prepared by: Yamanta Raj Niroula
206
An Introduction to AutoCAD
PENTASOFT
The TEXT Command Creates a single-line text object You can use TEXT to enter several lines of text that you can rotate, justify, and resize. As you type at the Enter Text prompt, the text you are typing is displayed on the screen. Each line of text is a separate object. To end a line and begin another, press ENTER after entering characters at the Enter Text prompt. To end TEXT, press ENTER without entering any characters at the Enter Text prompt. By applying a style to the text, you can use a variety of character patterns or fonts that you can stretch, compress, make oblique, mirror, or align in a vertical column. Draw menu: Text
Single Line Text
Command: text Current text style: current Current text height: current Specify start point of text or [Justify/Style]: Specify a point or enter an option
If TEXT was the last command entered, pressing ENTER at the Specify Start Point of Text prompt skips the prompts for height and rotation angle and immediately displays the Enter Text prompt. The text is placed directly beneath the previous line of text. The point specified at the prompt is also stored as the insertion point of the text. You can enter special characters and format text by entering Unicode strings and control codes. Use -TEXT to honor the TEXTEVAL system variable. Start Point Specifies a start point for the text object. Specify height : Specify a point (1), enter a value, or press ENTER
The Specify Height prompt is displayed only if the current text style does not have a fixed height. Specify rotation angle of text : Specify an angle or press ENTER Enter text: Enter text and press ENTER to exit the command
Justify Controls justification of the text. Enter an option [Align/Fit/Center/Middle/Right/TL/TC/TR/ML/MC/MR/BL/BC/ BR]:
Prepared by: Yamanta Raj Niroula
207
An Introduction to AutoCAD
PENTASOFT
You can also enter any of these options at the Specify Start Point of Text prompt. Align - Specifies both text height and text orientation by designating the endpoints of the baseline. Specify first endpoint of text baseline: Specify a point (1) Specify second endpoint of text baseline: Specify a point (2) Enter text: Enter text and press ENTER to exit the command
The size of the characters adjusts in proportion to their height. The longer the text string, the shorter the characters. Fit Specifies that text fits within an area and at an orientation defined with two points and a height. Available for horizontally oriented text only. Specify first endpoint of text baseline: Specify a point (1) Specify second endpoint of text baseline: Specify a point (2) Specify height : Enter text: Enter text and press ENTER to exit the
The height is the distance in drawing units that the uppercase letters extend from the baseline. Designated text height is the distance between the start point and a point you specify. The longer the text string, the narrower the characters. The height of the characters remains constant. Center - Aligns text from the horizontal center of the baseline, which you specify with a point. Specify center point of text: Specify a point (1) Specify height : Specify rotation angle of text : Enter text: Enter text and press ENTER to exit the command
The rotation angle specifies the orientation of the text baseline with respect to the center point. You can designate the angle by specifying a point. The text baseline runs from the start point toward the specified point. If you specify a point to the left of the center point, the text is drawn upside down. Middle - Aligns text at the horizontal center of the baseline and the vertical center of the height you specify. Middlealigned text does not rest on the baseline. Specify middle point of text: Specify a point (1) Specify height : Specify rotation angle of text : Enter text: Enter text and press ENTER to exit the command
Prepared by: Yamanta Raj Niroula
208
An Introduction to AutoCAD
PENTASOFT
The Middle option differs from the MC option in that it uses the midpoint of all text, including descenders. The MC option uses the midpoint of the height of uppercase letters. Right - Right-justifies the text at the baseline, which you specify with a point. Specify right endpoint of text baseline: Specify a point (1) Specify height : Specify rotation angle of text : Enter text: Enter text and press ENTER to exit the command
TL (Top Left) - Left-justifies text at a point specified for the top of the text. Available for horizontally oriented text only. Specify top-left point of text: Specify a point (1) Specify height : Specify rotation angle of text : Enter text: Enter text and press ENTER to exit the command
TC (Top Center) - Centers text at a point specified for the top of the text. Available for horizontally oriented text only. Specify top-center point of text: Specify a point (1) Specify height : Specify rotation angle of text : Enter text: Enter text and press ENTER to exit the command
TR (Top Right) - Right-justifies text at a point specified for the top of the text. Available for horizontally oriented text only. Specify top-right point of text: Specify a point (1) Specify height : Specify rotation angle of text : Enter text: Enter text and press ENTER to exit the command
ML (Middle Left) - Left-justifies text at a point specified for the middle of the text. Available for horizontally oriented text only. Specify middle-left point of text: Specify a point (1) Specify height : Specify rotation angle of text : Enter text: Enter text and press ENTER to exit the command
MC (MiddleCenter) - Centers the text both horizontally and vertically at the middle of the text. Available for horizontally oriented text only. Specify middle-center point of text: Specify a point (1) Specify height of text : Specify rotation angle of text : Enter text: Enter text and press ENTER to exit the command
The MC option differs from the Middle option in that it uses the midpoint of the height of uppercase letters. The Middle option uses the midpoint of all text, including descenders.
Prepared by: Yamanta Raj Niroula
209
An Introduction to AutoCAD
PENTASOFT
MR (Middle Right) - Right-justifies text at a point specified for the middle of the text. Available for horizontally oriented text only. Specify middle-right point of text: Specify a point (1) Specify height : Specify rotation angle of text : Enter text: Enter text and press ENTER to exit the command
BL (Bottom Left) - Left-justifies text at a point specified for the baseline. Available for horizontally oriented text only.
Specify bottom-left point of text: Specify a point (1) Specify height : Specify rotation angle of text : Enter text: Enter text and press ENTER to exit the command
BC (Bottom Center) - Centers text at a point specified for the baseline. Available for horizontally oriented text only. Specify bottom-center point of text: Specify a point (1) Specify height : Specify rotation angle of text : Enter text: Enter text and press ENTER to exit the command
BR (Bottom Right) - Right-justifies text at a point specified for the baseline. Available for horizontally oriented text only. Specify bottom-right point of text: Specify a point (1) Specify height : Specify rotation angle of text : Enter text: Enter text and press ENTER to exit the command
Creating Multiline Text You can create one or more paragraphs of multiline text (mtext) in the Multiline Text Editor (or an alternative text editor) or use prompts on the command line. You can also insert text from a file saved in ASCII or RTF format. Before entering or importing text, you specify opposite corners of a text bounding box that defines the width of the paragraphs in the multiline text object. The length of the multiline text object depends on the amount of text, not the length of the bounding box. You can use grips to move or rotate a multiline text object. The Multiline Text Editor displays the bounding box with a ruler at the top and the Text Formatting toolbar. The editor is transparent so that, as you create text, you can see whether the text overlaps other objects. To turn off transparency while you work, click the bottom edge of the ruler. You can also make the background of the finished multiline text object opaque and set its color. You can set tabs and indent text to control the appearance of the multiline text object and create lists. You can also insert fields in multiline text. A field is text that is set up to display data that might change. When the field is updated, the latest value of the field is displayed.
Prepared by: Yamanta Raj Niroula
210
An Introduction to AutoCAD
PENTASOFT
Text Style Most characteristics of the text are controlled by the text style, which sets the default font and other options, such as line spacing, justification, and color. You can use the current text style or select a new one. The STANDARD text style is the default. Within the multiline text object, you can override the current text style by applying formatting such as underlining, boldface, and different fonts to individual characters. You can also create stacked text, such as fractions or geometric tolerances and insert special characters, including Unicode characters, for TrueType fonts. Note - Not all SHX and TrueType text fonts support Unicode characters.
Text Properties In the Properties palette, you can view and change the object properties of a multiline text object, including properties that apply specifically to text: • • • •
Justification determines where text is inserted with respect to the bounding box and the direction of text flow as text is entered. Line space options control the amount of space between lines of text. Width defines the width of the bounding box and therefore controls where the text wraps to a new line. Background inserts an opaque background so that objects under the text are masked.
Justifying Multiline Text Justification controls both text alignment and text flow relative to the text insertion point. Text is left-justified and right-justified with respect to the boundary rectangle that defines the text width. Text flows from the insertion point, which can be at the middle, the top, or the bottom of the resulting text object. AutoCAD offers nine justification settings for multiline text. If a single word is longer than the width of the paragraph, the word will extend beyond the paragraph boundary.
Prepared by: Yamanta Raj Niroula
211
An Introduction to AutoCAD
PENTASOFT
Creating Stacked Characters Within Multiline Text Stacked text is text or fractions that indicate tolerances or measurements. You use special characters to indicate where selected text should be stacked. •
Slash (/) stacks text vertically, separated by a horizontal line.
•
Pound sign (#) stacks text diagonally, separated by a diagonal line.
•
Carat (^) creates a tolerance stack, which is not separated by a line.
Prepared by: Yamanta Raj Niroula
212
An Introduction to AutoCAD
PENTASOFT
You can set AutoCAD to automatically stack numeric characters entered before and after the slash, pound sign, or carat. For example, if you enter 1#3 followed by a nonnumeric character or space, the AutoStack Properties dialog box is displayed. You can change the settings to indicate your formatting preferences. AutoStack stacks only numeric characters immediately before and after the slash, pound sign, and carat. To stack nonnumeric characters or text that includes spaces, select the text and click the Stack button on the Text Formatting toolbar. Note - Releases earlier than AutoCAD 2000 and AutoCAD LT® 2000 do not support diagonal fractions. If you save your drawing in an earlier AutoCAD format, diagonal fractions are converted to vertical fractions. All fractions are converted to diagonal fractions when the drawing is reopened in AutoCAD 2000 and later releases, even if a multiline text object contained both vertical and diagonal fractions before being saved in an earlier format.
The MTEXT Command Creates multiline text MTEXT creates paragraphs that fit within a boundary that defines the width of the paragraph and its location in the drawing. Each multiline text (mtext) object is a single object, regardless of the number of lines it contains. The text boundary, although not plotted, printed, or displayed, remains part of the object’s framework.
Draw toolbar: Draw menu: Text
Multiline Text
Prepared by: Yamanta Raj Niroula
213
An Introduction to AutoCAD
PENTASOFT
Command: mtext Current text style: current Text height: current Specify first corner: Specify opposite corner or [Height/Justify/Line spacing/Rotation/Style/Width]:
After you specify the point for the opposite corner, the Multiline Text Editor is displayed. If you specify one of the other options, or if you enter -mtext at the Command prompt, MTEXT bypasses the Multiline Text Editor and displays additional prompts on the command line. Multiline Text Editor files.
Creates or modifies multiline text objects and imports or pastes text from other
The Multiline Text Editor includes a Text Formatting toolbar and a shortcut menu. Text Formatting Toolbar Controls the text style for the multiline text object and the character formatting for selected text. Style - Applies a text style to the multiline text object. The current style is saved in the TEXTSTYLE system variable. Character formatting for font, height, and bold or italic attributes is overridden if you apply a new style to an existing multiline text object. Stacking, underlining, and color attributes are retained in characters to which a new style is applied. Styles that have backward or upside-down effects are not applied. If a style defined with a vertical effect is applied to an SHX font, the text is displayed horizontally in the Multiline Text Editor. Font - Specifies a font for new text or changes the font of selected text. TrueType® fonts are listed by font family name. AutoCAD compiled shape (SHX) fonts are listed by the name of the file in which the fonts are stored. Custom fonts or third-party fonts are Prepared by: Yamanta Raj Niroula
214
An Introduction to AutoCAD
PENTASOFT
displayed in the editor with Autodesk-supplied proxy fonts. A sample drawing (truetype.dwg) showing each font is provided in the sample directory. Text Height - Sets the character height in drawing units for new text or changes the height of selected text. If the current text style has no fixed height, the text height is the value stored in the TEXTSIZE system variable. A multiline text object can contain characters of various heights. Bold - Turns on and off bold formatting for new or selected text. This option is available only for characters using TrueType fonts. Italic - Turns on and off italic formatting for new or selected text. This option is available only for characters using TrueType fonts. Underline - Turns on and off underlining for new or selected text. Undo - Undoes actions in the Multiline Text Editor, including changes to either text content or text formatting. You can also use CTRL + Z. Redo - Redoes actions in the Multiline Text Editor, including changes to either text content or text formatting. You can also use CTRL + Y. Stack - Creates stacked text, for example, fractions, if the selected text contains stack characters. Also, unstacks text if stacked text is selected. When the stack characters, carat (^), forward slash (/), and pound sign (#), are used, the text to the left of the stack character is stacked on top of the text to the right. By default, text that contains a carat converts to left-justified tolerance values. Text that contains the forward slash converts to center-justified fractional numbers; the slash is converted to a horizontal bar the length of the longer text string. Text that contains the pound sign converts to a fraction separated by a diagonal bar the height of the two text strings. The characters above the diagonal fraction bar are bottom-right aligned; the characters beneath the diagonal bar are top-left aligned. Text Color - Specifies a color for new text or changes the color of selected text. You can assign text the color associated with the layer it is on (BYLAYER) or the color of the block it is contained in (BYBLOCK). You can also select one of the colors in the color list or click Other to open the Select Color dialog box. Close - Closes the Multiline Text Editor and saves any changes that you made. You can also click in the drawing outside the editor to save changes and exit the editor. To close the Multiline Text Editor without saving changes, press ESC.
Working with Text Styles: All text in an AutoCAD drawing has a text style associated with it. When you enter text, AutoCAD uses the current text style, which sets the font, size, obliquing angle, orientation, and other text characteristics. If you want to create text using a different text style, you can make another text style current. The table shows the settings for the STANDARD text style.
Prepared by: Yamanta Raj Niroula
215
An Introduction to AutoCAD
PENTASOFT
Example: Default Text Style Settings Setting
Default
Description
Style name Font name Big Font
STANDARD txt.shx none
Height Width factor Obliquing angle Backwards Upside down Vertical
0 1 0
Name with up to 255 characters File associated with a font (character style) Special shape definition file used for a non-ASCII character set, such as Kanji Character height Expansion or compression of the characters Slant of the characters
No No No
Backwards text Upside-down text Vertical or horizontal text
The settings for the current text style are displayed at the prompts on the command line. You can use or modify the current text style or create and load a new text style. Once you' ve created a text style, you can modify its characteristics, change its name, or delete it when you no longer need it. Create and Modify Text Styles Except for the default STANDARD text style, you must create any text style that you want to use. Text style names can be up to 255 characters long. They can contain letters, numbers, and the special characters dollar sign ($), underscore (_), and hyphen (-). If you don' t enter a text style name, AutoCAD automatically names the text style Stylen, where n is a number that starts at 1. You can modify an existing text style in the Text Style dialog box by changing the settings. You can also update existing text of that text style to reflect the changes. Certain style settings affect multiline and single-line text objects differently. For example, changing the Upside Down and Backwards options has no effect on multiline text objects. Changing Width Factor and Obliquing has no effect on single-line text. If you rename an existing text style, any text using the old name assumes the new text style name. You can remove unreferenced text styles from your drawing with PURGE or by deleting the text styles from the Text Styles dialog box. The STANDARD text style cannot be removed.
Change Text Style When you change the text style of a multiline text object, the updated settings are applied to the entire object, and some formatting of individual characters might not be retained. The following table describes the effects of text style change on character formatting.
Prepared by: Yamanta Raj Niroula
216
An Introduction to AutoCAD
Formatting Bold Color Font Height Italic Stacking Underlining
PENTASOFT
Retained? No Yes No No No Yes Yes
The STYLE Command Creates, modifies, or sets named text styles AutoCAD provides one standard text style. If you want to create a new style or modify an existing style, use STYLE. STYLE also sets the current style used when you create text with TEXT and MTEXT. If you change the orientation or font file of an existing text style, all text objects with that style use the new values when the drawing is regenerated. If REGENAUTO is on, the change causes an automatic regeneration. You can use RENAME to change the name of an existing text style. If any existing text object uses the old style name, the text object takes the new name automatically.
Text toolbar: Format menu: Text Style Command: style
The Text Style dialog box is displayed. If you enter -style at the Command prompt, STYLE displays prompts on the command line. Text Style Dialog Box Creates, modifies, or sets named text styles.
Prepared by: Yamanta Raj Niroula
217
An Introduction to AutoCAD
PENTASOFT
Style Name Displays text style names, adds new styles, and renames and deletes existing styles. The list contains defined style names and displays the current style by default. To change the current style, select another style from the list, or choose New to create a new style. Style names can be up to 255 characters long. They can contain letters, numbers, and the special characters dollar sign ($), underscore (_), and hyphen (-). New - Displays the New Text Style dialog box and automatically supplies the name “stylen” (where n is the number of the supplied style) for the current settings. You can accept the default or enter a name and choose OK to apply the current style settings to the new style name. Rename - Displays the Rename Text Style dialog box. The text style listed is renamed when you enter a new name and choose OK. You can also use RENAME to change the name of an existing text style. If any existing text object uses the old style name, the text object takes the new name automatically. Delete - Deletes a text style. Select a name from the list to make it current, and then choose Delete. Font
Changes the style’s font.
Font Name - Lists the font family name for all registered TrueType fonts and all AutoCAD compiled shape (SHX) fonts in the AutoCAD Fonts folder. When you select a name from the list, AutoCAD reads the file for the specified font. The file’s character definitions are loaded automatically unless the file is already in use by another text style. You can define several styles that use the same font.
Prepared by: Yamanta Raj Niroula
218
An Introduction to AutoCAD
PENTASOFT
Font Style - Specifies font character formatting, such as italic, bold, or regular. When Use Big Font is selected, this option changes to Big Font Name and is used to select a Big Font file name. Height - Sets the text height based on the value you enter. If you enter 0.0, AutoCAD prompts for the text height each time you enter text using this style. Entering a height greater than 0.0 sets the text height for this style. TrueType fonts can be displayed at a smaller height than SHX fonts with the same height setting. Note - The text height you specify may not be accurately represented by uppercase letters in TrueType fonts supplied with AutoCAD. Use Big Font - Specifies an Asian-language Big Font file. Use Big Font is available only if you specify an SHX file under Font Name. Only SHX files are valid file types for creating Big Fonts. Effects Modifies characteristics of the font, such as its height, width factor, and obliquing angle and whether it is displayed upside down, backwards, or vertically aligned. Upside Down - Displays the characters upside down. Backwards - Displays the characters backwards. Vertical - Displays the characters aligned vertically. Vertical is available only if the selected font supports dual orientation. Vertical orientation is not available for TrueType fonts. Width Factor - Sets the character spacing. Entering a value less than 1.0 condenses the text. Entering a value greater than 1.0 expands it. Oblique Angle - Sets the obliquing angle of the text. Entering a value between –85 and 85 italicizes the text. Note - TrueType fonts using the effects described in this section might appear bold on the screen. Onscreen appearance has no effect on plotted output. Fonts are plotted as specified by applied character formatting. Preview Displays sample text that changes dynamically as you change fonts and modify the effects. To change the sample text, enter characters in the box below the character preview image. Preview Button Updates the sample text in the character preview image according to any changes you’ve made in the dialog box. Note - The preview image does not reflect the text height. Apply Applies style changes made in the dialog box to the text of the current style in the drawing.
Prepared by: Yamanta Raj Niroula
219
An Introduction to AutoCAD
PENTASOFT
Close Applies changes to the current style. Cancel changes to Close whenever a change is made to any of the options under Style Name. Changing, renaming, or deleting the current style and creating a new style are actions that take place immediately and cannot be canceled. Cancel Cancel changes to Close whenever a change is made to any of the options under Style Name.
Prepared by: Yamanta Raj Niroula
220
An Introduction to AutoCAD
PENTASOFT
Hatching Areas and Editing Hatches Hatching in AutoCAD is a way of filling in areas of your drawing with a preformatted pattern to represent certain materials. It is usually used in sectional views. Hatching enables the user to bring a higher level of visual interest to a drawing by embellishing a defined boundary with a pattern. This allows the user to focus an area of interest, to indicate the use of a particular material, or to differentiate between multiple boundaries formed in the drawing. Hatching is commonly used to place a repetitive pattern within a defined area, adding graphic detail to the drawing. For example, suppose you are working on a part that is composed of various materials and you want to illustrate graphically where those materials are used in the drawing. The easiest way to do this is with the boundary hatch command or BHatch. Command
Keystroke
Boundary Hatch
Bhatch / BH
Hatch Edit
HatchEdit / HE
Menu Draw
Hatch
Modify Object Hatch...
Result Covers an area with a predefined pattern Edits an existing Hatch
The BHATCH Command Fills an enclosed area or selected objects with a hatch pattern or gradient fill BHATCH first defines the boundaries of the area you want to hatch, either by computing a region or polyline boundary from a specified point within an enclosed area, or by using selected objects as boundaries. It then fills the boundaries with a hatch pattern or a solid color. BHATCH creates an associative hatch, which updates when its boundaries are modified, or a non-associative hatch, which is independent of its boundaries. You can preview any hatch and adjust the definition. Follow these steps to hatch with BHATCH command: 1. Define boundary: This can be done by picking internal points. Here, you pick a point inside the closed boundary that you want to hatch. AutoCAD detects the boundaries and the islands (the pockets inside another closed boundary) automatically. Alternatively, you can select objects by any standard object selection methods that form the boundary also. Make sure that the objects that you select form a closed boundary. 2. Specify pattern: AutoCAD comes with a library of standard hatch patterns. There is a hatch pattern for every commonly used material such as steel, concrete etc. You can choose the required pattern directly. If needed, you can define your own hatch pattern also. After you have selected the pattern, you can adjust the hatch parameters such as the density of the pattern and orientation angle to suit your drawing scale.
Prepared by: Yamanta Raj Niroula
221
An Introduction to AutoCAD
PENTASOFT
3. BHATCH command lets you preview your hatch pattern. This means, you can see how the AutoCAD is going to hatch your drawing based on your current selection before you actually finalize the hatching. Once you are convinced with your settings, you can apply the hatching finally. BHATCH first defines the boundaries of the area you want to hatch or fill, either by computing a region or polyline boundary from a specified point within an enclosed area, or by using selected objects as boundaries. It then fills the boundaries with a hatch pattern, a solid color, or a gradient. BHATCH creates an associative hatch or fill, which is updated when its boundaries are modified, or a non-associative hatch or fill, which is independent of its boundaries. You can preview any hatch or fill and adjust the definition. Due to the large number of combinations of geometry that you can hatch or fill, editing hatched or gradient-filled geometry can produce unexpected results. In this event, delete the object containing the hatch or fill and redo the hatch or fill. Note - By default, AutoCAD won’t create a hatch pattern that consists of over 10,000 segments. The limit is set by the MaxHatch setting in the registry. To reset the limit to 50,000, for example, enter (setenv "MaxHatch" "50000") at the Command prompt. The limit can be reset to any value between 100 and 10,000,000.
Draw toolbar: Draw menu: Hatch Command: bhatch
The Boundary Hatch and Fill dialog box is displayed. If you enter -bhatch at the Command prompt, BHATCH displays prompts on the command line. Boundary Hatch and Fill Dialog Box Defines the boundary, pattern type, pattern properties, and attributes for hatch and gradient fill objects. The Boundary Hatch and Fill dialog box includes the following tabs: Pick Points Determines a boundary from existing objects visible on the screen. The objects must form an enclosed area. How AutoCAD detects objects using this option depends on which island detection method is selected on the Advanced tab. For example, if the island detection method is Flood, AutoCAD detects objects within the outermost boundary as islands and includes them in the boundary definition. The island detection style (which you also set on the Advanced tab) then determines how to hatch the detected islands. When you select Pick Points, the dialog box closes temporarily, and AutoCAD displays a prompt. Select internal point: Specify a point within the area to be hatched or filled
Prepared by: Yamanta Raj Niroula
222
An Introduction to AutoCAD
PENTASOFT
Select internal point: Specify a point, enter u or undo to undo the last selection, or press ENTER to end point specification and return to the dialog box
While specifying points, you can right-click in the drawing area at any time to display a shortcut menu. You can undo the last or all point specifications, change the selection method, change the island detection style, or preview the hatch or gradient fill.
Select Objects Specifies objects for hatching or filling. The dialog box closes temporarily, and AutoCAD prompts you to select objects.
When you use the Select Objects option, AutoCAD does not detect interior objects automatically. You must select the objects within the selected boundary to hatch or fill those objects according to the current Island Detection Style (which you set on the Advanced tab).
Each time you choose Select Objects, AutoCAD clears the previous selection set.
Prepared by: Yamanta Raj Niroula
223
An Introduction to AutoCAD
PENTASOFT
While selecting objects, you can right-click at any time in the drawing area to display a shortcut menu. You can undo the last selection or all selections, change the selection method, change the island detection style, or preview the hatch or gradient fill. Remove Islands Removes from the boundary definition any of the objects that AutoCAD detects as islands when you use the Pick Points option. You cannot remove the outer boundary.
View Selections Temporarily dismisses the dialog box and displays the currently defined boundaries with the hatch or fill settings that you last previewed. This option is unavailable when no boundary has been defined.
Inherit Properties Hatches or fills specified boundaries using the hatch or fill properties of one object. After selecting the associative hatch or fill object whose properties you want the hatch or fill to inherit, you can right-click in the drawing area and use the shortcut menu to toggle between the Select Objects and Pick Points options to create boundaries. Double For user-defined patterns, draws a second set of lines positioned at 90 degrees to the original lines, creating a crosshatch. AutoCAD stores this information in the HPDOUBLE system variable. This option is available only if you set Type to User Defined on the Hatch tab. This option is not available for gradient fills. Composition Controls whether the hatch or gradient fill is associative or non-associative. Associative - Creates a hatch or fill that is updated when you modify its boundaries. Non-associative - Creates a hatch or fill that is independent of its boundaries.
Prepared by: Yamanta Raj Niroula
224
An Introduction to AutoCAD
PENTASOFT
Preview Temporarily dismisses the dialog box and displays the currently defined boundaries with the current hatch or fill settings. This option is not available when you have not yet specified points or selected objects to define your boundaries. HatchTab (Boundary Hatch and Fill Dialog Box) Defines the appearance of the hatch pattern to be applied.
Type Sets the pattern type. Predefined - Specifies a predefined AutoCAD pattern. These patterns are stored in the acad.pat and acadiso.pat files. You can control the angle and scale of any predefined pattern. For predefined ISO patterns, you can also control the ISO pen width. Note - When you use the Solid predefined pattern, the boundary must be closed and must not intersect itself. In addition, if the hatch area contains more than one loop, the loops must not intersect. These limitations do not apply to standard hatch patterns. User Defined - Creates a pattern of lines based on the current linetype in your drawing. You can control the angle and spacing of the lines in your user-defined pattern. Custom - Specifies a pattern that is defined in any custom PAT file that you have added to the AutoCAD search path. (To use the patterns in the supplied acad.pat and
Prepared by: Yamanta Raj Niroula
225
An Introduction to AutoCAD
PENTASOFT
acadiso.pat files, choose Predefined.) You can control the angle and scale of any custom pattern. Pattern Lists the available predefined patterns. The six most recently used predefined patterns appear at the top of the list. AutoCAD stores the selected pattern in the HPNAME system variable. The Pattern option is available only if you set Type to Predefined. The [...] button displays the Hatch Pattern Palette dialog box (discussed later), in which you can view preview images for all predefined patterns at once to help you make a selection. Swatch Displays a preview of the selected pattern. You can click the swatch to display the Hatch Pattern Palette dialog box (see page 116). When the SOLID pattern is selected, you can click the right arrow to display a list of colors or the Select Color dialog box. Custom Pattern Lists the available custom patterns. The six most recently used custom patterns appear at the top of the list. AutoCAD stores the selected pattern in the HPNAME system variable. The Custom Pattern option is available only if you set Type to Custom. The [...] button displays the Hatch Pattern Palette dialog box, in which you can view preview images for all custom patterns at once to help you make a selection. Angle Specifies an angle for the hatch pattern relative to the X axis of the current UCS. AutoCAD stores the angle in the HPANG system variable. Scale Expands or contracts a predefined or custom pattern. AutoCAD stores the scale in the HPSCALE system variable. This option is available only if you set Type to Predefined or Custom. Relative to Paper Space Scales the hatch pattern relative to paper space units. Using this option, you can easily display hatch patterns at a scale that is appropriate for your layout. This option is available only from a layout. Spacing Specifies the spacing of lines in a user-defined pattern. AutoCAD stores the spacing in the HPSPACE system variable. This option is available only if you set Type to User Defined.
Prepared by: Yamanta Raj Niroula
226
An Introduction to AutoCAD
PENTASOFT
ISO Pen Width Scales an ISO predefined pattern based on the selected pen width. This option is available only if you set Type to Predefined and set Pattern to one of the available ISO patterns. Advanced Tab (Boundary Hatch and Fill Dialog Box) Defines how AutoCAD creates and hatches or fills boundaries.
Island Detection Style Specifies the method used to hatch or fill objects within the outermost boundary. If no internal boundaries exist, specifying an island detection style has no effect. Because you can define a precise set of boundaries, it’s often best to use the Normal style. Normal - Hatches or fills inward from the outer boundary. If AutoCAD encounters an internal intersection, it turns off hatching or filling until it encounters another intersection. Thus, areas separated from the outside of the hatched or filled area by an odd number of intersections are hatched or filled, and areas separated by an even number of intersections are not. You can also set the Normal style by adding ,N to the pattern name in the HPNAME system variable. Outer -Hatches or fills inward from the outer boundary. AutoCAD turns hatching or filling off if it encounters an internal intersection. Because this process starts from both ends of each hatch or fill line, AutoCAD hatches or fills only the outermost level of the structure and leaves the internal structure blank. You can also set the Outer style by adding ,O to the pattern name in the HPNAME system variable. . Prepared by: Yamanta Raj Niroula
227
An Introduction to AutoCAD
PENTASOFT
Ignore - Ignores all internal objects and hatches or fills through them. You can also set the Ignore style by adding ,I to the pattern name in the HPNAME system variable.
Normal
Outer
Ignore
Note - Hatching concave curves with the Outer and Ignore styles can cause hatching discrepancies. The Normal, Outer, and Ignore options are also available from a shortcut menu by right-clicking in the drawing area while you specify points or select objects to define your boundaries. Object Type Specifies whether to retain boundaries as objects, and the object type that AutoCAD applies to those objects. Retain Boundaries - Adds the temporary boundary objects to the drawing. Object Type - Controls the type of the new boundary object. AutoCAD creates the boundary as a region or a polyline. This option is available only if you select Retain Boundaries. Boundary Set Defines the set of objects AutoCAD analyzes when defining a boundary from a specified point. The selected boundary set has no effect when you use Select Objects to define a boundary. By default, when you use Pick Points to define a boundary, AutoCAD analyzes all objects visible in the current viewport. By redefining the boundary set, you can disregard certain objects when defining boundaries without having to hide or remove those objects. For large drawings, redefining the boundary set can also produce the boundary faster because AutoCAD examines fewer objects. Current Viewport - Defines the boundary set from everything visible in the current viewport. Selecting this option discards any current boundary set and uses everything visible in the current viewport.
Prepared by: Yamanta Raj Niroula
228
An Introduction to AutoCAD
PENTASOFT
Existing Set - Defines the boundary set from the objects that you selected with New. If you have not created a boundary set with New, the Existing Set option is not available. New - Prompts you to select the objects that define the boundary set. AutoCAD includes only the hatchable or fillable objects you select when it constructs the new boundary set. AutoCAD discards any existing boundary set, replacing it with the new boundary set defined by the objects you select. If you don’t select any objects, AutoCAD retains any current set. Until you exit BHATCH or create a new boundary set, AutoCAD ignores objects that do not exist in the boundary set when you define your boundaries by using Pick Points. Island Detection Method Specifies whether to include objects within the outermost boundary as boundary objects. These internal objects are known as islands. Flood - Includes islands as boundary objects. Ray Casting - Runs a line from the point you specify to the nearest object and then traces the boundary in a counterclockwise direction, thus excluding islands as boundary objects. Gradient Tab (Boundary Hatch and Fill Dialog Box) Defines the appearance of the gradient fill to be applied.
Prepared by: Yamanta Raj Niroula
229
An Introduction to AutoCAD
PENTASOFT
One Color Specifies a fill that uses a smooth transition between darker shades and lighter tints of one color. When One Color is selected, AutoCAD displays a color swatch with Browse button and a Shade and Tint slider. (GFCLRSTATE system variable) Two Color Specifies a fill that uses a smooth transition between two colors. When Two Color is selected, AutoCAD displays a color swatch with a Browse button for color 1 and for color 2. (GFCLRSTATE system variable) Color Swatch Specifies the color for the gradient fill. Click the Browse button [...] to display the Select Color dialog box, where you can select an AutoCAD Index color, true color, or color book color. The default color displayed is the current color in the drawing. Shade and Tint Slider Specifies the tint (the selected color mixed with white) or shade (the selected color mixed with black) of a color to be used for a gradient fill of one color. (GFCLRLUM system variable) Centered Specifies a gradient configuration that is symmetrical. If this option is not selected, the gradient fill is shifted up and to the left, creating the illusion of a light source to the left of the object. (GFSHIFT system variable) Angle Specifies the angle of the gradient fill. The specified angle is relative to the current UCS. This option is independent of the angle specified for hatch patterns. (GFANG system variable) Gradient Patterns Displays nine fixed patterns for gradient fills. These patterns include linear sweep, spherical, and parabolic. (GFNAME system variable)
Advanced Hatch Options Choosing the Advanced tab gives options to define how AutoCAD will hatch the selected boundary and how you want to retain the boundary used to determine the hatch. Essentially, there are three different ways to define a hatch boundary. You can select the boundary itself (if the boundary is polyline or a region), have AutoCAD determine the boundary for you, or select points to make up a boundary called the direct hatch option.
Prepared by: Yamanta Raj Niroula
230
An Introduction to AutoCAD
PENTASOFT
The Direct Hatch Option: Use the direct hatch option to specifically place a hatch pattern into an area where the first two options will not work. These instances might occur when the hatch boundary is not closed or when the objects you want to use to define the boundary do not form a closed boundary. Here are the steps used to place a hatch pattern using the direct hatch option by selecting points in the drawing: 1. Start the hatch command by typing the command at the command line, which displays the following prompt: Enter a pattern name or [?/Solid/User defined] :
2. Type the name of the pattern you want to use and press Enter. 3. Specify the hatch scale and angle by using Scale and Angle at the corresponding prompts. 4. At the following prompt, press Enter to activate the direct hatch option: Select object to define hatch boundary or , Select objects:
5. The direct hatch option enables you to create a polyline that defines the hatch boundary. First, AutoCAD will p-prompt you to retain the polyline boundary: Retain polyline boundary? [Yes/No] :
6. Answer the prompt to view the direct hatch polyline options: Specify next point or [Arc/Close/Length/Undo]:
7. Choose an option or pick points in the drawing to determine the extent of the hatch boundary. After closing the polyline boundary with the Close option, AutoCAD will prompt you to place another boundary or to apply the hatch.
Editing a Hatch Pattern: After you have created a hatch, you can edit it with HATCHEDIT or explode it into composite lines using the explode command. Command: _hatchedit Select associative hatch object:
The Hatch Edit dialog box appears with the parameters of the hatch object that you selected. From here you can change the type, pattern, angle, scale and composition of the hatch object. Change the parameters as required.
Prepared by: Yamanta Raj Niroula
231
An Introduction to AutoCAD
PENTASOFT
Another quick way to edit a hatch pattern is to use the Properties window. This window gives you access to all the Hatch properties, making it easy to edit an existing hatch pattern. EXPLODE command breaks compound objects into its component objects. Select Explode from Modify or enter EXPLODE. AutoCAD prompts: Select objects: Select the objects to explode
Creating Your Own Hatch Pattern: It can be a rather elaborate process to create your own hatch patterns, adding to the 67 hatch patterns provided in AutoCAD. Hatch patterns are defined in an external file called acad.pat. This file contains the definitions of all the hatch patterns used in AutoCAD. To modify this file, you will need to open it with a text editor, such as Windows NotePad. Here is the definition for the CROSS hatch pattern: *CROSS, A series of crosses 0, 0,0, .25,.25, .125,-.375 90, .0625,-.0625, .25,.25, .125,-.375
You can see that three sentences of text make up the hatch pattern, and each line depicts what is called a line family. Each line family in a pattern definition can contain up to 80 characters, and blank lines are ignored within the pattern definition. The first line family defines the name and description of the pattern, and the next two line families represent an actual line in the pattern. The first line family describes the horizontal portion of the pattern and the second defines the vertical portion. Each line family consists of four numbers or coordinates, each separated by a space. The fist coordinate value, 0.25, defines the angle of the first line in the hatch pattern. The next coordinate defines the origin of the first line family, which is used to reference other line families that make up the entire pattern. The following set of coordinates represents the spacing of the line family. The first coordinate value, or deltax, defines the spacing in the direction of the hatch. Delta-y, or the second value in this coordinate, indicates the perpendicular spacing, or the spacing between the line families of this hatch pattern. The last value denotes the actual line that draws the hatch pattern. The positive value represents the length of the line, and the negative value indicates the spacing between the line segments drawn. Note that both of these line families repeat the spacing and line values after specifying their angle and origin.
The Super Hatch Command: The Express Tools, which enhance a multitude of functions in AutoCAD, also contain a tool called Super Hatch. This command makes the process of creating custom hatch patterns simpler by using images, blocks, wblocks, externally referenced files, or an object called a wipeout as the hatch pattern. It also makes the process of creating a new hatch pattern simpler by using objects in the drawing or actual raster images to create the hatch. This allows you to avoid typing alphanumeric code to define the appearance of a
Prepared by: Yamanta Raj Niroula
232
An Introduction to AutoCAD
PENTASOFT
hatch pattern. The hatch pattern can be defined graphically, which is much easier to do and better-looking if you have an image that resembles the pattern you want to use. This tool can be launched by selecting the Super Hatch command from the Bonus toolbar or by choosing the Super Hatch option from the Express pull-down menu.
Prepared by: Yamanta Raj Niroula
233
An Introduction to AutoCAD
PENTASOFT
Dimensioning Dimensioning Basics Dimensioning is the process of adding measurement annotation to a drawing. AutoCAD provides many ways to dimension objects and many ways to format dimensions. You can create dimensions for a wide variety of object shapes in many different orientations. You can create dimension styles to format dimensions quickly and ensure that dimensions in your drawing conform to industry or project standards. Dimensions show the measurements of objects, the distances or angles between objects, or the distance of a feature from an origin you specify. AutoCAD® provides three basic types of dimensioning: linear, radial, and angular. Dimensions can be horizontal, vertical, aligned, rotated, ordinate, baseline, or continued. Some simple examples are shown in the illustration.
You can dimension objects, such as lines, arcs, circles, and polyline segments, or you can dimension between point locations. AutoCAD places dimensions on the current layer. Every dimension assumes the current dimension style, which controls characteristics such as arrowhead style, text location, and lateral tolerances. With dimension styles, you can make subtle modifications to a base dimension style for different types of dimensions. With dimension style overrides, you can modify these characteristics for a specific dimension. You can use Quick Dimension (QDIM) to dimension multiple objects at one time or edit existing dimensions. However, dimensions created with this method are nonassociative. Non-associative dimensions do not automatically update as the objects that are dimensioned are modified.. There are lots of dimension commands which include facilities for indicating tolerances and alternate units dimensioning. However, this tutorial aims to cover the most common commands for general use and constitutes an introduction to dimensioning with
Prepared by: Yamanta Raj Niroula
234
An Introduction to AutoCAD
PENTASOFT
AutoCAD. If you would like to learn more about dimensions, refer to the AutoCAD user manual. AutoCAD divides dimensions into four main categories: Linear, Radial, Ordinate and Angular. For the purposes of this tutorial we will only consider some of the commands within the Linear, Radial and Angular categories. When you create dimensions, AutoCAD automatically creates a new layer called "Defpoints". This is a special layer which cannot be deleted or renamed. AutoCAD uses this layer to store dimension information and you can effectively ignore it. When working with dimensions it is very important that line origins are picked accurately so that the resulting measurement and text are correct. Always use an Osnap to pick dimension line origins. If you have a lot of dimensioning work to do, it will be worth using a running Osnap. Running object snaps are set using the Osnap Settings dialogue box. To display this dialogue box type DDOSNAP at the keyboard or select Tools/Object Snap Settings from the Pull-down menu. There is also a keyboard short-cut; you can display the Osnap Settings dialogue box simply by hitting the F3 key.
Parts of a Dimension Dimensions have several distinct elements: dimension text, dimension lines, arrowheads, and extension lines.
Dimension text is a text string that usually indicates the measurement value. The text can also include prefixes, suffixes, and tolerances. A dimension line indicates the direction and extent of a dimension. For angular dimensions, the dimension line is an arc. Arrowheads, also called symbols of termination, are displayed at each end of the dimension line. You can specify different sizes and shapes for arrowheads or tick marks. Extension lines, also called projection lines or witness lines, extend from the feature to the dimension line. A center mark is a small cross that marks the center of a circle or arc. Prepared by: Yamanta Raj Niroula
235
An Introduction to AutoCAD
PENTASOFT
Centerlines are broken lines that mark the center of a circle or arc.
Associative Dimensions Dimension associativity defines the relationship between geometric objects and the dimensions that give their distance and angles. AutoCAD provides three types of associativity between geometric objects and dimensions. •
• •
Associative dimensions. Automatically adjust their locations, orientations, and measurement values when the geometric objects associated with them are modified. Dimensions in a layout may be associated to objects in model space. The DIMASSOC system variable is set to 2. Non-associative dimensions. Selected and modified with the geometry they measure. Non-associative dimensions do not change when the geometric objects they measure are modified. The dimension variable DIMASSOC is set to 1. Exploded dimensions. Contain a collection of separate objects rather than a single dimension object. The DIMASSOC system variable is set to 0.
You can determine whether a dimension is associative or non-associative by doing one of the following: • Select the dimension and use the Properties palette to display the properties of the dimension. • Use the LIST command to display the properties of the dimension. You can also use the Quick Select dialog box to filter the selection of associative or nonassociative dimensions. A dimension is considered associative even if only one end of the dimension is associated with a geometric object. The DIMREASSOCIATE command displays the associative and non-associative elements of a dimension. Special Situations and Limitations You may need to use DIMREGEN to update associative dimensions after panning or zooming with a wheel mouse, after opening a drawing that was modified with an earlier release, or after opening a drawing with external references that have been modified. Although associative dimensions support most object types that you would expect to dimension, they do not support multiline objects or objects with nonzero thickness.
Prepared by: Yamanta Raj Niroula
236
An Introduction to AutoCAD
PENTASOFT
When selecting objects to dimension, make sure that the objects that you select don’t include a directly overlapping object that does not support associative dimensioning. An example of the latter would be a 2D solid. Associativity is not maintained between a dimension and a block reference if the block is redefined. Associativity is not maintained between a dimension and a 3D solid if the shape of the 3D solid is modified. Dimensions created with QDIM are not associative but may be associated individually with DIMREASSOCIATE. Note - In releases prior to AutoCAD 2002, the definitions of associative and nonassociative dimensions were different and were controlled by the DIMASO system variable. The behavior of dimensions is now controlled by the DIMASSOC system variable. For information about changing the associativity property for dimension objects, see “Change Dimension Associativity” on page 555. To change the dimension associativity default • • • •
From the Tools menu, choose Options. In the Options dialog box, choose the User Preferences tab. Under Associative Dimensioning, select or clear Make New Dimensions Associative. Do either or both of the following: 1. Choose Apply to record the current Options settings in the system registry. 2. Choose OK to record the current Options settings in the system registry and close the Options dialog box. All subsequently created dimensions in the drawing use the new setting. Unlike most other option settings, dimension associativity is saved in the drawing file rather than in the system registry.
Command: OPTIONS
Linear Dimensions You can create linear dimensions with horizontal, vertical, and aligned dimension lines. These linear dimensions can also be stacked or they can be created end to end. Linear dimensions can be horizontal, vertical, or aligned. With aligned dimensions, the dimension line is parallel to the line (imaginary or real) between the extension line origins. Baseline (or parallel) and continued (or chain) dimensions are series of consecutive dimensions that are based on a linear dimension. In all four illustrations, the extension line origins are designated explicitly at 1 and 2, respectively. The dimension line location is specified at 3.
Prepared by: Yamanta Raj Niroula
237
An Introduction to AutoCAD
PENTASOFT
As you create linear dimensions, you can modify the content of the text, the angle of the text, or the angle of the dimension line. AutoCAD automatically applies a horizontal or vertical dimension according to the extension line origins that you specify or the location where you select an object. However, you can override this as you create the dimension by specifying that a dimension be horizontal or vertical. For example, in the following illustration, a horizontal dimension is drawn by default unless you specify a vertical one.
The DIMLINEAR Command Creates linear dimensions
Dimension toolbar: Dimension menu: Linear Command: dimlinear Specify first extension line origin or : Specify a point or press ENTER to select an object to dimension
Prepared by: Yamanta Raj Niroula
238
An Introduction to AutoCAD
PENTASOFT
After you specify the extension line origin points or the object to dimension, the following prompt is displayed: Specify dimension line location or [Mtext/Text/Angle/Horizontal/Vertical/Rotated]: Specify a point or enter an option
First Extension Line Origin Prompts for the origin point of the second extension line after you specify the origin point of the first. Specify second extension line origin: Specify a point (2)
Dimension Line Location Uses the point you specify to locate the dimension line and determines the direction to draw the extension lines. After you specify the location, AutoCAD draws the dimension. Mtext Displays the Multiline Text Editor, which you can use to edit the dimension text. AutoCAD represents the generated measurement with angle brackets (< >). To add a prefix or a suffix to the generated measurement, enter the prefix or suffix before or after the angle brackets. Use control codes and Unicode character strings to enter special characters or symbols. To edit or replace the generated measurement, delete the angle brackets, enter the new dimension text, and then choose OK. If alternate units are not turned on in the dimension style, you can display them by entering square brackets ([ ]). For more information about formatting dimension text. The current dimension style determines the appearance of the generated measurements. Text Customizes the dimension text on the command line. AutoCAD displays the generated dimension measurement within angle brackets. Enter dimension text :
Enter the dimension text, or press ENTER to accept the generated measurement. To include the generated measurement, use angle brackets (< >) to represent the generated measurement. If alternate units are not turned on in the dimension style, you can display alternate units by entering square brackets ([ ]).
Prepared by: Yamanta Raj Niroula
239
An Introduction to AutoCAD
PENTASOFT
Dimension text properties are set on the Text tab of the New, Modify, and Override Dimension Style dialog boxes. Angle Changes the angle of the dimension text. Specify angle of dimension text:
Enter an angle. For example, to rotate the text 90 degrees, enter 90.
Horizontal Creates horizontal linear dimensions. Specify dimension line location or [Mtext/Text/Angle]: Specify a point or enter an option
Dimension Line Location - Uses the point you specify to locate the dimension line. After you specify the location, AutoCAD draws the dimension. Mtext, Text, Angle - These text editing and formatting options are identical in all dimension commands. See the option descriptions provided earlier in this command. Vertical Creates vertical linear dimensions. Specify dimension line location or [Mtext/Text/Angle]: Specify a point or enter an option
Dimension Line Location - Uses the point you specify to locate the dimension line. After you specify the location, AutoCAD draws the dimension. Mtext, Text, Angle - These text editing and formatting options are identical in all dimension commands. See the option descriptions provided earlier in this command. Rotated Creates rotated linear dimensions. Specify angle of dimension line : Specify an angle or press ENTER
Prepared by: Yamanta Raj Niroula
240
An Introduction to AutoCAD
PENTASOFT
Object Selection Automatically determines the origin points of the first and second extension lines after you select an object. Select object to dimension:
For polylines and other explodable objects, AutoCAD dimensions only the individual line and arc segments. You cannot select objects in a nonuniformly scaled block reference. If you select a line or an arc, AutoCAD uses the line or arc endpoints as the origins of the extension lines. The extension lines are offset from the endpoints by the distance you specify in Offset from Origin in the Lines and Arrows tab of the New, Modify, and Override Dimension Style dialog boxes. See DIMSTYLE. AutoCAD stores this value in the DIMEXO system variable. If you select a circle, AutoCAD uses the diameter endpoints as the origins of the extension line. When the point used to select the circle is close to the north or south quadrant point, AutoCAD draws a horizontal dimension. When the point used to select the circle is close to the east or west quadrant point, AutoCAD draws a vertical dimension. You can use this command to generate horizontal and vertical dimensions. Creating a linear dimension is easy. All you have to do is start the command, specify the two points between which you want the dimension to be drawn and pick a point to fix the position of the dimension line. Consider the diagram (right) whilst working through the following examples.
The DIMALIGNED Command Creates an aligned linear dimension Dimension toolbar: Dimension menu: Aligned Command: dimaligned Specify first extension line origin or : Specify a point for manual extension lines, or press ENTER for automatic extension lines
After you specify either manual or automatic extension lines, the following prompt is displayed: Specify dimension line location or [Mtext/Text/Angle]: Specify a point or enter an option
Extension Line Origin Specifies the first extension line origin (1). AutoCAD prompts you to specify the second one. Specify second extension line origin: Specify a point (2)
Prepared by: Yamanta Raj Niroula
241
An Introduction to AutoCAD
PENTASOFT
Object Selection Automatically determines the origin points of the first and second extension lines after you select an object. Select object to dimension:
For polylines and other explodable objects, only the individual line and arc segments are dimensioned. You cannot select objects in a nonuniformly scaled block reference. If you select a line or an arc, its endpoints are used as the origins of the extension lines. The extension lines are offset from the endpoints by the distance specified in Offset from Origin on the Lines and Arrows tab of the New, Modify, and Override Dimension Style dialog boxes. AutoCAD stores this value in the DIMEXO system variable.
If you select a circle, the endpoints of its diameter are used as the origins of the extension line. The point used to select the circle defines the origin of the first extension line. Dimension Line Location Specifies the placement of the dimension line and determines the direction to draw the extension lines. After you specify the location, the DIMALIGNED command ends. Mtext Displays the Multiline Text Editor, which you can use to edit the dimension text. AutoCAD represents the generated measurement with angle brackets (< >). To add a prefix or a suffix to the generated measurement, enter the prefix or suffix before or after Prepared by: Yamanta Raj Niroula
242
An Introduction to AutoCAD
PENTASOFT
the angle brackets. Use control codes and Unicode character strings to enter special characters or symbols. To edit or replace the generated measurement, delete the angle brackets, enter the new dimension text, and then choose OK. If alternate units are not turned on in the dimension style, you can display them by entering square brackets ([ ]). The current dimension style determines the appearance of the generated measurements. Text Customizes the dimension text at the command line. AutoCAD displays the generated dimension measurement within angle brackets. Enter dimension text :
Enter the dimension text, or press ENTER to accept the generated measurement. To include the generated measurement, use angle brackets (< >) to represent the generated measurement. If alternate units are not turned on in the dimension style, you can display alternate units by entering square brackets ([ ]). Dimension text properties are set on the Text tab of the New, Modify, and Override Dimension Style dialog boxes. Angle Changes the angle of the dimension text. Specify angle of dimension text:
Enter an angle. For example, to rotate the text 45 degrees, enter 45. After you specify the angle, AutoCAD redisplays the Dimension Line Location prompt.
Baseline and Continued Dimensions Baseline dimensions are multiple dimensions measured from the same base- line. Continued dimensions are multiple dimensions placed end to end. You must create a linear, aligned, or angular dimension before you create baseline or continued dimensions. You create baseline dimensions incrementally from the most recently created dimension in the current session.
Prepared by: Yamanta Raj Niroula
243
An Introduction to AutoCAD
PENTASOFT
Both baseline and continued dimensions are measured from the previous extension line unless you specify another point as the point of origin.
The DIMCONTINUE Command Creates a linear, angular, or ordinate dimension from the second extension line of the previous dimension or a selected dimension DIMCONTINUE draws a series of related dimensions, such as several shorter dimensions that add up to the total measurement. Continued dimensioning is also known as chain dimensioning. When you create linear continued dimensions, the first extension line is suppressed and the placement of text and arrowheads might include a leader line. These appear as overrides for the continued dimension (the DIMSE1 system variable is on, and the DIMTMOVE system variable is 1). Dimension toolbar: Dimension menu: Continue Command: dimcontinue
If no dimension was created in the current session, AutoCAD prompts you to select a linear, ordinate, or angular dimension to use as the base for the continued dimension. Select continued dimension
dimension:
Select
a
linear,
ordinate,
or
angular
Otherwise, AutoCAD skips this prompt and uses the dimension object that was last created in the current session. If the base dimension is linear or angular, the following prompt is displayed: Specify a second extension line origin or [Undo/Select] : Specify a point, enter an option, or press ENTER to select a base dimension
If the base dimension is ordinate, the following prompt is displayed: Specify feature location or [Undo/Select] :
To end the command, press ENTER twice, or press ESC. The current dimension style determines the appearance of the text.
Prepared by: Yamanta Raj Niroula
244
An Introduction to AutoCAD
PENTASOFT
Second Extension Line Origin Uses the second extension line origin of the continued dimension for the first extension line origin of the next dimension. The current dimension style determines the appearance of the text. After you select a continued dimension, AutoCAD redisplays the Specify a prompt. To end the command, press ESC. To select another linear, ordinate, or angular dimension to use as the basis for the continued dimension, press ENTER.
Second Extension Line Origin
Select continued dimension
dimension:
Select
a
linear,
ordinate,
or
angular
Select a base dimension, or press ESC to end the command. Feature Location Uses the endpoint of the base dimension as the endpoint for the continued dimension; you are prompted for the next feature location. When you select a feature location, AutoCAD draws the continued dimension and redisplays the Specify Feature Location prompt. To end the command, press ESC. To select another linear, ordinate, or angular dimension to use as the basis for the continued dimension, press ENTER. Select continued dimension
dimension:
Select
a
linear,
ordinate,
or
angular
Select a base dimension, or press ESC to end the command. Undo Undoes the last continued dimension entered during the command session. Select Prompts you to select a linear, ordinate, or angular dimension to use as the continued dimension. After you select a continued dimension, AutoCAD redisplays the Specify a Second Extension Line Origin prompt or the Specify Feature Location prompt. To end the command, press ESC.
The DIMBASELINE Command Creates a linear, angular, or ordinate dimension from the baseline of the previous dimension or a selected dimension DIMBASELINE creates a series of related dimensions measured from the same baseline. AutoCAD uses a baseline increment value to offset each new dimension line and to avoid overlaying the previous dimension line. The baseline increment value is specified in Baseline Spacing on the Lines and Arrows tab of the New, Modify, and Override Dimension Style dialog boxes. AutoCAD stores this value in the DIMDLI system variable. Baseline dimensioning is also called parallel dimensioning.
Prepared by: Yamanta Raj Niroula
245
An Introduction to AutoCAD
PENTASOFT
Dimension toolbar: Dimension menu: Baseline Command: dimbaseline
If no dimension was created in the current session, AutoCAD prompts you to select a linear, ordinate, or angular dimension to use as the base for the baseline dimension. Select base dimension: Select a linear, ordinate, or angular dimension
Otherwise, AutoCAD skips this prompt and uses the dimension object that was last created in the current session. If the base dimension is linear or angular, the following prompt is displayed: Specify a second extension line origin or [Undo/Select] : Specify a point, enter an option, or press ENTER to select a base dimension
If the base dimension is ordinate, the following prompt is displayed: Specify feature location or [Undo/Select] :
To end the command, press ENTER twice, or press ESC. The current dimension style determines the appearance of the text. Second Extension Line Origin By default, AutoCAD uses the first extension line of the base dimension as the extension line origin for the baseline dimension. To override this default behavior, explicitly select the base dimension; the extension line origin becomes the extension line of the base dimension closest to the pick point of the selection. When you select a second point, AutoCAD draws the baseline dimension and redisplays the Specify a Second Extension Line Origin prompt. To end the command, press ESC. To select another linear, ordinate, or angular dimension to use as the basis for the baseline dimension, press ENTER. Select base dimension: Select a linear, ordinate, or angular dimension
Select a base dimension, or press ESC to end the command.
Prepared by: Yamanta Raj Niroula
246
An Introduction to AutoCAD
PENTASOFT
Feature Location Uses the endpoint of the base dimension as the endpoint for the baseline dimension; you are prompted for the next feature location. When you select a feature location, AutoCAD draws the baseline dimension and redisplays the Specify Feature Location prompt. To end the command, press ESC. To select another linear, ordinate, or angular dimension to use as the basis for the baseline dimension, press ENTER. Select base dimension: Select a linear, ordinate, or angular dimension
Select a base dimension, or press ESC to end the command. Undo Undoes the last baseline dimension entered during this command session. angular baseline dimensioning linear baseline dimensioning Select Prompts you to select a linear, ordinate, or angular dimension to use as the base for the baseline dimension. After you select a base dimension, AutoCAD redisplays the Specify Second Extension Line Origin prompt or the Specify Feature Location prompt.
Changing the Text You may have noticed that when you are prompted to pick the dimension line location you are also offered a number of options. The options vary depending upon the particular command that you are using. However, the Mtext and Text options, which are common to all dimension commands are particularly useful. Essentially they do the same thing, they allow you to change the text which will appear on the dimension line. The Text option allows you to enter a single line of text and the Mtext option starts the MTEXT command and enables you to add formatted, multiline text to the dimension. These options can be used to add descriptions to your dimensions or to modify the measured distance. The Mtext option can be used to create a multi-line annotation. When you use this option you will notice that the Multiline Text Editor dialogue already has some text in the text window. This is the measured dimension and is displayed as "<>". If you delete this marker the dimension measurement will not appear in the annotation. If you need to edit dimension text after the dimension is drawn, you can use the DDEDIT command, Modify/Object/Text… from the pull-down. If you select a dimension, the Multiline Text Editor will appear and you can make any necessary changes to the annotation. The illustration on the right shows an extract from the Multiline Text Editor as it would appear if the dimension above were selected.
Radial Dimensions Radial dimensions measure the radii and diameters of arcs and circles with Prepared by: Yamanta Raj Niroula
247
An Introduction to AutoCAD
PENTASOFT
optional centerlines or a center mark. If Text Placement is set to Over the Dimension Line, with a leader, the dimension is applied with a leader line. Center marks and lines apply only to diameter and radius dimensions. They are drawn only if the dimension line is placed outside the circle or arc.
The size of the centerline refers to the length of the centerline segments extending from the center mark. There are two main radial dimension commands, DIMDIAMETER and DIMRADIUS. Both commands result in a similar looking dimension so AutoCAD automatically inserts a "R" to indicate a radius and the dimension symbol to indicate a dimension. You can get AutoCAD to display the dimension symbol by including "%%c" in any text string. For example, in order to draw the 40mm diameter text as it is shown in the illustration on the right, you would need to type "%%c40mm". You can use this special character with any of the text commands. The Diameter and Radius commands are supplemented by the DIMCENTER command which can be used to add a center mark to any circle or arc. The DIMDIAMETER and DIMRADIUS commands do not automatically draw a center mark. By convention it is usual to dimension full circles using a diameter and arcs (partial circles) using radius.
The DIMDIAMETER Command Creates diameter dimensions for circles and arcs DIMDIAMETER draws different types of diameter dimensions depending on the size of the circle or arc, the options set for the dimension style, and the position of the cursor. The dimension style controls center marks and centerlines. AutoCAD does not draw a center mark or a centerline when a dimension line is drawn inside the arc or circle. AutoCAD stores the setting for center marks and centerlines in the DIMCEN system variable. For horizontal dimension text, if the angle of the diameter line is greater than 15 degrees from horizontal and is outside the circle or arc, AutoCAD draws a hook line one arrowhead long next to the dimension text, as shown in the first two illustrations.
Prepared by: Yamanta Raj Niroula
248
An Introduction to AutoCAD
PENTASOFT
Dimension toolbar: Dimension menu: Diameter Command: dimdiameter Select arc or circle:
AutoCAD measures the diameter and displays the text with a diameter symbol (Ø) in front of it. The position of the cursor determines the location of the dimension line. As you move the cursor, the dimension moves around or inside the circle or arc. Specify dimension line location or [Mtext/Text/Angle]: Specify a point or enter an option
Dimension Line Location - Uses the point you specify to locate the dimension line. After you specify the location, AutoCAD draws the dimension. Mtext - Displays the Multiline Text Editor (see page 577), which you can use to edit the dimension text. AutoCAD represents the generated measurement with angle brackets (< >). To add a prefix or a suffix to the generated measurement, enter the prefix or suffix before or after the angle brackets. Use control codes and Unicode character strings to enter special characters or symbols. To edit or replace the generated measurement, delete the angle brackets, enter the new dimension text, and then choose OK. If alternate units are not turned on in the dimension style, you can display them by entering square brackets ([ ]). The current dimension style determines the appearance of the dimension text. Text - Customizes the dimension text at the command line. AutoCAD displays the generated dimension measurement within angle brackets. Enter dimension text :
Enter the dimension text, or press ENTER to accept the generated measurement. To include the generated measurement, use angle brackets (< >) to represent the generated measurement. If alternate units are not turned on in the dimension style, you can display alternate units by entering square brackets ([ ]). Dimension text properties are set on the Text tab of the New, Modify, and Override Dimension Style dialog boxes.
Prepared by: Yamanta Raj Niroula
249
An Introduction to AutoCAD
PENTASOFT
Angle - Changes the angle of the dimension text. Specify angle of dimension text:
Enter an angle. For example, to rotate the text 45 degrees, enter 45. After you specify the angle, AutoCAD redisplays the Dimension Line Location prompt.
The DIMRADIUS Command Creates radial dimensions for circles and arcs A radial dimension consists of a radius dimension line with an arrowhead at the arc or circle end. AutoCAD draws a center mark if the DIMCEN system variable is not set to 0. DIMRADIUS draws different types of radial dimensions depending on the size of the circle or arc, the options in the New, Modify, and Override Dimension Style dialog boxes (see DIMSTYLE), and the position of the cursor. AutoCAD stores the values of the options in the DIMUPT, DIMTOFL, DIMATFIT, DIMTIH, DIMTOH, DIMJUST, and DIMTAD system variables. For horizontal dimension text, if the angle of the radial dimension line is greater than 15 degrees from horizontal, AutoCAD draws a hook line, also called a dogleg or landing, one arrowhead long, next to the dimension text.
AutoCAD measures the radius and displays the text with the letter R in front of it.
Dimension toolbar: Dimension menu: Radius Command line: dimradius Select arc or circle: Specify dimension line location or [Mtext/Text/Angle]: Specify a point or enter an option
Dimension Line Location - Uses the point you specify to locate the dimension line. After you specify the location, AutoCAD draws the dimension. Mtext - Displays the Multiline Text Editor, which you can use to edit the dimension text. AutoCAD represents the generated measurement with angle brackets (< >). To add a prefix or a suffix to the generated measurement, enter the prefix or suffix before or after the angle brackets. Use control codes and Unicode character strings to enter special characters or symbols.
Prepared by: Yamanta Raj Niroula
250
An Introduction to AutoCAD
PENTASOFT
To edit or replace the generated measurement, delete the angle brackets, enter the new dimension text, and then choose OK. If alternate units are not turned on in the dimension style, you can display them by entering square brackets ([ ]). The current dimension style determines the appearance of the generated measurements. After you choose OK, AutoCAD redisplays the Dimension Line Location prompt. Text - Customizes the dimension text on the command line. AutoCAD displays the generated dimension measurement within angle brackets. Enter dimension text : Enter the dimension text, ENTER to accept the generated measurement
or press
To include the generated measurement, use angle brackets (< >) to represent the generated measurement. If alternate units are not turned on in the dimension style, you can display alternate units by entering square brackets ([ ]). Dimension text properties are set on the Text tab of the New, Modify, and Override Dimension Style dialog boxes. After you press ENTER, the Dimension Line Location prompt is displayed. Angle - Changes the angle of the dimension text. Specify angle of dimension text:
Enter an angle. For example, to rotate the text 45 degrees, enter 45. After you specify the angle, AutoCAD displays the Dimension Line Location prompt.
The DIMCENTER Command Creates the center mark or the centerlines of circles and arcs
Dimension toolbar: Dimension menu: Center Mark Command line: dimcenter Select arc or circle: Use an object selection method
You can choose between center marks and centerlines and specify their size when you set up the dimension style. See DIMSTYLE. You can also change center mark settings using the DIMCEN system variable.
Prepared by: Yamanta Raj Niroula
251
An Introduction to AutoCAD
PENTASOFT
Angular Dimensions There is only one command in this section and it is used to annotate angular measurements. Angular dimensions measure the angle between two lines or three points. To measure the angle between two radii of a circle, you select the circle and specify the angle endpoints. With other objects, you select the objects and then specify the dimension location. You can also dimension an angle by specifying the angle vertex and endpoints. As you create the dimension, you can modify the text content and alignment before specifying the dimension line location. Note: You can create baseline and continued angular dimensions relative to existing angular dimensions. Baseline and continued angular dimensions are limited to 180 degrees or less. To obtain baseline and continued angular dimensions larger than 180 degrees, use grip editing to stretch the location of the extension line of an existing baseline or continued dimension. Dimension Lines -If you use two straight, nonparallel lines to specify an angle, the dimension line arc spans the angle between the two lines. If the dimension line arc does not meet one or both of the lines being dimensioned, AutoCAD draws one or two extension lines to intersect the dimension line arc. The arc is always less than 180 degrees. Dimension Circles and Arcs If you use an arc or a circle or three points to specify an angle, AutoCAD draws the dimension line arc between the extension lines. The extension lines are drawn from the angle endpoints to the intersection of the dimension line arc. AutoCAD uses the location you specify for the dimension line arc to choose between the minor and major angles specified by the angle vertex and the extension lines.
The DIMANGULAR Command Creates an angular dimension
Dimension toolbar: Prepared by: Yamanta Raj Niroula
252
An Introduction to AutoCAD
PENTASOFT
Dimension menu: Angular Command: dimangular Select arc, circle, line, or : Select an arc, circle, or line, or press
ENTER to create the angular dimension by specifying three points After you define the angle to dimension, the following prompt is displayed: Specify dimension arc line location or [Mtext/Text/Angle]:
Arc Selection Uses points on the selected arc as the defining points for a three-point angular dimension. The center of the arc is the angle vertex. The arc endpoints become the origin points of the extension lines. AutoCAD draws the dimension line as an arc between the extension lines. AutoCAD draws the extension lines from the angle endpoints to the intersection of the dimension line. Circle Selection Uses the selection point (1) as the origin of the first extension line. The center of the circle is the angle vertex. Specify second angle endpoint: Specify a point (2)
The second angle endpoint is the origin of the second extension line and does not have to lie on the circle. Line Selection Defines the angle using two lines. Select second line:
AutoCAD determines the angle by using each line as a vector for the angle and the intersection of the lines for the angle vertex. The dimension line spans the angle between the two lines. If the dimension line does not intersect the lines being dimensioned, AutoCAD adds extension lines as needed to extend one or both lines. The arc is always less than 180 degrees. Three-Point Specification Creates a dimension based on three points you specify. Specify angle vertex: Specify a point (1) Specify first angle endpoint: Specify a point (2) Specify second angle endpoint: Specify a point (3)
The angle vertex can be the same as one of the angle
Prepared by: Yamanta Raj Niroula
253
An Introduction to AutoCAD
PENTASOFT
endpoints. If you need extension lines, the endpoints are used as origin points. AutoCAD draws the dimension line as an arc between the extension lines. The extension lines are drawn from the angle endpoints to the intersection of the dimension line. Dimension Arc Line Location Specifies the placement of the dimension line and determines the direction to draw the extension lines. After you specify the location, DIMANGULAR ends. Mtext Displays the Multiline Text Editor, which you can use to edit the dimension text. AutoCAD represents the generated measurement with angle brackets (< >). To add a prefix or a suffix to the generated measurement, enter the prefix or suffix before or after the angle brackets. Use control codes and Unicode character strings to enter special characters or symbols. To edit or replace the generated measurement, delete the angle brackets, enter the new dimension text, and then choose OK. If alternate units are not turned on in the dimension style, you can display them by entering square brackets ([ ]). The current dimension style determines the appearance of the generated measurements. Text Customizes the dimension text at the command line. AutoCAD displays the generated dimension measurement within angle brackets. Enter dimension text :
Enter the dimension text, or press ENTER to accept the generated measurement. To include the generated measurement, use angle brackets (< >) to represent the generated measurement. If alternate units are not turned on in the dimension style, you can display alternate units by entering square brackets ([ ]). Dimension text properties are set on the Text tab of the New, Modify, and Override Dimension Style dialog boxes. Angle Changes the angle of the dimension text. Specify angle of dimension text: Enter an angle. For example, to rotate the text 45 degrees, enter 45.
Ordinate Dimensions Ordinate dimensions are not really dimensions at all in that they do not indicate a measurement. Rather they
Prepared by: Yamanta Raj Niroula
254
An Introduction to AutoCAD
PENTASOFT
annotate known co-ordinate points. Ordinate dimensions measure the perpendicular distance from an origin point called the datum to a dimensioned feature, such as a hole in a part. These dimensions prevent escalating errors by maintaining accurate offsets of the features from the datum. The DIMORDINATE command is used to indicate the X and Y ordinate values at any point. Ordinate dimensions consist of an X or Y value with a leader line. X-datum ordinate dimensions measure the distance of a feature from the datum along the X axis. Y-datum ordinate dimensions measure the distance along the Y axis. If you specify a point, AutoCAD automatically determines whether it is an X- or Y-datum ordinate dimension. This is called an automatic ordinate dimension. If the distance is greater for the Y value, the dimension measures the X value. Otherwise, it measures the Y value.
AutoCAD uses the absolute coordinate value of the current UCS to determine the ordinate values. Before creating ordinate dimensions, you typically reset the UCS origin to coincide with the datum. The dimension text is aligned with the ordinate leader line, regardless of the text orientation defined by the current dimension style. You can accept the default text or supply your own. Ordinate dimensions display the X or Y ordinate of a feature along with a simple leader line. These dimensions are also known as datum dimensions. AutoCAD uses the current user coordinate system (UCS) to determine the measured X or Y ordinate and draws the leader line in a direction orthogonal to the axes of the current UCS. The absolute value of the coordinate is used according to the prevailing standards for ordinate dimensions.
Prepared by: Yamanta Raj Niroula
255
An Introduction to AutoCAD
PENTASOFT
The DIMORDINATE Command Dimension toolbar: Dimension menu: Ordinate Command: dimordinate Specify feature location: Specify a point or snap to an object Specify leader endpoint or [Xdatum/Ydatum/Mtext/Text/Angle]: Specify a point or enter an option
Leader Endpoint Specification Uses the difference between the feature location and the leader endpoint to determine whether it is an X or a Y ordinate dimension. If the difference in the Y ordinate is greater, the dimension measures the X ordinate. Otherwise, it measures the Y ordinate. Xdatum Measures the X ordinate and determines the orientation of the leader line and dimension text. AutoCAD displays the Leader Endpoint prompt, where you can specify the endpoint. Ydatum Measures the Y ordinate and determines the orientation of the leader line and dimension text. AutoCAD displays the Leader Endpoint prompts, where you can specify the endpoint. Mtext - Displays the Multiline Text Editor, which you can use to edit the dimension text. AutoCAD represents the generated measurement with angle brackets (< >). To add a prefix or a suffix to the generated measurement, enter the prefix or suffix before or after the angle brackets. Use control codes and Unicode character strings to enter special characters or symbols. To edit or replace the generated measurement, delete the angle brackets, enter the new dimension text, and then choose OK. If alternate units are not turned on in the dimension style, you can display them by entering square brackets ([ ]). The current dimension style determines the appearance of the generated measurements. After you choose OK, AutoCAD redisplays the Leader Endpoint prompt. Text - Customizes the dimension text on the command line. AutoCAD displays the generated dimension measurement within angle brackets. Enter dimension text : Enter the dimension text, or press ENTER to accept the generated measurement
To include the generated measurement, use angle brackets (< >) to represent the generated measurement. If alternate units are not turned on in the dimension style, you can display alternate units by entering square brackets ([ ]). Dimension text properties are
Prepared by: Yamanta Raj Niroula
256
An Introduction to AutoCAD
PENTASOFT
set on the Text tab of the New, Modify, and Override Dimension Style dialog boxes. After you press ENTER, AutoCAD redisplays the Leader Endpoint prompt. Angle - Changes the angle of the dimension text. Specify angle of dimension text:
Enter an angle. For example, to rotate the text 45 degrees, enter 45. After you specify the angle, AutoCAD redisplays the Leader Endpoint prompt.
Using Dimension Styles: You can control the appearance of dimensions by changing settings. For convenience and to help maintain dimensioning standards, you can store these settings in dimension styles. A dimension style is a saved set of dimension settings that determines the appearance of the dimension. By creating dimension styles, you can set all relevant dimensioning system variables and control the layout and appearance of any dimension. Dimension styles can have multiple secondary styles with varying settings. For example, within a dimension style, you can create a secondary style for radius dimensions and another secondary style for angular dimensions. AutoCAD uses the appropriate secondary style for the type of dimension you create. If there are no differences in settings for a dimension type, the primary dimension-style settings are used. By modifying a dimension style, you can update all existing dimensions created previously with that dimension style to reflect the new settings. The Dimension Style Manager allows you to modify the following: • •
Extension lines, dimension lines, arrowheads, center marks or lines, and the offsets between them The positioning of the parts of the dimension in relation to one another and the orientation of the dimension text
The DIMSTYLE Command Creates and modifies dimension styles
Styles toolbar: Format menu: Dimension Style Dimension menu: Style Command : dimstyle
Prepared by: Yamanta Raj Niroula
257
An Introduction to AutoCAD
PENTASOFT
The Dimension Style Manager is displayed. If you enter -dimstyle at the Command prompt, AutoCAD presents options on the command line. Dimension Style Manager Creates new styles, sets the current style, modifies styles, sets overrides on the current style, and compares styles.
Current Dimstyle Displays the current dimension style. AutoCAD assigns styles to all dimensions. If you do not change the current style, AutoCAD assigns the default STANDARD style to dimensions. Styles Displays all dimension styles in the drawing. The current style is highlighted. The item selected in List controls the dimension styles displayed. To make a style current, select it and choose Set Current. Unless you select Don’t List Styles in Xrefs, AutoCAD displays dimension styles in externally referenced drawings using the syntax for externally referenced named objects. While you cannot change, rename, or make current externally referenced dimension styles, you can create new styles based on them. Rightclick in the Styles list to display a shortcut menu that you can use to set the current style, rename styles, and delete styles. You cannot delete a style that is current or in use in the current drawing. List
Prepared by: Yamanta Raj Niroula
258
An Introduction to AutoCAD
PENTASOFT
Provides options that control which dimension styles are displayed. All Styles - Displays all dimension styles. Styles in Use - Displays only the dimension styles that are referenced by dimensions in the drawing. Don’t List Styles in Xrefs Styles.
Suppresses display of dimension styles in externally referenced drawings under
Set Current Sets the style selected under Styles to current. New Displays the Create New Dimension Style dialog box, in which you can define new dimension styles. Modify Displays the Modify Dimension Styles dialog box, in which you can modify dimension styles. Dialog box options are identical to those in the New Dimension Style dialog box. Override Displays the Override Current Style dialog box, in which you can set temporary overrides to dimension styles. Dialog box options are identical to those in the New Dimension Style dialog box. AutoCAD displays overrides as unsaved changes under the dimension in the Styles list. Compare Displays the Compare Dimension Styles dialog, which compares the properties of two dimension styles or lists all the properties of one style. Create New Dimension Style Dialog Box Names the new dimension style, sets the style on which to start the new one, and indicates the dimension types to which you want the new style to apply.
Prepared by: Yamanta Raj Niroula
259
An Introduction to AutoCAD
PENTASOFT
New Style Name - Names the new style. Start With - Sets a style to use as a basis for the new one. For the new style, you change only the properties that differ from the properties you start with. Use For - Creates a style that applies only to specific dimension types. For example, suppose the text color for the STANDARD style is black, but you want the text to be blue only for diameter dimensions. Under Start With, select STANDARD, and under Use For, select Diameter. New Style Name becomes unavailable because you are defining a substyle of STANDARD. After you change the text color to blue in the New Dimension Style dialog box, Diameter is displayed as a substyle under STANDARD in the Dimension Style Manager. Whenever you use the STANDARD style for diameter dimensions, the text is blue. When you use STANDARD for all other dimension types, the text is black. Continue - Displays the New Dimension Style dialog box, in which you define the new style properties. New, Modify, and Override Dimension Style Dialog Boxes Set properties for dimension styles. After you choose Continue in the Create New Dimension Style dialog box, the New Dimension Style dialog box is displayed. You define the properties for the new style in this dialog box. The dialog box initially displays the properties of the dimension style that you selected to start the new style in the Create New Dimension Style dialog box. Choosing either Modify or Override in the Dimension Style Manager displays the Modify Dimension Style or the Override Dimension Style dialog box. The content of these dialog boxes is identical to the New Dimension Style dialog box, although you are modifying or overriding an existing dimension style rather than creating a new one. The sample image on each tab displays the effects of each option. Lines and Arrows Tab (New, Modify, Override Dimension Style Dialog Boxes) Sets the format and properties for dimension lines, extension lines, arrowheads, and center marks.
Prepared by: Yamanta Raj Niroula
260
An Introduction to AutoCAD
PENTASOFT
Dimension Lines Sets the dimension line properties. Color - Sets the color for the dimension line. You can select colors from the 255 AutoCAD Color Index (ACI) colors, True Colors, and Color Book colors. If you click Select Color (at the bottom of the Color list), the Select Color dialog box is displayed. You can also enter the color name or number in the text box. (DIMCLRD system variable) Lineweight - Sets the lineweight of the dimension line. (DIMLWD system variable) Extend Beyond Ticks - Specifies a distance to extend the dimension line past the extension line when you use oblique, architectural, tick, integral, and no marks for arrowheads. (DIMDLE system variable)
Baseline Spacing - Sets the spacing between the dimension lines of a baseline dimension. Enter a distance. This value is stored in the DIMDLI system variable. For information about baseline dimensions, see DIMBASELINE.
Prepared by: Yamanta Raj Niroula
261
An Introduction to AutoCAD
PENTASOFT
Suppress - Suppresses display of dimension lines. Dim Line 1 suppresses the first dimension line; Dim Line 2 suppresses the second dimension line. (DIMSD1 and DIMSD2 system variables)
Extension Lines Controls the appearance of the extension lines. Color - Sets the color for the extension line. You can select colors from the 255 AutoCAD Color Index (ACI) colors, True Colors, and Color Book colors. If you click Select Color (at the bottom of the Color list), the Select Color dialog box is displayed. You can also enter the color name or number in the text box. (DIMCLRE system variable.) Lineweight - Sets the lineweight of the extension line. (DIMLWE system variable) Extend Beyond Dim Lines - Specifies a distance to extend the extension lines above the dimension line. (DIMEXE system variable)
Offset From Origin - Sets the distance to offset the extension lines from the points on the drawing that define the dimension. (DIMEXO system variable)
Prepared by: Yamanta Raj Niroula
262
An Introduction to AutoCAD
PENTASOFT
Suppress - Suppresses the display of extension lines. Ext Line 1 suppresses the first extension line; Ext Line 2 suppresses the second extension line. (DIMSE1 and DIMSE2 system variables)
Arrowheads Controls the appearance of the dimension arrowheads. 1st - Sets the arrowhead for the first dimension line. When you change the first arrowhead type, the second arrowhead automatically changes to match it. (DIMBLK1 system variable) To specify a user-defined arrowhead block, select User Arrow. The Select Custom Arrow Block dialog box is displayed. Select the name of a user-defined arrowhead block. (The block must be in the drawing.) 2nd - Sets the arrowhead for the second dimension line. (DIMBLK2 system variable) To specify a user-defined arrowhead block, select User Arrow. The Select Custom Arrow Block dialog box is displayed. Select the name of a user-defined arrowhead block. (The block must be in the drawing.) Leader - Sets the arrowhead for the leader line. (DIMLDRBLK system variable). To specify a user-defined arrowhead block, select User Arrow. The Select Custom Arrow Block dialog box is displayed. Select the name of a user-defined arrowhead block. (The block must be in the drawing.) Arrow Size - Sets the size of arrowheads. (DIMASZ system variable) Center Marks for Circles Controls the appearance of center marks and centerlines for diameter and radial dimensions. The DIMCENTER, DIMDIAMETER, and DIMRADIUS commands use center marks and centerlines. For DIMDIAMETER and DIMRADIUS, AutoCAD draws the center mark only if you place the dimension line outside the circle or arc. Type - Provides three center mark type options:
Prepared by: Yamanta Raj Niroula
263
An Introduction to AutoCAD • • •
PENTASOFT
Mark: Creates a center mark. The size of the center mark is stored as a positive value in the DIMCEN system variable. Line: Creates a centerline. The size of the centerline is stored as a negative value in the DIMCEN system variable. None: Creates no center mark or centerline. The value is stored as 0 in the DIMCEN system variable. Size Sets the size of the center mark or centerline. (DIMCEN system variable)
Text Tab (New, Modify, Override Dimension Style Dialog Boxes) Sets the format, placement, and alignment of dimension text.
Text Appearance Controls the dimension text format and size. Text Style - Displays and sets the current style for dimension text. Select a style from the list. To create and modify styles for dimension text, choose the [...] button next to the list. (DIMTXSTY system variable) Text Style Button - Displays the Text Style dialog box , in which you can define or modify text styles. Text Color - Sets the color for the dimension text. You can select colors from the 255 AutoCAD Color Index (ACI) colors, True Colors, and Color Book colors. If you click
Prepared by: Yamanta Raj Niroula
264
An Introduction to AutoCAD
PENTASOFT
Select Color (at the bottom of the Color list), the Select Color dialog box is displayed. You can also enter the color name or number in the text box. (DIMCLRT system variable) Text Height - Sets the height of the current dimension text style. If a fixed text height is set in the Text Style (that is, the text style height is greater than 0), that height overrides the text height set here. If you want to use the height set on the Text tab, make sure the text height in the Text Style is set to 0. (DIMTXT system variable) Fraction Height Scale - Sets the scale of fractions relative to dimension text. This option is available only when Fractional is selected as the Unit Format on the Primary Units tab. The value entered here is multiplied by the text height to determine the height of dimension fractions relative to dimension text. (DIMTFAC system variable) Draw Frame Around Text - Draws a frame around dimension text. Selecting this option changes the value stored in the DIMGAP system variable to a negative value. Text Placement Controls the placement of dimension text. Vertical Position - Controls the vertical placement of dimension text in relation to the dimension line. The vertical setting is stored in the DIMTAD system variable. Vertical position options include the following: • • • •
Centered: Centers the dimension text between the two parts of the dimension line. Above: Places the dimension text above the dimension line. The distance from the dimension line to the baseline of the lowest line of text is the current text gap. Outside: Places the dimension text on the side of the dimension line farthest away from the first defining point. JIS: Places the dimension text to conform to a Japanese Industrial Standards (JIS) representation.
Horizontal Position - Controls the horizontal placement of dimension text in relation to the dimension line and the extension lines. The horizontal setting is stored in the DIMJUST system variable. Horizontal position options include the following: •
Centered: Centers the dimension text along the dimension line between the extension lines.
Prepared by: Yamanta Raj Niroula
265
An Introduction to AutoCAD • •
• •
PENTASOFT
At Ext Line 1: Left-justifies the text with the first extension line along dimension line. The distance between the extension line and the text is twice arrowhead size plus the text gap value. At Ext Line 2: Right-justifies the text with the second extension line along dimension line. The distance between the extension line and the text is twice arrowhead size plus the text gap value.
the the the the
Over Ext Line 1: Positions the text over or along the first extension line. Over Ext Line 2: Positions the text over or along the second extension line.
Offset from Dim Line - Sets the current text gap, which is the distance around the dimension text when the dimension line is broken to accommodate the dimension text. AutoCAD also uses this value as the minimum length required for dimension line segments. AutoCAD positions text inside the extension lines only if the resulting segments are at least as long as the text gap. Text above or below the dimension line is placed inside only if the arrowheads, dimension text, and a margin leave enough room for the text gap. (DIMGAP system variable)
Text Alignment Controls the orientation (horizontal or aligned) of dimension text whether it is inside or outside the extension lines. (DIMTIH and DIMTOH system variables) Horizontal - Places text in a horizontal position. Aligned With Dimension Line - Aligns text with the dimension line.
Prepared by: Yamanta Raj Niroula
266
An Introduction to AutoCAD
PENTASOFT
ISO Standard - Aligns text with the dimension line when text is inside the extension lines, but aligns it horizontally when text is outside the extension lines. Fit Tab (New, Modify, Override Dimension Style Dialog Boxes) Controls the placement of dimension text, arrowheads, leader lines, and the dimension line.
Fit Options Controls the placement of text and arrowheads based on the space available between the extension lines. When space is available, AutoCAD places text and arrowheads between the extension lines. Otherwise, text and arrowheads are placed according to the Fit options. (DIMATFIT, DIMTIX, and DIMSOXD system variables) Either the Text or the Arrows, Whichever Fits Best - Places text and arrowheads as follows: • •
When enough space is available for text and arrowheads, places both between the extension lines. Otherwise, AutoCAD moves either the text or the arrowheads based on the best fit. When enough space is available for text only, places text between the extension lines and places arrowheads outside the extension lines.
Prepared by: Yamanta Raj Niroula
267
An Introduction to AutoCAD • •
PENTASOFT
When enough space is available for arrowheads only, places them between the extension lines and places text outside the extension lines. When space is available for neither text nor arrowheads, places them both outside the extension lines.
Arrows - Places text and arrowheads as follows: • • •
When enough space is available for text and arrowheads, places both between the extension lines. When space is available for arrowheads only, places them between the extension lines and places text outside them. When not enough space is available for arrowheads, places both text and arrowheads outside the extension lines.
Text - Places text and arrowheads as follows: • • •
When space is available for text and arrowheads, places both between the extension lines. When space is available for text only, places the text between the extension lines and places arrowheads outside them. When not enough space is available for text, places both text and arrowheads outside the extension lines.
Both Text and Arrows - When not enough space is available for text and arrowheads, places both outside the extension lines. Always Keep Text Between Ext Lines - Always places text between extension lines. This value is stored in the DIMTIX system variable. Suppress Arrows If They Don’t Fit Inside Extension Lines - Suppresses arrowheads if not enough space is available inside the extension lines. DIMSOXD system variable) Text Placement Sets the placement of dimension text when it is moved from the default position, that is, the position defined by the dimension style. (DIMTMOVE system variable) Beside the Dimension Line - Places dimension text beside the dimension line. Over the Dimension Line, with a Leader - If text is moved away from the dimension line, creates a leader connecting the text to the dimension line. AutoCAD omits the leader when text is too close to the dimension line. Over the Dimension Line, Without a Leader - Keeps the dimension line in the same place when text is moved. Text that is moved away from the dimension line is not connected to the dimension line with a leader. Scale for Dimension Features Sets the overall dimension scale value or the paper space scaling.
Prepared by: Yamanta Raj Niroula
268
An Introduction to AutoCAD
PENTASOFT
Use Overall Scale Of - Sets a scale for all dimension style settings that specify size, distance, or spacing, including text and arrowhead sizes. This scale does not change dimension measurement values. This value is stored in the DIMSCALE system variable. Scale Dimension to Layout (Paper Space) - Determines a scale factor based on the scaling between the current model space viewport and paper space. This value is stored as 0 in the DIMSCALE system variable. When you work in paper space, but not in a model space viewport, or when TILEMODE is set to 1, AutoCAD uses the default scale factor of 1.0 for the DIMSCALE system variable. Fine Tuning Sets additional fit options. Place Text Manually When Dimensioning - Ignores any horizontal justification settings and places the text at the position you specify at the Dimension Line Location prompt. This value is stored in the DIMUPT system variable. Always Draw Dim Line Between Ext Lines - Draws dimension lines between the measured points even when AutoCAD places the arrowheads outside the measured points. This value is stored in the DIMTOFL system variable. Primary Units Tab (New, Modify, Override Dimension Style Dialog Boxes) Sets the format and precision of primary dimension units and sets prefixes and suffixes for dimension text.
Linear Dimensions Sets the format and precision for linear dimensions.
Prepared by: Yamanta Raj Niroula
269
An Introduction to AutoCAD
PENTASOFT
Unit Format - Sets the current units format for all dimension types except Angular. This value is stored in the DIMLUNIT system variable. The relative sizes of numbers in stacked fractions are based on the DIMTFAC system variable (in the same way that tolerance values use this system variable). Precision - Sets the number of decimal places in the dimension text. This value is stored in the DIMDEC system variable. Fraction Format Sets the format for fractions. This value is stored in the DIMFRAC system variable. Decimal Separator - Sets the separator for decimal formats. This value is stored in the DIMDSEP system variable. Round Off - Sets rounding rules for dimension measurements for all dimension types except Angular. If you enter a value of 0.25, all distances are rounded to the nearest 0.25 unit. Similarly, if you enter a value of 1.0, AutoCAD rounds all dimension distances to the nearest integer. This value is stored in the DIMRND system variable. The number of digits displayed after the decimal point depends on the Precision setting. Prefix - Indicates a prefix for the dimension text. You can enter text or use control codes to display special symbols. For example, entering the control code %%c displays the diameter symbol. When you enter a prefix, it overrides any default prefixes such as those used in diameter ( ) and radius (R) dimensioning. This value is stored in the DIMPOST system variable. If you specify tolerances, AutoCAD adds the prefix to the tolerances as well as to the main dimension.
Suffix - Indicates a suffix for the dimension text. You can enter text or use control codes to display special symbols For example, entering the text mm results in dimension text similar to that shown in the illustration. When you enter a suffix, it overrides any default suffixes. This value is stored in DIMPOST. If you specify tolerances, AutoCAD adds the suffix to the tolerances as well as to the main dimension.
Measurement Scale - Defines measurement scale options as follows: •
•
Scale Factor: Sets a scale factor for linear dimension measurements. AutoCAD multiplies the dimension measurement by the value entered here. For example, if you enter 2, AutoCAD displays a one inch dimension as two inches. The value does not apply to angular dimensions and is not applied to rounding values or to plus or minus tolerance values. This value is stored in the DIMLFAC system variable. Apply to Layout Dimensions Only: Applies the linear scale value only to dimensions created in layouts. This sets the length scale factor to reflect the zoom scale factor for objects in a model space viewport. When you select this option,
Prepared by: Yamanta Raj Niroula
270
An Introduction to AutoCAD
PENTASOFT
the length scaling value is stored as a negative value in the DIMLFAC system variable. Zero Suppression - Controls the suppression of leading and trailing zeros, and of feet and inches that have a value of zero. Zero suppression settings also affect real-to-string conversions performed by the AutoLISP® rtos and angtos functions. AutoCAD stores this value in the DIMZIN system variable. • Leading: Suppresses leading zeros in all decimal dimensions. For example, 0.5000 becomes .5000. • Trailing: Suppresses trailing zeros in all decimal dimensions. For example, 12.5000 becomes 12.5, and 30.0000 becomes 30. • 0 Feet: Suppresses the feet portion of a feet-and inches dimension when the distance is less than one foot. For example, 0' -6 1/2" becomes 6 1/2". • 0 Inches: Suppresses the inches portion of a feet-and inches dimension when the distance is an integral number of feet. For example, 1' -0" becomes 1' . Angular Dimensions Sets the current angle format for angular dimensions. Units Format - Sets the angular units format. This value is stored in the DIMAUNIT system variable. Precision - Sets the number of decimal places for angular dimensions. This value is stored in the DIMADEC system variable. Zero Suppression DIMAZIN. • •
Suppresses leading and trailing zeros. This value is stored in
Leading: Suppresses leading zeros in angular decimal dimensions. For example, 0.5000 becomes .5000. Trailing: Suppresses trailing zeros in angular decimal dimensions. For example, 12.5000 becomes 12.5, and 30.0000 becomes 30.
Alternate Units Tab (New, Modify, Override Dimension Style Dialog Boxes) Specifies display of alternate units in dimension measurements and sets their format and precision.
Prepared by: Yamanta Raj Niroula
271
An Introduction to AutoCAD
PENTASOFT
Display Alternate Units Adds alternate measurement units to dimension text. AutoCAD sets the DIMALT system variable to 1. Alternate Units - Sets the current alternate units format for all dimension types except Angular. Unit Format - Sets the alternate units format. This value is stored in the DIMALTU system variable. The relative sizes of numbers in stacked fractions are based on DIMTFAC (in the same way that tolerance values use this system variable). Precision - Sets the number of decimal places in the alternate units. This value is stored in the DIMALTD system variable. Multiplier for Alternate Units - Specifies a multiplier to se as the conversion factor between primary and alternate units. To determine the value of alternate units, AutoCAD multiplies all linear distances (measured by dimensions and coordinates) by the current linear scale value. The length scaling value changes the generated measurement value. The value has no effect on angular dimensions, and AutoCAD does not apply it to the rounding value or the plus or minus tolerance values. This value is stored in the DIMALTF system variable. Round Distances To - Sets rounding rules for alternate units for all dimension types except Angular. If you enter a value of 0.25, all alternate measurements are rounded to
Prepared by: Yamanta Raj Niroula
272
An Introduction to AutoCAD
PENTASOFT
the nearest 0.25 unit. Similarly, if you enter a value of 1.0, AutoCAD rounds all dimension measurements to the nearest integer. The number of digits displayed after the decimal point depends on the Precision setting. The alternate rounding value is stored in the DIMALTRND system variable. Prefix - Indicates a prefix for the alternate dimension text. You can enter text or use control codes to display special symbols. For example, entering the control code %%c displays the diameter symbol. This value is stored in the DIMAPOST system variable.
Suffix - Includes the suffix in the alternate dimension text. You can enter text or use control codes to display special symbols. For example, entering the text cm results in dimension text similar to that shown in the illustration. When you enter a suffix, it overrides any default suffixes. This value is stored in the DIMAPOST system variable.
Zero Suppression Controls the suppression of leading and trailing zeros, and of feet and inches that have a value of zero. This value is stored in the DIMALTZ system variable. Leading Suppresses leading zeros in all decimal dimensions. For example, 0.5000 becomes .5000. Trailing Suppresses trailing zeros in all decimal dimensions. For example, 12.5000 becomes 12.5, and 30.0000 becomes 30. 0 Feet - Suppresses the feet portion of a feet-and-inches dimension when the distance is less than one foot. For example, 0' -6 1/2" becomes 6 1/2". 0 Inches - Suppresses the inches portion of a feet-and-inches dimension when the distance is an integral number of feet. For example, 1' -0" becomes 1' . Placement Controls the placement of alternate units. These values are stored in the DIMAPOST system variable. After Primary Units - Places alternate units after the primary units. Below Primary Units - Places alternate units below the primary units. Tolerances Tab (New, Modify, Override Dimension Style Dialog Boxes) Controls the display and format of dimension text tolerances.
Prepared by: Yamanta Raj Niroula
273
An Introduction to AutoCAD
PENTASOFT
Tolerance Format Controls the tolerance format. Method - Sets the method for calculating the tolerance. •
None: Does not add a tolerance. The DIMTOL system variable is set to 0.
•
Symmetrical: Adds a plus/minus expression of tolerance in which AutoCAD applies a single value of variation to the dimension measurement. A ± appears after the dimension. Enter the tolerance value in Upper Value. The DIMTOL system variable is set to 1. The DIMLIM system variable is set to 0.
•
Deviation: Adds a plus/minus tolerance expression. AutoCAD applies different plus and minus values of variation to the dimension measurement. A plus sign (+) precedes the tolerance value entered in Upper Value, and a minus sign (–) precedes the tolerance value entered in Lower Value. The DIMTOL system variable is set to 1. The DIMLIM system variable is set to 0.
Prepared by: Yamanta Raj Niroula
274
An Introduction to AutoCAD
PENTASOFT
•
Limits: Creates a limit dimension in which AutoCAD displays a maximum and a minimum value, one over the other. The maximum value is the dimension value plus the value entered in Upper Value. The minimum value is the dimension value minus the value entered in Lower Value. The DIMTOL system variable is set to 0. The DIMLIM system variable is set to 1.
•
Basic: Creates a basic dimension in which AutoCAD draws a box around the full extents of the dimension. The distance between the text and the box is stored as a negative value in the DIMGAP system variable.
Precision - Sets the number of decimal places. This value is stored in the DIMTDEC system variable. Upper Value - Sets the maximum or upper tolerance value. When you select Symmetrical in Method, AutoCAD uses this value for the tolerance. This value is stored in the DIMTP system variable. Lower Value - Sets the minimum or lower tolerance value. This value is stored in the DIMTM system variable. Scaling for Height - Sets the current height for the tolerance text. The ratio of the tolerance height to the main dimension text height is calculated and stored in the DIMTFAC system variable. Vertical Position - Controls text justification for symmetrical and deviation tolerances. • • •
Top: Aligns the tolerance text with the top of the main dimension text. When you select this option, the DIMTOLJ system variable is set to 2. Middle: Aligns the tolerance text with the middle of the main dimension text. When you select this option, the DIMTOLJ system variable is set to 1. Bottom: Aligns the tolerance text with the bottom of the main dimension text. When you select this option, the DIMTOLJ system variable is set to 0.
Prepared by: Yamanta Raj Niroula
275
An Introduction to AutoCAD
PENTASOFT
Zero Suppression Controls the suppression of leading and trailing zeros, and of feet and inches that have a value of zero. Zero suppression settings also affect real-to-string conversions performed by the AutoLISP rtos and angtos functions. This value is stored in the DIMTZIN system variable. Leading - Suppresses leading zeros in all decimal dimensions. For example, 0.5000 becomes .5000. Trailing - Suppresses trailing zeros in all decimal dimensions. For example, 12.5000 becomes 12.5, and 30.0000 becomes 30. Feet - Suppresses the feet portion of a feet-and-inches dimension when the distance is less than one foot. For example, 0' -6 1/2" becomes 6 1/2". Inches - Suppresses the inches portion of a feet-and-inches dimension when the distance is an integral number of feet. For example, 1' -0" becomes 1' . Alternate Unit Tolerance Sets the precision and zero suppression rules for alternate tolerance units. Precision Sets the number of decimal places. This value is stored in the DIMALTTD system variable. Zero Suppression - Controls the suppression of leading and trailing zeros, and of feet and inches that have a value of zero. This value is stored in the DIMALTTZ system variable. • Leading: Suppresses leading zeros in all decimal dimensions. For example, 0.5000 becomes .5000. • Trailing: Suppresses trailing zeros in all decimal dimensions. For example, 12.5000 becomes 12.5, and 30.0000 becomes 30. • Feet: Suppresses the feet portion of a feet-and-inches dimension when the distance is less than one foot. For example, 0' -6 1/2" becomes 6 1/2". • Inches: Suppresses the inches portion of a feet-and inches dimension when the distance is an integral number of feet. For example, 1' -0" becomes 1' . Compare Dimension Styles Dialog Box Compares the properties of two dimension styles or displays all properties of one style. You can print the results of the comparison to the Clipboard, and then paste to other Windows applications.
Prepared by: Yamanta Raj Niroula
276
An Introduction to AutoCAD
PENTASOFT
Compare - Sets the first dimension style to compare. With - Sets the second dimension style to compare. If you set With to or to the same style as Compare, AutoCAD displays all properties for the style. Comparison results display automatically under the following headings: • • •
Description of the dimension style property System variable that controls the property System variable values of style properties that differ for each dimension style.
Print to Clipboard button - Prints results of the style comparison to the Windows Clipboard. You can then paste the results to other Windows applications, such as word processors and spreadsheets.
Adding Geometric Tolerances You can add geometric tolerances show acceptable deviations of form, profile, orientation, location, and runout of a feature. Overview of Geometric Tolerances Geometric tolerances show acceptable deviations of form, profile, orientation, location, and runout of a feature. You add geometric tolerances in feature control frames. These frames contain all the tolerance information for a single dimension. Geometric tolerances can be created with or without leader lines, depending on whether you create them with TOLERANCE or LEADER. A feature control frame consists of two or more components. The first feature control frame contains a symbol that represents the geometric characteristic to which a tolerance is being applied, for example, location, profile, form, orientation, or runout. Form tolerances control straightness, flatness, circularity and cylindricity; profiles control line and surface. In the illustration, the characteristic is position.
Prepared by: Yamanta Raj Niroula
277
An Introduction to AutoCAD
PENTASOFT
You can use most editing commands to change feature control frames, and you an snap to them using the object snap modes. You can also edit them with grips. Note - Unlike dimensions and leaders, geometric tolerances cannot be associated with geometric objects. To create geometric tolerances • • • • • • • • • • • • •
From the Dimension menu, choose Tolerance. In the Geometric Tolerance dialog box, click the first square under Sym and select a symbol to insert. Under Tolerance 1, click the first black box to insert a diameter symbol. In the Text box, enter the first tolerance value. To add a material condition (optional), click the second black box and click a symbol in the Material Conditions dialog box to insert it. In the Geometric Tolerance dialog box, add a second tolerance value (optional) in the same way as the first tolerance value. Under Datum 1, Datum 2, Datum 3, enter the datum reference letter. Click the black box to insert a material condition symbol for each datum reference. In the Height box, enter a height. Click the Projected Tolerance Zone box to insert the symbol. In the Datum Identifier box, add a datum value. Choose OK. In the drawing, specify a location for the feature control frame.
Dimension toolbar: Command : TOLERANCE
To create a geometric tolerance with a leader • • • •
On the command line, enter leader. Specify the start point of the leader. Specify the second point of the leader. Press ENTER twice to display the Annotation options.
Prepared by: Yamanta Raj Niroula
278
An Introduction to AutoCAD •
PENTASOFT
Enter t (Tolerance), and create a feature control frame. The feature control frame is attached to the endpoint of the leader. Command : LEADER
Material Conditions The second compartment contains the tolerance value. Depending on the control type, the tolerance value is preceded by a diameter symbol and followed by a material condition symbol. Material conditions apply to features that can vary in size: • •
•
At maximum material condition (symbol M, also known as MMC), a feature contains the maximum amount of material stated in the limits. At MMC, a hole has minimum diameter, whereas a shaft has maximum diameter. At least material condition (symbol L, also known as LMC), a feature contains the minimum amount of material stated in the limits. At LMC, a hole has maximum diameter, whereas a shaft has minimum diameter. Regardless of feature size (symbol S, also known as RFS) means a feature can be any size within the stated limits.
Datum Reference Frames The tolerance values in the feature control frame are followed by up to three optional datum reference letters and their modifying symbols. A datum is a theoretically exact point, axis, or plane from which you make measurements and verify dimensions. Usually, two or three mutually perpendicular planes perform this task best. These are jointly called the datum reference frame.
part.
The illustration shows a datum reference frame verifying the dimensions of the
Prepared by: Yamanta Raj Niroula
279
An Introduction to AutoCAD
PENTASOFT
Projected Tolerance Zones Projected tolerances are specified in addition to positional tolerances to make the tolerance more specific. For example, projected tolerances control the perpendicularity tolerance zone of an embedded part. The symbol for projected tolerance ( ) is preceded by a height value, which specifies the minimum projected tolerance zone. The projected tolerance zone height and symbol appear in a frame below the feature control frame.
Composite Tolerances A composite tolerance specifies two tolerances for the same geometric characteristic of a feature or for features that have different datum requirements. One tolerance relates to a pattern of features and the other tolerance to each feature within the pattern. The individual feature tolerance is more restrictive than the pattern tolerance. In the illustration above, the point where datums A and B intersect is called the datum axis, the point from which the position of the pattern is calculated. A composite tolerance could specify both the diameter of the pattern of holes and the diameter of each individual hole, as in the illustration below.
Prepared by: Yamanta Raj Niroula
280
An Introduction to AutoCAD
PENTASOFT
When you add composite tolerances to a drawing, you specify the first line of a feature control frame and then choose the same geometric characteristic symbol for the second line of the feature control frame. AutoCAD extends the geometric symbol compartment over both lines. You can then create a second line of tolerance symbols.
Annotation with Leaders A leader line is an object that can be composed of an arrowhead attached to splines or straight line segments. In some cases, a short horizontal line, called a hook line, dogleg, or landing, connects text and feature control frames to the leader line. If associative dimensioning is turned on with DIMASSOC, the leader start point can be associated with a location on an object. If the object is relocated, the arrowhead remains attached to the object and the leader line stretches, but the text or feature control frame remains in place. You can use various dimensioning system variables to format the leader line, such as placing the text above the hook line with DIMTAD. LEADER creates complex leader lines that can be made up of more than two line segments. DIMDIAMETER and DIMRADIUS create simple automatic leader lines with two line segments for circles and arcs.
The Leader Command Creates a line that connects annotation to a feature Command : leader Specify leader start point: Specify next point:
AutoCAD draws a leader line segment to the point specified and continues to prompt for points and options. Specify next point or [Annotation/Format/Undo] : Specify a point, enter an option, or press ENTER
Point Specification Draws a leader line segment to the point specified and continues to prompt you for points and options. Specify next point or [Annotation/Format/Undo] : Specify a point, enter an option, or press ENTER
Annotation Inserts an annotation at the end of the leader line. The annotation can be single or multiple lines of text, a feature control frame containing geometric tolerances, or a block. Enter first line of annotation text or : Enter text or press ENTER
If you enter text at the Annotation prompt, AutoCAD places the text at the end of the leader line. AutoCAD prompts you for additional lines of text until you end the
Prepared by: Yamanta Raj Niroula
281
An Introduction to AutoCAD
PENTASOFT
command by pressing ENTER twice. If you press ENTER at the Annotation prompt without entering text first, AutoCAD displays the following prompt: Enter an annotation option [Tolerance/Copy/Block/None/Mtext] : Enter an option or press ENTER
Tolerance - Creates a feature control frame containing geometric tolerances using the Geometric Tolerance dialog boxes. You can create datum indicators and basic dimension notation in these dialog boxes. After you specify the geometric tolerance, LEADER ends. Copy Copies text, a multiline text object, a feature control frame with geometric tolerances, or a block and connects the copy to the end of the leader line. The copy is associated with the leader line, meaning that if the end of the leader line moves, the copied object moves with it. The display of the hook line depends on the object copied. Select an object to copy:
AutoCAD places the object and ends LEADER. The value of the current text gap (see DIMSTYLE or the DIMGAP system variable) determines where AutoCAD inserts the text and multiline text objects. AutoCAD attaches any blocks or feature control frames with geometric tolerances to the end of the leader line. Block - Inserts a block at the end of the leader line. AutoCAD uses the same prompts as the INSERT command. The block reference is inserted at an offset from the end of the leader line and is associated to the leader line, meaning that if the end of the leader line moves, the block moves with it. No hook line is displayed. Enter block name or [?]: Enter a block name or enter ? to list all blocks in the drawing
None - Ends the command without adding any annotation to the leader line. Mtext - Creates text using the Multiline Text Editor when you specify an insertion point and a second point for the text boundary. Enter the characters for the text. Enclose format strings for prefixes and suffixes in angle brackets (< >). Enclose format strings for alternate units in square brackets ([ ]). The units settings and the current text style determine how AutoCAD displays the text. AutoCAD vertically centers the multiline text and horizontally aligns it according to the X axis direction of the last two vertices of the leader line. AutoCAD offsets the multiline text from the hook line by the distance specified under Offset from Dim Line on the Text tab of the New, Modify, or Override Dimension Style dialog box. If the offset specified is negative, AutoCAD encloses the multiline text in a box as a basic dimension. After you specify the text, LEADER ends.
Prepared by: Yamanta Raj Niroula
282
An Introduction to AutoCAD
PENTASOFT
Format Controls the way AutoCAD draws the leader and whether it has an arrowhead. Enter leader format option [Spline/STraight/Arrow/None] : Enter an option or press ENTER to return to the previous prompt
After each option, AutoCAD returns you to the Specify Next Point prompt.
Spline - Draws the leader line as a spline. The vertices of the leader line are the control points, each of equal unit weight. Straight - Draws the leader line as a set of straight line segments. Arrow - Draws an arrowhead at the start point of the leader line. None - Draws a leader line with no arrowhead at the start point. Exit - Exits the Format options. Undo Undoes the last vertex point on the leader line. AutoCAD then redisplays the previous prompt.
Modify Existing Dimensions You can modify all components of the existing dimension objects in a drawing either individually or by using dimension styles.
Apply a New Dimension Style to Existing Dimensions When you create a dimension, the current dimension style is associated with that dimension. The dimension retains this dimension style unless you apply a new dimension style to it or set up dimension style overrides. You can modify existing dimensions by applying a different dimension style. If you make changes to a dimension style, you can choose whether to update the dimensions associated with that dimension style. You can restore an existing dimension style or apply the current dimension style, including any dimension style overrides, to selected dimensions.
Prepared by: Yamanta Raj Niroula
283
An Introduction to AutoCAD
PENTASOFT
To apply the current dimension style to existing dimensions • • •
From the Dimension menu, choose Update. Select the dimensions to update to the current dimension style. Press ENTER.
Override a Dimension Style A dimension style override is a change made to specific settings in the current dimension style. It is equivalent to changing a dimensioning system variable without changing the current dimension style. You can define dimension style overrides for individual dimensions, or for the current dimension style. For individual dimensions, you may want to create overrides to suppress a dimension’s extension lines or modify text and arrowhead placement so that they do not overlap drawing geometry without creating a different dimension style. You can also set up overrides to the current dimension style. All dimensions you create in the style include the overrides until you delete the overrides, save the overrides to a new style, or set another style current. For example, if you choose Override in the Dimension Style Manager, and change the color of extension lines on the Lines and Arrows tab, the current dimension style remains unchanged. However, the new value for color is stored in the DIMCLRE system variable. The next dimension you create will have extension lines in the new color. You can save the dimension style overrides as a new dimension style. Some dimension characteristics are common to a drawing or to a style of dimensioning and are therefore suited to be permanent dimension style settings. Others generally apply on an individual basis and can be applied more effectively as overrides. For example, a drawing usually uses a single type of arrowhead, so it makes sense to define the arrowhead type as part of the dimension style. Suppression of extension lines, however, usually applies in individual cases only and is more suited to a dimension style override. There are several ways to set up dimension style overrides. You can change options in the dialog boxes or change system variable settings on the command line. You reverse the override by returning the changed settings to their original values. The overrides apply to the dimension you are creating and all subsequent dimensions created with that dimension style until you reverse the override or make another dimension style current. You can override the current dimension style while creating a dimension by entering the name of any dimensioning system variable at any prompt. In this example, the dimension line color is changed. The change affects subsequent dimensions you create until you reverse the override or make another dimension style current. Command: dimlinear Specify first extension line origin or : dimclrd Enter new value for dimension variable : 5 Specify first extension line origin : Specify the first extension line origin, or select an object to dimension
Prepared by: Yamanta Raj Niroula
284
An Introduction to AutoCAD
PENTASOFT
Modify Dimension Text Once you' ve created a dimension, you can rotate the existing text or replace it with new text. You can move the text to a new location or back to its home position, which is the position defined by the current dimension style. In the following illustration, the home position is above and centered on the dimension line.
When you rotate or replace dimension text, you specify the change first, for example, rotating the text to be at an angle. When you move dimension text, you select a single dimension to move. You can move dimension text to the left, right, or center along the dimension line or to any position inside or outside the extension lines. A quick and simple way to do this is by using grips. If you move text up or down, the current vertical alignment of the text relative to the dimension line is not changed, so the dimension and extension lines are modified accordingly. The following illustration shows the result of moving text down and to the right. The text remains centered vertically in relation to the dimension line.
The DIMTEDIT Command Moves and rotates dimension text
Dimension toolbar:
Prepared by: Yamanta Raj Niroula
285
An Introduction to AutoCAD
PENTASOFT
Dimension menu: Align Text Command: dimtedit Select dimension: Select a dimension object
AutoCAD prompts you for the new location of the dimension text. Specify new location for dimension text or [Left/Right/Center/Home/Angle]: Specify a point or enter an option
Location for Dimension Text Updates the location of the dimension text dynamically as you drag it. To determine whether text appears above, below, or in the middle of the dimension line, use the Text tab in the New, Modify, and Override Dimension Style dialog box. Left - Left-justifies the dimension text along the dimension line. This option works only with linear, radial, and diameter dimensions.
Right - Right-justifies the dimension text along the dimension line. This option works only with linear, radial, and diameter dimensions.
Center - Centers the dimension text on the dimension line. Home - Moves dimension text back to its default position.
Prepared by: Yamanta Raj Niroula
286
An Introduction to AutoCAD
PENTASOFT
Angle - Changes the angle of the dimension text. Enter text angle:
The center point of the text does not change. If the text moves or the dimension is regenerated, AutoCAD keeps the orientation set by the text angle. Entering an angle of 0 degrees puts the text in its default orientation.
Modify Dimension Geometry You can modify dimensions with the AutoCAD editing commands and with grip editing. Grip editing is the quickest and easiest way to modify dimensions. How you edit dimensions depends whether the dimension is associative. Modify Associative Dimensions Associative dimensions retain their associativity to dimensioned objects through many editing commands if both the dimension and the associated geometry are selected and operated on with a single command. For example, if a dimension and its associated geometry are moved, copied, or arrayed in the same command, each dimension retains associativity with its respective geometry. • • • •
In some circumstances, dimensions are automatically disassociated, including If the associated geometric object is erased If the associated geometric object undergoes a Boolean operation such as UNION or SUBTRACT If grip editing is used to stretch a dimension parallel to its dimension line If the association to a geometric object is specified using the Apparent
Intersection object snap, and the geometric object is moved so that the apparent intersection no longer exists In other circumstances, a dimension may become partially associated. For example, if a linear dimension is associated with the endpoints of two geometric objects and one of the objects is erased, the remaining association is preserved. The disassociated end of the linear dimension may then be associated with another geometric object using DIMREASSOCIATE. Note - The command line displays a warning message if a dimension is disassociated. Modify Non-associative Dimensions For non-associative dimensions, when you edit dimensioned objects, you must include the relevant dimension definition points in the selection set, or the dimension is not updated. Definition points determine the dimension location. For example, to stretch
Prepared by: Yamanta Raj Niroula
287
An Introduction to AutoCAD
PENTASOFT
a dimension, you must include the appropriate definition points in the selection set. You can easily include them by turning on grips and selecting the object so that the grips are highlighted. The definition points for each type of dimension are indicated in the following illustrations. The middle point of the dimension text is a definition point for all dimension types.
If no angle vertex is shown, AutoCAD places definition points at the ends of the lines that form the angle. In the two-line angular example, AutoCAD places a definition point at the center point of the dimensioned arc. Note - Definition points are drawn on a special layer named DEFPOINTS, which is not plotted. Modify Exploded Dimensions You can edit exploded dimensions as you would any other objects because an exploded dimension is a collection of separate objects: lines, 2D solids, and text. Occasionally you may need to explode a dimension to make changes such as creating a break in a dimension line or extension line. Once a dimension is exploded, you cannot reassociate the dimension into a dimension object.
Prepared by: Yamanta Raj Niroula
288
An Introduction to AutoCAD
PENTASOFT
Change Dimension Associativity You may need to change the associativity of dimensions in several circumstances such as the following: • Redefine the associativity of dimensions in drawings that have been edited significantly. • Add associativity to dimensions that have been partially disassociated. • Add associativity to dimensions in legacy drawings. • Remove associativity from dimensions in drawings that will be used by people on releases prior to AutoCAD 2002, but who do not want any proxy objects in the drawings. Reassociate Dimensions to Different Objects With DIMREASSOCIATE, you can select one or more dimensions and step through the extension-line origin points of each dimension. For each extension-line origin point, you can specify a new association point on a geometric object. Association points determine the attachment of extension lines to locations on geometric objects. Note When you create or modify associative dimensions, it is important to locate their association points carefully so that if you make a future design change, the geometric objects that you change will also change the dimensions associated with them. When using the DIMREASSOCIATE command, a marker appears that indicates whether each successive extension line origin point of the dimension is associative or non-associative. A square with an X in it means that the point is associated with a location on an object, while an X without the square means that the point is not associated with an object. Use an object snap to specify the new association for the extension-line origin point or press ENTER to skip to the next extension-line origin point. Note - The marker disappears if you pan or zoom with a wheel mouse. Change Non-associative Dimensions to Associative You can change all the non-associative dimensions in a drawing to associative. Use QSELECT to select all non-associative dimensions, and then use DIMREASSOCIATE to step through the dimensions, associating each one with locations on geometric objects. Change Associative Dimensions to Non-associative You can change all associative dimensions in a drawing to non-associative dimensions. Use QSELECT to select all associative dimensions, and then use DIMDISASSOCIATE to convert them into non-associative dimensions. To associate or reassociate a dimension 1. From the Dimension menu, choose Reassociate Dimensions. 2. Select one or more dimensions to associate or reassociate. 3. Do one of the following:
Prepared by: Yamanta Raj Niroula
289
An Introduction to AutoCAD • • • •
PENTASOFT
Specify the new location of the extension-line origin point. Enter s and select a geometric object to associate with the dimension. Press ENTER to skip to the next extension-line origin point. Press ESC to end the command but keep any associations you made up to that point.
4. Repeat the previous step as needed.
The DIMREASSOCIATE Command Associates selected dimensions to geometric objects With DIMREASSOCIATE, a non-associative dimension can be associated to geometric objects, or the existing associations in an associative dimension can be changed. Dimension menu: Reassociate Dimensions Command: dimreassociate Select dimensions to reassociate: Select dimension objects
Each selected dimension is highlighted in turn, and prompts for association points appropriate for the selected dimension are displayed. A marker is displayed for each association point prompt. If the definition point of the current dimension is not associated to a geometric object, the marker appears as an X; but if the definition point is associated, the marker appears as an X inside a box. Note - The marker disappears if you pan or zoom with a wheel mouse. Press ESC to terminate the command without losing the changes that were already specified. Use UNDO to restore the previous state of the changed dimensions. The prompts for the different types of dimensions are: Linear Specify first extension line origin or [Select object] : Specify an object snap location, enter s and select a geometric object, or press ENTER to skip to the next prompt Specify second extension line origin : Specify an object snap location, or press ENTER to skip to the next dimension object, if any
Aligned – Specify first extension line origin or [Select object] : Specify an object snap location, enter s and select a geometric object, or press ENTER to skip to the next prompt Specify second extension line origin : Specify an object snap location, or press ENTER to skip to the next dimension object, if any
Angular (Three Point) –
Prepared by: Yamanta Raj Niroula
290
An Introduction to AutoCAD
PENTASOFT
Specify angle vertex or [Select arc or circle] : Specify an object snap location, enter s and select an arc or a circle, or press ENTER to skip to the next prompt Specify first angle endpoint : Specify an object snap location or press ENTER to skip to the next prompt Specify second angle endpoint : Specify an object snap location or press ENTER to skip to the next dimension object, if any
Angular (Two Line) – Select first line : Select a line, or press ENTER to skip to the next prompt Select second line : Select another line, or press ENTER to skip to the next dimension object, if any
Diameter – Select arc or circle : Select an arc or a circle, or press ENTER to skip to the next dimension object, if any
Leader – Specify leader association point : Specify an object snap location, or press ENTER to skip to the next dimension object, if any
Ordinate – Specify feature location : Specify an object snap location, or press ENTER to skip to the next dimension object, if any
Radius – Select arc or circle : Select an arc or a circle, or press ENTER to skip to the next dimension object, if any
Note - DIMREASSOCIATE does not change the setting of DIMLFAC in a dimension. Use DIMOVERRIDE to clear dimension linear factors in legacy drawings.
Prepared by: Yamanta Raj Niroula
291
An Introduction to AutoCAD
PENTASOFT
Extracting or Calculating Geometric Information from Objects (Inquiry Commands) The inquiry and calculation commands can provide information about objects in your drawing and do useful calculations.
The ID Command Displays the coordinate of a location Tools menu: Inquiry ID Point Command : id Point: Use the pointing device to specify a point
The UCS coordinate of the location is displayed on the command line. ID lists the X, Y, and Z values of the specified point and stores the coordinate of the specified point as the last point. You can reference the last point by entering @ at the next prompt that requests a point. If you snap to an object in 3D space, the Z coordinate value is the same as that of the selected feature of the object.
The LIST Command Displays database information for selected objects
Inquiry toolbar: Tools menu: Inquiry
List
Command : list Select objects: Use an object selection method
AutoCAD lists the object type, object layer, and X,Y,Z position relative to the current user coordinate system (UCS) and whether the object is in model space or paper space. LIST reports color, linetype, and lineweight information if these items are not set to BYLAYER. The thickness of an object is displayed if it is nonzero. Z coordinate information defines the elevation. If the extrusion direction of the entry differs from the Z axis (0,0,1) of the current UCS, LIST also reports the extrusion direction in UCS coordinates. LIST reports additional information related to the specific object selected.
Prepared by: Yamanta Raj Niroula
292
An Introduction to AutoCAD
Obtaining Distances, Locations:
PENTASOFT
Angles,
and
Point
To determine the relation between two points, you can display the • • • •
Distance between them Angle between the points in the XY plane Angle of the points from the XY plane Delta, or changed, X, Y, and Z distance between them
The DIST Command Measures the distance and angle between two points
Inquiry toolbar: Tools menu: Inquiry
Distance
Command : dist Specify first point: Specify a point Specify second point: Specify a point Distance = calculated distance, Angle in XY plane = angle, Angle from XY plane = angle Delta X = change in X, Delta Y = change in Y, Delta Z = change in Z
AutoCAD reports the true 3D distance between points. The angle in the XY plane is relative to the current X axis. The angle from the XY plane is relative to the current XY plane. DIST assumes the current elevation for the first or second point if you omit the Z coordinate value. AutoCAD displays the distance using the current units format.
Obtaining Area Information You can calculate and display the area and perimeter of a sequence of points or of any of several types of objects. If you need to calculate the combined area of more than
Prepared by: Yamanta Raj Niroula
293
An Introduction to AutoCAD
PENTASOFT
one object, you can keep a running total as you add or subtract one area at a time from the selection set. You cannot use window selection or crossing selection to select objects. Calculate a Defined Area You can measure an arbitrary closed region defined by the points you specify. The points must lie on a plane parallel to the XY plane of the current UCS.
Calculate the Area, Perimeter, or Circumference of an Object You can calculate the enclosed area and perimeter or circumference of circles, ellipses, polylines, polygons, regions, and AutoCAD 3D solids. The displayed information differs according to the type of object you select: • • • •
Circles. Area and circumference are displayed. Ellipses, closed polylines, polygons, planar closed spline curves, and regions. Area and perimeter are displayed. For wide polylines, this area is defined by the center of the width. Open objects such as open spline curves and open polylines. Area and length are displayed. The area is computed as though a straight line connected the start point and endpoint. AutoCAD 3D solids. Total 3D area for the object is displayed.
The AREA Command Calculates the area and perimeter of objects or of defined areas Total area and perimeter are saved in the AREA and PERIMETER system variables.
Inquiry toolbar: Tools menu: Inquiry
Area
Command: area Specify first corner point or [Object/Add/Subtract]: Specify a point (1) or enter an option
Prepared by: Yamanta Raj Niroula
294
An Introduction to AutoCAD
PENTASOFT
First Corner Point Calculates the area and perimeter you define by specifying points. All points must lie in a plane parallel to the XY plane of the current user coordinate system (UCS). Specify next corner point total: Specify a point (2)
or
press
ENTER
for
Continue to specify points to define a polygon and then press ENTER to complete the definition of the perimeter. If you do not close the polygon, AutoCAD calculates the area as if a line were drawn from the last point entered to the first. When calculating the perimeter, AutoCAD adds in that line length. Object Calculates the area and perimeter of the selected object. You can calculate the area of circles, ellipses, splines, polylines, polygons, regions, and solids. Note 2D solids (created with the SOLID command) do not have an area reported. Select objects:
If you select an open polyline, AutoCAD calculates the area as if a line were drawn from the last point entered to the first. When calculating the perimeter, however, AutoCAD ignores that line.
The centerline of a wide polyline is used to make area and perimeter (or length) calculations.
Add Turns on Add mode and keeps a running balance of the total area as you continue to define areas. The Add option calculates the individual areas and perimeters of defined
Prepared by: Yamanta Raj Niroula
295
An Introduction to AutoCAD
PENTASOFT
areas and objects as well as the total area of all defined areas and objects. You can use the Subtract option to subtract specified areas from the total area. Specify first corner point or [Object/Subtract]: Specify a point (1) or enter an option
First Corner Point Calculates the area and perimeter you define by selecting points. All points must lie in a plane parallel to the XY plane of the current UCS. Specify next corner point or press ENTER for total (ADD mode): Specify a point (2)
Specify points to define a polygon (3). Press ENTER and AutoCAD calculates the area and perimeter. Furthermore, AutoCAD returns the total area of all the areas defined by selecting points or objects since Add mode was turned on. If you do not close the polygon, AutoCAD calculates the area as if a line were drawn from the last point entered to the first. When calculating the perimeter, AutoCAD adds that line length. Object - Calculates the area and perimeter of the selected object. (ADD mode) Select objects:
AutoCAD calculates the area and perimeter. Furthermore, AutoCAD returns the total area of all the areas defined by selecting points or objects since Add mode was turned on. If you select an open polyline, AutoCAD calculates the area as if a line were drawn from the last point entered to the first. When calculating the perimeter, however, AutoCAD ignores that line. The centerline of a wide polyline is used to make area and perimeter calculations. Subtract - Turns on Subtract mode and keeps a running balance of the total area as you subtract specified areas. Subtract Similar to the Add option, but subtracts areas and perimeters. Example: How Various Areas Are Calculated
Prepared by: Yamanta Raj Niroula
296
An Introduction to AutoCAD
PENTASOFT
Calculate Combined Areas You can measure more than one area, either by specifying points or by selecting objects. For example, you can measure the total area of selected rooms in a floor plan. Subtract Areas from Combined Areas You can subtract one or more areas from a combined area that you have already calculated. In the example, the area of the floor plan is first calculated, and then a room is subtracted. Example: Subtraction of Areas from a Calculation In the following example, the closed polyline represents a metal plate with two large holes. You first calculate the area of the polyline and then subtract each hole. AutoCAD displays area and perimeter or circumference of each object and a running total after each step. Here is the command line sequence: Command: area Specify first corner point or [Object/Add/Subtract]: a Specify first corner point or [Object/Subtract]: o (ADD mode) Select objects: Select the polyline (1) Area = 0.34, Perimeter = 2.71 Total area = 0.34 (ADD mode) Select objects: Press ENTER Specify first corner point or [Object/Subtract]: s Specify first corner point or [Object/Add]: o (SUBTRACT mode) Select objects: Select the lower circle (2) Area = 0.02, Circumference = 0.46 Total area = 0.32
Prepared by: Yamanta Raj Niroula
297
An Introduction to AutoCAD
PENTASOFT
(SUBTRACT mode) Select objects: Select the upper circle (3) Area = 0.02, Circumference = 0.46 Total area = 0.30 (SUBTRACT mode) Select circle or polyline: Press ENTER Specify first corner point or [Object/Add]: Press ENTER
You can also use REGION to convert the plate and the holes to regions, subtract the holes, and then use the Properties palette or the LIST command to find the area of the plate.
Other Inquiry Tools: The remaining inquiry tools – Time, Status and Set Variable – represent a mixed bag of utilities. The Time and Status commands query the entire drawing rather than selected objects. The Set Variable command is simply a menu version of the setvar command.
The TIME Command Displays the date and time statistics of a drawing Tools menu: Inquiry Command : time
Time
TIME displays the following information: Current time: Wednesday, September 03, 1997 at 9:54:51:406 AM Times for this drawing: Created: Friday, July 25, 1994 at 1:21:36:203 AM Last Updated: Wednesday, September 03, 1997 at 9:49:19:208 AM Total Editing Time: 0 days 06:44:10.520 Elapsed Timer (on):0 days 00:07:05.312 Next Automatic Save In:0 days 01:59:15.570 Enter option [Display/On/OFF/Reset]: Enter an option or press ENTER
Current Time - Displays current date and time. AutoCAD displays all times to the nearest millisecond using a 24-hour clock. Created - Displays date and time the current drawing was created. Last Updated - Displays the date and time of the latest update of the current drawing. This date and time is initially the drawing creation time. AutoCAD revises it with each use of END or SAVE and applies the default file name. Total Editing Time - Displays time spent editing the current drawing. This timer is updated by AutoCAD and cannot be reset or stopped. Plotting time is not included in the total editing time. If you quit the editing session without saving the drawing, the time you spent in the editing session is not added to the accumulated editing time.
Prepared by: Yamanta Raj Niroula
298
An Introduction to AutoCAD
PENTASOFT
Elapsed Timer - Runs as another timer while AutoCAD is running. You can turn it on and off or reset it whenever you like. Next Automatic - Save In Indicates time remaining until the next automatic save. You can set the time interval using OPTIONS or the SAVETIME system variable. Display - Repeats the display with updated times. On - Starts the user elapsed timer if it was off. Off - Stops the user elapsed timer. Reset - Resets the user elapsed timer to 0 days 00:00:00.000.
The STATUS Command Displays drawing statistics, modes, and extents Tools menu: Inquiry
Status
Command: status
All coordinates and distances are displayed by STATUS in the format specified by UNITS. STATUS reports the number of objects in the current drawing. This includes graphical objects such as arcs and polylines, and nongraphical objects such as layers and linetypes, and block definitions. When used at the DIM prompt, STATUS reports the values and descriptions of all dimensioning system variables. In addition, STATUS displays the following information. Model or Paper Space Limits Are - Displays the drawing limits defined by LIMITS. The first line shows the XY coordinate of the limit’s lower-left corner, stored in the LIMMIN system variable. The second line shows the XY coordinate of the limit’s upperright corner, stored in the LIMMAX system variable. The notation Off to the right of the Y coordinate value indicates that limits checking is set to 0. Model or Paper Space Uses - Displays the drawing extents, which includes all objects in the database and can exceed the drawing limits. The first line shows the XY coordinate of the lower-left corner of the extents. The second line shows the XY coordinate of the upper-right corner. The notation Over to the right of the Y coordinate value indicates that the drawing extends outside the drawing limits. Display Shows - Lists the portion of the drawing extents visible in the current viewport. The first line shows the XY coordinate of the display’s lower-left corner. The second line shows the XY coordinate of the upper-right corner. Insertion Base Is - Displays the insertion point of the drawing, stored in the INSBASE system variable and expressed as an X,Y,Z coordinate. Snap Resolution Is - Displays the snap spacing in the X and Y directions, stored in the SNAPUNIT system variable. Prepared by: Yamanta Raj Niroula
299
An Introduction to AutoCAD
PENTASOFT
Grid Spacing Is - Displays the grid spacing in the X and Y directions, stored in the GRIDUNIT system variable. Current Space - Shows whether model space or paper space is active. Current Layer- Lists the current layer of the drawing, stored by the CLAYER system variable. Current Color - Lists the current color, stored by the CECOLOR system variable. Current Linetype - Lists the current linetype, stored by the CELTYPE system variable. Current Lineweight - Lists the current lineweight, stored by the CELWEIGHT system variable. Current Plot Style - Lists the current plot style, stored by the CPLOTSTYLE system variable. Current Elevation - Lists the current elevation of the drawing, stored in the ELEVATION system variable. Thickness - Lists the current thickness, stored in the THICKNESS system variable. Fill, Grid, Ortho, Qtext, Snap, Tablet - Shows whether these modes are on or off. Object Snap Modes - Lists the running object snap modes specified by OSNAP. Free Dwg Disk Space - Lists the amount of disk space available on the drive specified for AutoCAD temporary files. Free Physical Memory - Lists the amount of installed memory free on your system. Free Swap File Space - Lists the amount of free space in your swap file.
The SETVAR Command Lists or changes the values of system variables Tools menu: Inquiry Set Variable Command: setvar
Enter variable name or [?] : Enter a variable name, enter ?, or press ENTER
Variable Name - Specifies the name of the system variable you want to set. Enter new value for variable_name : Enter a new value or press ENTER
Prepared by: Yamanta Raj Niroula
300
An Introduction to AutoCAD
PENTASOFT
You can also change the value of system variables at the Command prompt by entering the name of the variable and its new value. ?—List Variables - Lists all system variables in the drawing and their current settings. Enter variable(s) to list <*>: Enter a wild-card pattern or press ENTER
Prepared by: Yamanta Raj Niroula
301
An Introduction to AutoCAD
PENTASOFT
Object Snap Introduction The Object Snaps (OSNAPS for short) are drawing aids which are used in conjunction with other commands to help you draw accurately. OSNAPS allow you to snap onto a specific object location when you are picking a point. For example, using OSNAPS you can accurately pick the end point of a line or the center of a circle. OSNAPS in AutoCAD are so important that you cannot draw accurately without them. For this reason, you must develop a good understanding of what the OSNAPS are and how they work. Object Snap tools are available from the Object Snap toolbar ( View - Toolbars to enable). They allow for precise drawing within AutoCAD. For example, a rectangle could be drawn from the exact endpoint of an existing line by simply selecting the ' Snap to Endpoint'tool, or we could draw a line from the centre point of a circle using the ' Snap to Center'tool. In many cases, object snap avoids the need to draw construction lines, thus making it quicker and easier to create precise, accurate drawings. This tutorial describes the use of all the osnaps. There are a number of worked examples which demonstrate Osnaps in use. Following these examples is probably the best way to understand the logic of Osnaps and to get an idea how they might be used in drawing practice. The tutorial also includes sections on tracking and the use of point filters. If you just need information quickly, use the Quick Find toolbar below to go straight to the information you need or select a topic from the contents list above. There are four basic methods of accessing the Osnaps: The Osnaps are available from a flyout button on the Standard toolbar. The Osnaps are also available on their own Object Snap toolbar. If this toolbar is not already displayed, you can display it using the TOOLBAR command, View > Toolbars… from the pull-down menu. When the Toolbar dialogue box appears, simply check the box next to "Object Snap" in the toolbars list. Many AutoCAD users work with the Object Snap toolbar permanently docked on their screen because it gives one-click access to all of the OSNAPS, making drawing much more efficient. You can also access the OSNAPS from the cursor menu. Hold the Shift key down on the keyboard and right-click the mouse to bring up the cursor menu. The menu appears at the current cursor position. Finally, you can also access the OSNAPS from the keyboard by typing their abbreviated name. See the exercise above and the sections below for details. The main reason for this flexibility in using the Object Snaps is that they are used very frequently. Experienced AutoCAD users will use Object Snaps all of the time because they are the only way to make sure that the objects you are drawing are drawn accurately. You must practice using Object Snaps until they become second nature.
Prepared by: Yamanta Raj Niroula
302
An Introduction to AutoCAD
PENTASOFT
There are thirteen Osnaps in all and although they are all useful in certain situations you will probably find yourself using about half of them on a regular basis and the other half in special circumstances. However, it' s a good idea to get to know all of the Osnaps so that you can plan your drawing, knowing all of the tools at your disposal. A sensible use of Osnaps is the best way to improve your drawing efficiency. Each of the sections below is accompanied by a small screen-shot illustrating the Osnap in use. In each case, drawing objects are shown in pale blue (cyan), the Osnap marker is shown in red and the cursor cross-hairs in white. The corresponding Snap Tip is also shown. Snap Tips appear if you let the cursor hover over an Osnap location for a second or so and have a similar function to the toolbar Tool Tips.
Using Object Snaps Instead of entering coordinates, you can specify points relative to existing objects such as endpoints of lines or center points of circles. Object snaps constrain point specification to exact locations, such as a midpoint or an intersection, on existing objects. Using object snaps is a quick way to locate an exact position on an object without having to know the coordinate or draw construction lines. For example, you can use an object snap to draw a line to the center of a circle or to the midpoint of a polyline segment. You can specify an object snap whenever AutoCAD prompts for a point. If AutoSnap™ is turned on, AutoCAD displays a marker and a tooltip whenever you move the target box over a snap point. This feature provides a visual clue that indicates which object snaps are in effect. There are a variety of ways to turn on object snaps. If you choose an individual object snap on the toolbar or enter its name on the command line, the snap stays in effect only for the next point you specify. You also can set running object snaps, that is, one or more object snaps that remain in effect as you work. Choose None to turn off both single and running object snaps.
Snap to a Single Point When you specify an object snap, the cursor changes to an object snap target box. When you select an object, AutoCAD snaps to the eligible snap point closest to the center of the target box, or aperture. The object snap buttons are located on the Object Snap flyout on the Standard toolbar.
Running Object Snaps If you need to use the same object snap repeatedly, you can set it as a running object snap, which means it stays on until you turn it off. For example, you might set Center as a running object snap if you need to connect the centers of a series of circles with a line. As with single object snaps, the aperture, or target box, indicates that an object snap is on and identifies the selection area. You can change the size of the target box.
Prepared by: Yamanta Raj Niroula
303
An Introduction to AutoCAD
PENTASOFT
When you turn on multiple running object snaps, AutoCAD uses the object snap most appropriate to the object you select. If two potential snap points fall within the selection area, AutoCAD snaps to the eligible point closest to the center of the target box. Note If several running object snaps are on, you need to check which one is in effect when you specify a point. If more than one object snap is eligible at a given location, press the TAB key to cycle through the possibilities before you specify the point.
Object Snap Restrictions Most of the object snaps that are described here affect only objects visible on the screen, including objects on locked layers, layout viewport boundaries, and polyline segments. You cannot snap to objects that are not visible, such as objects that are not displayed, objects on turned-off or frozen layers, or the blank portions of dashed lines. Object snaps work only when AutoCAD prompts for a point. If you try to use an object snap at the Command prompt, AutoCAD displays an error message. To snap to a geometric point on an object • • •
At the prompt for a point, hold down SHIFT and right-click in the drawing area. Then choose the object snap you want to use. Move your cursor over the desired snap location. If AutoSnap is on, your cursor automatically locks onto the snap location you selected, and a marker and tooltip indicates the snap point. Select an object. The cursor snaps to the eligible location closest to your selection. Press SHIFT and right-click (for object snap menu).
To set running object snaps • • • • •
From the Tools menu, choose Drafting Settings. In the Drafting Setting dialog box, Object Snap tab, select the object snaps you want to use. To change the size of the target box, choose Options. In the Options dialog box, Drafting tab, drag the slider bar under Aperture Size. Choose OK to exit each dialog box. Press SHIFT and right-click to display the object snap menu.
Object Snap toolbar: Command: OSNAP
To turn on and turn off running object snaps as you work •
On the status bar, click Osnap.
If running object snaps have been set, the previous settings are turned on or off. You can also press F3 to toggle running object snaps.
Prepared by: Yamanta Raj Niroula
304
An Introduction to AutoCAD
PENTASOFT
Set Visual Aids for Object Snaps (AutoSnap) Object snaps include a visual aid called AutoSnap™ to help you see and use object snaps more efficiently. When you use any of the object snap settings, AutoSnap displays a marker and a tooltip when you move your cursor over a snap point. AutoSnap is automatically turned on when you enter an object snap on the command line or turn on object snaps in the Drafting Settings dialog box. AutoSnap Tools AutoSnap consists of the following snap tools: • • • •
Marker. Displays the object snap location when the cursor moves over or near an object. Marker shape is dependent on the snap it is marking. Tooltip. Describes which part of the object you are snapping to in a small flag at the cursor location. Magnet. Attracts and locks the cursor onto the nearest detected snap points. Provides a visual cue, similar to snapping to a grid. Aperture box. Surrounds the crosshairs and defines an area within which, as you move the cursor, AutoCAD evaluates objects for object snaps. You can choose to display or not display the aperture box, and you can change the aperture box size.
Turn Object Snap and AutoSnap On and Off After you set running object snaps, click Osnap on the status bar to turn all of them on and off without displaying the Drafting Settings dialog box (or press CTRL + F or F3). If no running object snaps are set, the Drafting Settings dialog box is displayed when you click Osnap. The AutoSnap markers, tooltips, and magnet are turned on by default. You can change AutoSnap settings in the Options dialog box. Use AutoSnap to Confirm or Change an Object Snap If you have set more than one running object snap, you can press TAB to cycle through all the object snap points available for a particular object. For example, if you press TAB while the cursor is on a circle, AutoSnap displays options for snapping to the quadrant, intersection, and center. To change the AutoSnap settings • • •
From the Tools menu, choose Options. In the Options dialog box, choose the Drafting tab. On the Drafting tab, change settings as needed: o Marker. Turns the marker on or off. o Magnet. Turns the magnet on or off. o Display AutoSnap Tooltip. Turns tool tips on or off. o Display AutoSnap Aperture Box. Turns the target box on or off when you specify an object snap. This setting does not affect object snaps when you are not using AutoSnap. o AutoSnap Marker Color. Changes the color of the marker.
Prepared by: Yamanta Raj Niroula
305
An Introduction to AutoCAD
•
PENTASOFT
o AutoSnap Marker Size. Adjusts the size of the marker. Choose OK. Press SHIFT and right-click to display the object snap menu.
Restrict Cursor Movement Several tools are available that you can use to restrict or lock the movement of your cursor.
Grid and Grid Snap The grid is a rectangular pattern of dots that extends over the area you specify as the drawing limits. Using the grid is similar to placing a sheet of grid paper under a drawing. The grid helps you align objects and visualize the distances between them. The grid is not plotted. If you zoom in or out of your drawing, you may need to adjust grid spacing to be more appropriate for the new magnification. Snap mode restricts the movement of the crosshairs to intervals that you define. When Snap mode is on, the cursor seems to adhere, or "snap," to an invisible rectangular grid. Snap is useful for specifying precise points with the arrow keys or the pointing device.
Change Grid and Snap Spacing As you work, you can turn Grid and Snap mode on and off, and you can change the grid and snap spacing. Snap spacing does not have to match grid spacing. For example, you might set a wide grid spacing to be used as a reference but maintain a closer snap spacing for accuracy in specifying points.
Change the Snap Angle and Base Point If you need to draw along a specific alignment or angle, you can change the snap angle. This rotation realigns the crosshairs on the screen to match the new angle. In the following example, the snap angle is adjusted to match the angle of the anchor bracket.
Prepared by: Yamanta Raj Niroula
306
An Introduction to AutoCAD
PENTASOFT
When you set the snap angle, the grid rotation also changes. default snap angle - 0 Degrees rotated snap angle - 30 degrees. The snap base point is the offset from a specified X,Y value from which snap points are measured. The default snap base point is 0,0, but it can be changed to any X,Y coordinate value to adjust snap points. For example, if X and Y spacing are set to 0.5, and X and Y base points are set to 0,0, the snap points along the X and Y axes are 0, .50, 1.0, and so on. Changing the X snap base point to 0.1 and the Y snap base point to 0.2 causes the snap points along the X axis to shift to 0.1, 0.60, 1.1, and so on, and the snap points along the Y axis to shift to 0.2, 0.7, 1.2, and so on. Shifting the snap base point may be necessary to align a hatch pattern. To display a grid and set grid spacing • • • • • •
From the Tools menu, choose Drafting Settings. In the Drafting Settings dialog box, Snap & Grid tab, select Grid On to display the grid. Under Snap Type and Style, make sure Grid Snap and Rectangular Snap are selected. For grid X Spacing, enter the horizontal grid spacing in units. To use the same value for vertical grid spacing, press ENTER. Otherwise, enter a new value for grid Y Spacing. Choose OK.
Although the grid dots do not necessarily correspond to the current snap interval, they do reflect the current snap angle and isometric snap and grid settings. Command : DSETTINGS
To turn on Snap mode and set snap spacing • • • • • • •
From the Tools menu, choose Drafting Settings. In the Drafting Settings dialog box, Snap & Grid tab, select Snap On. Under Snap Type and Style, make sure Grid Snap and Rectangular Snap are selected. In Snap Type & Style, select Grid Snap. In the Grid X Spacing box, enter the horizontal snap spacing value in units. To specify the same vertical snap spacing, press ENTER. Otherwise, enter a new distance in the Grid Y Spacing box. Choose OK.
To rotate the snap angle and change its base point • • • •
From the Tools menu, choose Drafting Settings. In the Drafting Settings dialog box, Snap & Grid tab, under Snap, enter a rotation angle in the Angle box. If you want to set the base point in order to align snap locations, enter the X and Y coordinate values in the X Base and Y Base boxes. Choose OK.
Prepared by: Yamanta Raj Niroula
307
An Introduction to AutoCAD
PENTASOFT
Orthogonal Locking (Ortho Mode) AutoCAD provides drawing and editing tools similar to the drafter' s T-square. As you create or move objects, you can use Ortho mode to restrict the cursor to the horizontal or vertical axis. The orthogonal alignment depends on the current snap angle, UCS, or isometric grid and snap setting. Ortho works with commands that require you to specify a second point. You can turn Ortho on and off at any time during drawing and editing. You can use Ortho not only to establish vertical or horizontal alignments but also to enforce parallelism or to create regular offsets from existing objects. By imposing orthogonal constraints, you can draw more quickly. For example, you can create a series of perpendicular lines by turning on Ortho mode before you start. Because the lines are constrained to be parallel to the horizontal and vertical axes, you know that the lines are perpendicular. As you move the cursor, a rubber-band line that defines the displacement follows the horizontal or vertical axis, depending on which axis is nearest to the cursor. AutoCAD overrides Ortho when you enter coordinates on the command line, use perspective views, or specify an object snap. Note - Ortho mode and polar tracking cannot be on at the same time. Turning on Ortho turns off polar tracking. To turn on or turn off Ortho mode •
On the status bar, click Ortho.
Note -Turning on Ortho automatically turns off polar tracking. Command : ORTHO
Polar Tracking and PolarSnap When you are creating or modifying objects, you can use polar tracking to display temporary alignment paths defined by the polar angles you specify. You can use PolarSnap™ to snap to specified distances along the alignment path. For example, in the following illustration you draw a two-unit line from point 1 to point 2, and then draw a two-unit line to point 3 at a 45- degree angle to the line. If you turn on the 45-degree polar angle increment, AutoCAD displays an alignment path and tooltip when your cursor crosses the 0 or 45-degree angles. The alignment path and tooltip disappear when you move the cursor away from the angle.
As you move your cursor, alignment paths and tooltips are displayed when you move the cursor near polar angles. The default angle measurement is 90 degrees. Use the Prepared by: Yamanta Raj Niroula
308
An Introduction to AutoCAD
PENTASOFT
alignment path and tooltip to draw your object. You can use polar tracking with Intersection and Apparent Intersection object snaps to find where a polar alignment path intersects another object. Note - Ortho mode restricts the cursor to horizontal or vertical (orthogonal) axes. Because you cannot have Ortho mode and polar tracking turned on at the same time, AutoCAD turns polar tracking off when you turn on Ortho mode. If you turn polar tracking back on, AutoCAD turns Ortho mode off. Similarly, if you turn PolarSnap on, grid snap is turned off automatically.
Polar Angles (Polar Tracking) You can use polar tracking to track along polar angle increments of 90, 60, 45, 30, 22.5, 18, 15, 10, and 5 degrees, or you can specify other angles. The following illustration shows the alignment paths displayed as you move your cursor 90 degrees with the polar angle increment set to 30 degrees.
The orientation of 0 depends on the angle you set in the Drawing Units dialog box (UNITS). The direction of snap (clockwise or counterclockwise) depends on the units direction you specify when setting units of measurement.
Polar Distances (PolarSnap) PolarSnap restricts cursor movement to increments of a polar distance you specify. For example, if you specify a length of 4 units, the cursor snaps from the first point specified to lengths of 0, 4, 8, 12, 16, and so on. As you move your cursor, a tooltip indicates the nearest PolarSnap increment. To restrict point entry to polar distances, both polar tracking and Snap mode (set to PolarSnap) must be on. To turn on and turn off polar tracking •
Press F10, or click Polar on the status bar.
To set polar snap distance • • •
From the Tools menu, choose Drafting Settings. In the Drafting Settings dialog box, Snap and Grid tab, select Snap On. In Snap Type & Style, select PolarSnap.
Prepared by: Yamanta Raj Niroula
309
An Introduction to AutoCAD
PENTASOFT
• • •
Under Polar Spacing, enter the polar distance. Choose the Polar Tracking tab and select Polar Tracking On. Select the angle from the Increment Angle list.
•
You can specify your own angles by choosing Additional Angles and then New. Choose OK.
To draw objects using polar tracking • •
Turn on polar tracking and start a drawing command, such as ARC, CIRCLE, or LINE. You can also use polar tracking with editing commands, such as COPY and MOVE. As you move your cursor to specify points, notice the dotted polar tracking line that appears at the tracking angles you specified. Points you specify while the line is displayed conform to the polar tracking angle.
Command :DSETTINGS
To draw objects using polar distance • • • •
Turn on snap and polar tracking. Make sure Polar Snap is selected in the Drafting Settings dialog box, Snap & Grid tab. Start a drawing command, such as LINE. As you move your cursor, notice that the dotted polar tracking line displays a tooltip that shows distance and angle. Specify a point. The length of the new line conforms to the polar distance.
To set polar tracking angles • • • • • •
From the Tools menu, choose Drafting Settings. In the Drafting Settings dialog box, on the Polar Tracking tab, select Polar Tracking On. In the Increment Angle list, select the polar tracking angle. To set additional tracking angles, select Additional Angles. Then click New and enter the angle value in the text box. Under Polar Angle Measurement, specify whether polar tracking increments are based on the UCS or relative to the last object you created. Choose OK.
Lock an Angle for One Point (Angle Override) You can specify an angle override that locks the cursor for the next point entered. To specify an angle override, enter a left angle bracket (<) followed by an angle whenever a command asks you to specify a point. The command prompt sequence below shows a 30-degree override entered during a LINE command. Command: line Specify first point: Specify a start point for the line Specify next point or [Undo]: <30
Prepared by: Yamanta Raj Niroula
310
An Introduction to AutoCAD
PENTASOFT
Angle Override: 30 Specify next point or [Undo]: Specify a point
The angle you specify will lock the cursor, overriding Grid Snap, Ortho mode, and PolarSnap. Coordinate entry and object snaps have precedence over an angle override.
Combine or Offset Points and Coordinates To specify new point locations, you can combine the coordinates of several points or you can specify offsets from existing objects.
Combine Coordinate Values (Coordinate Filters) You can use coordinate filters to specify one coordinate value at a time while temporarily ignoring other coordinate values. When used with object snaps, coordinate filters can extract coordinate values from an existing object so you can locate another point. Specifying a coordinate filter limits the next entry to a specific coordinate value, such as the X or the Y value, or even an X,Y value. For 3D models, you also can specify Z values. After you specify the first value, AutoCAD prompts you for the remaining coordinate values. Example: Use of Coordinate Filters to Specify a Center Point In the following illustration, the hole in the holding plate was centered in the rectangle by extracting the X,Y coordinates from the midpoints of the plate’s horizontal and vertical line segments.
Here is the command line sequence: Command: circle Specify center point for circle or [3P/2P/Ttr (tangent tangent radius)]: .x of: mid of: Select the horizontal line on the lower edge of the holding plate of: (need YZ): mid of: Select the vertical line on the left side of the holding plate of: Diameter/ Specify the radius of the hole
Coordinate filters work only when AutoCAD prompts you for a point. If you try to use a coordinate filter at the Command prompt, AutoCAD displays an error message.
Prepared by: Yamanta Raj Niroula
311
An Introduction to AutoCAD
PENTASOFT
To use coordinate filters to specify a point in 2D • • •
At the prompt for a point, enter a coordinate filter (.x or .y). For example, enter .x to specify the X value first. To extract the first coordinate value, specify a point. For example, if you entered .x in step 1, AutoCAD extracts the X value from this point. To extract the next coordinate value, specify a different point at the prompt for the remaining coordinate values.
For example, if you entered .x in step 1, AutoCAD prompts for the Y and Z coordinate values. AutoCAD defines a new point at a location that combines the coordinate values extracted from the points you specified in steps 2 and 3. Note - Instead of specifying a point in steps 2 or 3, you can enter a numeric value. To use coordinate filters to specify a point in 3D • • •
At the prompt for a point, enter a coordinate filter (.x, .y, .z, .xy, .xz, or .yz). For example, enter .x to specify the X value first. To extract the specified coordinate value(s), specify a point. For example, if you entered .x in step 1, AutoCAD extracts the X value from this point. At the prompt for the remaining coordinates, do one of the following: o Extract the remaining coordinate values by specifying a point. o Enter another coordinate filter and return to step 2.
For example, if you entered .x in step 1, AutoCAD prompts for the Y and Z coordinate values. Specify a second point to extract the Y and Z coordinates simultaneously, or enter .y or .z to specify Y and Z values separately. AutoCAD defines a new point at a location that combines the coordinate values extracted from the points specified in steps 2 and 3. Note - Instead of specifying a point in steps 2 or 3, you can enter a numeric value.
Object SnapTracking AutoTrack™ helps you draw objects at specific angles or in specific relationships to other objects. When you turn on AutoTrack, temporary alignment paths help you create objects at precise positions and angles. AutoTrack includes two tracking options: polar tracking and object snap tracking. You can toggle AutoTrack on and off with the Polar and Otrack buttons on the status bar. Object snap tracking works in conjunction with object snaps. You must set an object snap before you can track from an object’s snap point. Use object snap tracking to track along alignment paths that are based on object snap points. Acquired points display a small plus sign (+), and you can acquire up to seven tracking points at a time. After you acquire a point, horizontal, vertical, or polar alignment paths relative to the point are displayed as you move the cursor over their drawing paths. For example, you can select a point along a path based on an object endpoint or midpoint or an intersection between objects.
Prepared by: Yamanta Raj Niroula
312
An Introduction to AutoCAD
PENTASOFT
In the following illustration, the Endpoint object snap is on. You start a line by clicking its start point (1), move the cursor over another line’s endpoint (2) to acquire it, and then move the cursor along the horizontal alignment path to locate the endpoint you want for the line you are drawing (3).
Change Object Snap Tracking Settings By default, object snap tracking is set to orthogonal. Alignment paths are displayed at 0, 90, 180, and 270 degrees from acquired object points. However, you can use polar tracking angles instead. For object snap tracking, AutoCAD automatically acquires object points. However, you can choose to acquire points only when you press SHIFT. Change Alignment Path Display You can change how AutoTrack displays alignment paths, and you can change how AutoCAD acquires object points for object snap tracking. By default, alignment paths stretch to the end of the drawing window. You can change their display to abbreviated lengths, or no length. Tips for Using Object Snap Tracking As you use AutoTrack (polar tracking and object snap tracking), you will discover techniques that make specific design tasks easier. Here are a few you might try. • • •
•
•
Use Perpendicular, End, and Mid object snaps with object snap tracking to draw to points that are perpendicular to the end and midpoints of objects. Use the Tangent and End object snaps with object snap tracking to draw to points that are tangent to the endpoints of arcs. Use object snap tracking with temporary tracking points. At a point prompt, enter tt, then specify a temporary tracking point. A small + appears at the point. As you move your cursor, AutoTrack alignment paths are displayed relative to the temporary point. To remove the point, move the cursor back over the +. After you acquire an object snap point, use direct distance to specify points at precise distances along alignment paths from the acquired object snap point. To specify a point prompt, select an object snap, move the cursor to display an alignment path, then enter a distance at the Command prompt. Use the Automatic and Shift to Acquire options set on the Drafting tab of the Options dialog box to manage point acquisition. Point acquisition is set to Automatic by default. When working in close quarters, press SHIFT to temporarily avoid acquiring a point.
Prepared by: Yamanta Raj Niroula
313
An Introduction to AutoCAD
PENTASOFT
To turn on and turn off object snap tracking •
Press F11, or click Otrack on the status bar.
To change AutoTrack settings • • • • • • • • •
From the Tools menu, select Options. In the Options dialog box, choose the Drafting tab. Under AutoTrack Settings, select or clear the following alignment path display options: Display Polar Tracking Vector. Controls alignment path display for object snap tracking. When cleared, no polar tracking path is displayed. Display Full Screen Tracking Vector. Controls alignment path display for object snap tracking. When cleared, an alignment path is displayed only from the object snap point to the cursor. Display AutoTrack Tooltip. Controls the display of AutoTrack tooltips. Tooltips tell you the type of object snap (for object snap tracking), alignment angle, and distance from the previous point. Under Alignment Point Acquisition, select a method for acquiring object points for object snap tracking: Automatic. Acquires object points automatically. If you select this option, you can press SHIFT to not acquire an object point. Shift to Acquire. Acquires object points only when you press SHIFT while the cursor is over an object snap point.
Command : OPTIONS
Snap Tools From left to right on the above toolbar screen shot (Note: Dependant on your version of AutoCAD, some snap settings may not be available). Snap to Endpoint:This will select the endpoint of any line or polyline segment. Also works on ' closed'objects such as rectangles. Snap to Midpoint:Very handy tool. This will select the mid-point of any line segment. Snap to Intersection:Selects the exact point at which two lines cross. Snap to Apparent Intersection:Similar to above, although the lines don' t have to intersect. This snap requires you to select a line, then hover the cursor over any other line, the marker will let you select the point where the two lines would intersect if they were extended. Snap to Extension:-
Prepared by: Yamanta Raj Niroula
314
An Introduction to AutoCAD
PENTASOFT
This snap tool enables you to select a point along the same orientation as an existing line, with a handy readout of the angle and position of the point (See screen shot below). Snap to Center:This handy snap function selects the perfect centre of an existing circle. Even more impressive however is that the centurion of an arc or semi-circle can also be selected. Snap to Quadrant:Snap to the four quadrant points of a circle (Top, bottom, left and right). Snap to Tangent:As it says, snaps to the tangent point of an arc. Snap to Perpendicular:Snaps to the perpendicular point on an object from the original start point. Pretty straightforward, and very useful. Snap to Parallel:Snaps parallel to a specified line. Snap to Insert:Snaps to the insert point of an object, such as an inserted block. Not really that useful. Snap to Node:Snaps to points drawn using the POINT command. Snap to Nearest:Should be called snap to anything! Quite literally will snap to anywhere along any length of any object. Can be useful though while ' sketching'with AutoCAD, or perhaps laying down a few construction lines.
An Example This simple example is to give you an idea how Osnaps work. Follow the command sequence below to draw a circle and then to draw a line from the center point of the circle to a point on the circle' s circumference at the 12 o' clock position. To Draw the Circle Command: CIRCLE Specify center point for circle or [3P/2P/Ttr (tan tan radius)]: (pick a point in the middle of the drawing window) Specify radius of circle or [Diameter]: (pick another point to draw the circle, the size is not important)
Prepared by: Yamanta Raj Niroula
315
An Introduction to AutoCAD
PENTASOFT
To Draw the Line using Osnaps Command: LINE From point: CEN (this is the short-cut for the Center Osnap) of (pick point P1 on the circumference of the circle) To point: QUA (this is the short-cut for the Quadrant Osnap) of (pick point P2 on the circumference of the circle) To point: Enter(to end)
You have now drawn a line from the exact centre of the circle to a point on the circle circumference vertically above the centre. The line is drawn with perfect geometric accuracy. When you use Osnaps you need only pick a point which is near to the point required because AutoCAD automatically snaps to the object location implied by the particular Osnap you use. Notice that when you move the cursor close enough to an Osnap location, it is highlighted with an Osnap marker. Each Osnap has a different marker. As you have already seen, the Center Osnap marker is a circle and the Quadrant Osnap marker is a diamond. Notice also that when you move the cursor over a snap point the cursor jumps to the snap location. This feature is known as Magnet. One thing that often catches new users out is that when you want to snap to the centre of a circle, the cursor must pass over the circle' s circumference. This is because the circle has no solidity, it is only an outline. Although you can get quite close to the result above by picking freehand you will never be able to pick as accurately as you can using Osnaps. Many AutoCAD commands rely upon the fact that objects have been drawn accurately and so you should always use Osnaps when you need to pick a point at a particular location.
Object Snaps Endpoint Toolbar Pull-down Keyboard
Standard Shift + Right Click Endpoint END (when selecting objects)
The Endpoint Osnap snaps to the end points of lines and arcs and to polyline vertices. This is one of the most useful and commonly used Osnaps.
Midpoint Toolbar Pull-down Keyboard
Standard Shift + Right Click Midpoint MID (when picking)
The Midpoint Osnap snaps to the mid points of lines and arcs and to the mid point of polyline segments.
Prepared by: Yamanta Raj Niroula
316
An Introduction to AutoCAD
PENTASOFT
Intersection Toolbar Pull-down Keyboard
Standard Shift + Right Click Intersection INT (when picking)
The Intersection Osnap snaps to the physical intersection of any two drawing objects (i.e. where lines, arcs or circles etc. cross each other) and to Polyline vertices. However, this osnap can also be used to snap to intersection points which do not physically exist. This feature is called the Extended Intersection (see the illustration on the right). To use the apparent intersection feature, you must pick two points to indicate which two objects should be used.
Apparent Intersect Toolbar Pull-down Keyboard
Standard Shift + Right Click Apparent Intersect APP or APPINT (when picking)
Apparent Intersection snaps to the point where objects appear to intersect in the current view. For example, you may be looking at a drawing in plan view where two lines cross, as in the illustration. However, since AutoCAD is a 3 dimensional drawing environment, the two lines may not physically intersect. One line may be at ground level and the other may be 10 meters or more above or below ground level. As with the Intersection Osnap, Apparent Intersection also has an "Extended" mode.
Extension Toolbar Pull-down Keyboard
Standard Shift + Right Click Extension EXT or EXTEN (when picking)
The Extension Osnap enables you to snap to some point along the imaginary extension of a line, arc or polyline segment. To use this osnap, you must hover the cursor over the end of the line you want to extend. When the line end is found, a small cross appears at the endpoint and a dashed extension line is displayed from the endpoint to the cursor, providing the cursor remains close to the extension. The Snap Tip for Extension also includes the relative polar co-ordinate of the current cursor position. This can be a useful guide for positioning your next pick point. The co-ordinate includes a distance from the endpoint and the angle of the extension. In the case of the arc extension, the Snap Tip displays the distance along the arc.
Center Toolbar Pull-down Keyboard
Standard Shift + Right Click Center CEN (when picking)
The Center Osnap snaps to the centre of a circle, arc or polyline arc segment. The cursor must pass over the circumference of the circle or the arc so that the centre can be found. This often causes some confusion for new users.
Prepared by: Yamanta Raj Niroula
317
An Introduction to AutoCAD
PENTASOFT
Quadrant Toolbar Pull-down Keyboard
Standard Shift + Right Click Quadrant QUA or QUAD (when picking)
The Quadrant Osnap snaps to one of the four circle quadrant points located at north, south, east and west or 90, 270, 0 and 180 degrees respectively.
Tangent Toolbar Pull-down Keyboard
Standard Shift + Right Click Tangent TAN (when picking)
The Tangent Osnap snaps to a tangent point on a circle. This osnap works in two ways. You can either draw a line from a point to the tangent point (see illustration) or you can draw a line from a tangent point, the latter is referred to as the "Deferred Tangent" snap mode.
Perpendicular Toolbar Pull-down Keyboard
Standard Shift + Right Click Perpendicular PER or PERP (when picking)
The Perpendicular Osnap snaps to a point which forms a perpendicular with the selected object. As with the Tangent Osnap, Perpendicular can be used to draw a line to a perpendicular point, as in the illustration or from a perpendicular point, known as the "Deferred Perpendicular" snap mode.
Parallel Toolbar Pull-down Keyboard
Standard Shift + Right Click Parallel PAR or PARA (when picking)
The Parallel Osnap is used to draw a line parallel to any other line in your drawing. In operation, this osnap is slightly less intuitive than some of the others. To draw a parallel line, first start the Line command, specify the first point when prompted and then start the Parallel Osnap. Hover the cursor over an existing line until you see the Parallel snap marker. Now, move the cursor close to a parallel position and a dotted line will appear, indicating the parallel. You can now pick the second point of your line. The Snap Tip also includes a relative polar co-ordinate.
Insert Toolbar Pull-down
Standard Shift + Right
Prepared by: Yamanta Raj Niroula
Click Insert 318
An Introduction to AutoCAD Keyboard
Node
PENTASOFT
INS (when picking)
The Insert Osnap snaps to the insertion point of a block, text or an image.
Toolbar Pull-down Keyboard
Standard Shift + Right Click Node NODE (when picking)
The Node Osnap snaps to the center of a Point object. This osnap can be useful if you have created a number of Points with the Measure or Divide commands. You could, for example insert a number of regularly spaced tree symbols (blocks) along a line by using the Node Osnap for the insertion point of each block.
Nearest Toolbar Pull-down Keyboard
Standard Shift + Right Click Nearest NEA or NEAR (when picking)
The Nearest Osnap snaps to the nearest point on a drawing object. This Osnap is useful if you want to make sure that a pick point lies on a drawing object but you don' t necessarily mind exactly where it is located.
Using the From Object Snap The From Object Snap is a little more complicated than the other object snaps but it is well worth getting to know because it can be very useful.
From Toolbar Pull-down Keyboard
Shift + Right Click From FRO or FROM (when picking)
The From Osnap can be used in conjunction with other osnaps or ordinary pick points and relative co-ordinates to pick offset points. The From Osnap does not snap to object snap locations, rather it can be used to snap to points at some distance or offset from an object snap location. Consider the following example. Look at the illustration on the right. It shows a circle drawn on top of a line. It is quite difficult to see how this circle could have been drawn accurately without the use of construction lines. However, the From Osnap can be used to draw the circle without any construction lines. Follow the command sequence below to discover how this is done. To draw the Line Command: LINE Specify first point: (pick a point in the lower half of the drawing area) Specify next point or [Undo]: @0,30 (a relative co-ordinate, 30 units above the first point) Specify next point or [Undo]: (to end)
Prepared by: Yamanta Raj Niroula
319
An Introduction to AutoCAD
PENTASOFT
To draw the Circle Command: CIRCLE Specify center point for circle or [3P/2P/Ttr (tan tan radius)]: FROM Base point: END of : @0,10 (this co-ordinate is a point 10 units above the endpoint) Specify radius of circle or [Diameter] <10.0000>: 10 (a radius value of 10 ensures that the southern point on the circle will touch the top of the line)
Running Object Snaps Toolbar Pull-down Keyboard
Tools Drafting Settings… DDOSNAP
Using the Object Snaps as described above can sometimes be a consuming process. Every time you want to snap to an endpoint, you need to click on the Snap to Endpoint button. If you have a lot of endpoints to snap to, this can become a little tedious. For example, when we used the Node Osnap to insert lots of tree symbols, above, the Snap to Node button had to be clicked each time an insert point was picked. Wouldn' t it be great if there was a way to have osnaps running in the background so that you could snap without having to invoke the snap tools explicitly? Well, the good news is that AutoCAD provides just such a facility and it is called Running Object Snaps. You may already have been using running object snaps without noticing it. When you first start AutoCAD, a number of running object snaps are set by default. If you hover the cursor over an endpoint while being prompted to specify a point, you may see the square osnap marker spontaneously appear. I so, you have running object snaps set on. Running object snaps can be configured using the Object Snap tab of the Drafting Settings dialogue box, illustrated below. This tabbed dialogue box and also includes settings for Snap and Grid and for Polar Tracking. The Drafting Settings dialogue box can be used to set one or more osnaps so that you don' t need to keep invoking them as you draw. For example, if your drawing requires the use of a number of Center and Endpoint snaps, use the Drafting Settings dialogue box to set these two osnaps on by checking the box next to their respective names. Try setting some running osnaps now. From the pull-down menu select Tools Drafting Settings… and when the dialogue box appears, click on the Object Snap tab to display the Object Snap settings. Check the boxes against the Center and Endpoint osnaps if they are not already selected. Now, make sure that the "Object Snap On (F3)" box is checked as in the illustration on the right. Click the "OK" button to confirm your settings. The selected osnaps will remain running until you turn them off by deselecting them in the Osnap Settings dialogue box. However, sometimes you may simply want to suspend the running osnaps temporarily. To do this, click the OSNAP button on the status bar at the bottom of the screen or use the F3 key on the keyboard. This button acts as a toggle, so you just need to click it again to set running object snaps back on. Try this now and notice that the OSNAP button appears "pushed in" when toggled on and "popped out" Prepared by: Yamanta Raj Niroula
320
An Introduction to AutoCAD
PENTASOFT
when toggled off. This visual clue is useful because you can see at a glance whether your object snaps are running or not. Incidentally, you can also use the OSNAP button to launch the Drafting Settings dialogue box. Right-click on the button and select "settings…" from the context menu.
None Sometimes you may only want to suspend running osnaps for a single pick. In such situations it is more efficient to use the None Osnap. This osnap works in the same way as the others, so when you are prompted to pick a point, use None to suspend all running object snaps for that pick only. Toolbar Pull-down Keyboard
None Shift + Right Click None NONE (when picking)
The None Osnap is not an osnap in the true sense of the word. It is really an osnap utility but it can be very useful when your drawing becomes complicated and it becomes impossible to pick the point you need without snapping to some other point.
AutoSnap You may not have realized it but you have already been using the AutoSnap features. Using the Drafting tab of the Options dialogue box, part of which is shown on the right, you can control all of the AutoSnap features. By default, all features are turned on except for the aperture box. You can easily toggle the Marker, Magnet and Snap Tip features on and off by checking or unchecking their respective boxes. Notice that you can also adjust the marker size using the slider and you can change the marker color. The default marker color is yellow which works well with the traditional black AutoCAD background but you may wish to change this if you prefer working with a white background.
The Aperture Box You may have noticed the Drafting tab of the Options dialogue box also includes a slider which controls the size of the "Aperture Box". The size of the aperture box determines how wide an area AutoCAD uses to look for object snap locations. By default the aperture box is not displayed. However, you can force the aperture box to display by checking the "Display AutoSnap aperture box" option under AutoSnap Settings. Each time you use an osnap to pick a point, the aperture box will appear at the center of the cross hairs (as in the illustration above) to indicate the area AutoCAD uses to search for object snaps. In general the default size setting is perfectly adequate. It may be necessary to reduce the aperture box size if your drawing becomes very complicated and it becomes difficult to easily select the required osnap point. You can also control the aperture box size from the keyboard using the APERTURE command. Use this command to set the object snap target height anywhere from 1 to 50 pixels. The default value is 10.
Prepared by: Yamanta Raj Niroula
321
An Introduction to AutoCAD
PENTASOFT
Object Snap Cycling Using object snaps is a great way to construct accurate drawings. However, when drawing become very complex, it can be quite difficult to pick the exact point you want. This is particularly problematic if there are a number of possible snap points in close proximity. Fortunately, AutoCAD has a little feature to help in such circumstances. The aperture box, described above, controls the extent of the search for object snaps from the current cursor position. However, it cannot help you select a particular snap point within that area. The Object Snap Cycling feature allows you to cycle through all valid snap points within the aperture area, until you find the one you want. This feature only works when running object snaps are turned on. However, it is not necessary for the aperture box to be displayed. Once the snap marker appears, you can cycle through other local snap points by pressing the TAB key on the keyboard. Each time TAB is pressed, the next snap point is highlighted along with the object or objects to which it belongs. The illustrations above show just 3 of the valid snap points in this particular arrangement of objects. Using this feature, you can be absolutely sure that you are selecting the point you want, no matter how complex the arrangement of objects.
Using Temporary Tracking Points Toolbar Pull-down Keyboard
Shift + Right Click TT (when picking)
Temporary track point
Tracking is similar to the From Object Snap in that it can be used to avoid the necessity of drawing construction lines in order to locate points. Consider the following scenario: You have drawn a rectangle in AutoCAD. You do not know the exact size of the rectangle. You need to draw a circumscribed circle i.e. a circle which just touches all four corners of the rectangle (see illustration on the right). Conventionally the only way to accurately find the centre point of this circle is to draw a construction line from two diagonally opposite corners using the Endpoint or Intersection Osnaps. The centre point can then be found by snapping to the Midpoint of this construction line (see illustration on the left). Tracking enables you to accurately locate the centre point without drawing any construction lines. Follow the command sequence below to find out how tracking works. To Draw the Rectangle Command: RECTANG Specify first corner point or [Chamfer/Elevation/Fillet/Thickness/Width]: (pick a point) Specify other corner point: (pick another point to draw the rectangle, the size is not important)
Prepared by: Yamanta Raj Niroula
322
An Introduction to AutoCAD
PENTASOFT
To Draw the Circle Command: CIRCLE Specify center point for circle or [3P/2P/Ttr (tan tan radius)]: TT Specify temporary OTRACK point: MID of (pick the left side of the rectangle) Specify center point for circle or [3P/2P/Ttr (tan tan radius)]: TT Specify temporary OTRACK point: MID of (pick the bottom line of the rectangle) Specify center point for circle or [3P/2P/Ttr (tan tan radius)]: (move the cursor close to the circle center location)
Center lines appear through the two midpoint osnaps and the intersection of these lines is marked with a cross (see the image below). When you see the cross, click your mouse button to pick. Diameter/: END of (pick the top right corner of the rectangle)
The circle is now drawn and your drawing should look similar to the illustration above. As you can see, the use of temporary tracking points can be incredibly useful and can really speed up your drawing technique. Tracking, like the From Osnap can seem quite tricky to use at first but both tools are well worth getting to know well since they can save you hours of drawing time.
Object Snap Tracking Object snap tracking is to temporary tracking points what running object snap is to object snaps. Essentially, it enables you to have tracking running in the background so that you need not use temporary tracking points. However, for object snap tracking to work, running object snaps must also be defined and turned on. You control the use of object snap tracking with the OTRACK button on the status bar or with the F11 key. Just like the other mode buttons on the status bar, the OTRACK button acts as a toggle, switching object snap tracking on and off as required. In order to demonstrate how useful object snap tracking and running object snaps are in combination, let' s try the rectangle and circle example again. First, we must ensure that the midpoint object snap is set as a running object snap and that running object snaps are turned on. We must also turn object snap tracking on. You can check all three things at the same time, using the Drafting Settings dialogue box. Right-click on the OTRACK button and choose "Settings…" from the context menu. To Draw the Rectangle Command: RECTANG Specify first corner point or [Chamfer/Elevation/Fillet/Thickness/Width]: (pick a point) Specify other corner point:
Prepared by: Yamanta Raj Niroula
323
An Introduction to AutoCAD
PENTASOFT
(pick another point to draw the rectangle, the size is not important)
To Draw the Circle Command: CIRCLE Specify center point for circle or [3P/2P/Ttr (tan tan radius)]:
Move the cursor close to the midpoint of one of the vertical sides and hover there for a second or so. The Midpoint osnap marker will appear and a small cross, indicating that a tracking point has been set. Now, move the cursor close to the midpoint of one of the horizontal sides and hover. When a second marker and cross appears, move the cursor close to the circle center position. Where the two tracking lines intersect, a third cross appears. Pick this point to specify the center of the circle. Diameter/: (move close to a corner and use the running endpoint osnap)
Notice that you were able to accurately locate the center point of the circle without using any temporary construction lines and without even picking any temporary points. Object snap tracking is probably one of the most useful tools that AutoCAD provides and it' s now difficult to imagine life without it.
Point Filters The point filters are another set of tools which can save you lots of time by allowing you to specify the third co-ordinate of any point picked in a 2D plane. For example, when you pick a point in plan view, AutoCAD fixes the X and Y co-ordinates from the cursor location. The Z co-ordinate is automatically set to zero or the current elevation value. Using a .XY (dot x y) filter, you can force AutoCAD to prompt you for a Z value. By this method it is possible to draw objects in 3D space whilst viewing your drawing in plan. Although there are six point filters in all, you will most likely find the .XY point filter of most use. This filter is particularly useful for specifying target and camera locations when setting up perspective views with the DVIEW command.
Prepared by: Yamanta Raj Niroula
324
An Introduction to AutoCAD
PENTASOFT
AutoCAD 2004 Command Aliases Command aliases are alternative names for AutoCAD commands. For example you can invoke the LINE command by entering L in command line. There is no need to type the complete name. Some commands have more than one alias. For instance CO and CP are both aliases for COPY. Some command aliases are longer than the command name. For example RECTANGLE is an alias for RECTANG. A good knowledge of command aliases can increase you speed in entering the commands at keyboard. Unfortunately the AutoCAD 2004 online help does not contain the list of command aliases. Below, you will find a complete list of command aliases as they are defined in the default AutoCAD Program Parameters file (ACAD.PGP).
3D
Command 3DARRAY 3DFACE 3DORBIT 3DPOLY
A
Command ADCENTER ALIGN APPLOAD ARC AREA ARRAY -ARRAY ATTDEF -ATTDEF ATTEDIT -ATTEDIT ATTEXT
Prepared by: Yamanta Raj Niroula
Alias(es) 3A 3F 3DO, ORBIT 3P
Alias(es) ADC, DC, DCENTER, CONTENT AL AP A AA AR -AR ATT, DDATTDEF -ATT ATE, DDATTE -ATE, ATTE DDATTEXT
325
An Introduction to AutoCAD
B
Command BHATCH BLOCK -BLOCK BOUNDARY -BOUNDARY BREAK
C
Command CHAMFER CHANGE CHECKSTANDARDS CIRCLE COLOR COPY
D
Command DBCONNECT DDEDIT DDGRIPS DDVPOINT DIMALIGNED DIMANGULAR DIMBASELINE DIMCENTER DIMCONTINUE DIMDIAMETER DIMDISASSOCIATE DIMEDIT DIMLINEAR DIMORDINATE DIMOVERRIDE DIMRADIUS DIMREASSOCIATE DIMSTYLE DIMTEDIT
Prepared by: Yamanta Raj Niroula
PENTASOFT
Alias(es) BH, H B, ACADBLOCKDIALOG, BMAKE, BMOD -B BO, BPOLY -BO BR
Alias(es) CHA -CH CHK C COL, COLOUR, DDCOLOR CO, CP
Alias(es) DBC, AAD, AEX, ALI, ASQ, ARO, ASE ED GR VP DAL, DIMALI DAN, DIMANG DBA, DIMBASE DCE DCO, DIMCONT DDI, DIMDIA DDA DED, DIMED DLI, DIMLIN, DIMHORIZONTAL, DIMROTATED, DIMVERTICAL DOR, DIMORD DOV, DIMOVER DRA, DIMRAD DRE D, DST, DIMSTY, DDIM DIMTED
326
An Introduction to AutoCAD
PENTASOFT
DIST DIVIDE DONUT DRAWORDER DSETTINGS DSVIEWER
DI DIV DO, DOUGHNUT DR DDRMODES, DS, SE AV
DVIEW
DV
E
Command ELLIPSE ERASE EXPLODE EXPORT EXTEND EXTRUDE
F
Command FILLET FILTER
G
Command GROUP -GROUP
H
Command HATCH HATCHEDIT HIDE
Prepared by: Yamanta Raj Niroula
Alias EL E X EXP EX EXT
Alias F FI
Alias G -G
Alias -H HE HI
327
An Introduction to AutoCAD
I
Command IMAGE -IMAGE IMAGEADJUST IMAGEATTACH IMAGECLIP IMPORT INSERT -INSERT INSERTOBJ INTERFERE INTERSECT
L
Command LAYER -LAYER -LAYOUT LEADER LENGTHEN LINE LINETYPE -LINETYPE LIST LTSCALE LWEIGHT
M
Command MATCHPROP MEASURE MIRROR MLINE MOVE MSPACE MTEXT -MTEXT MVIEW
Prepared by: Yamanta Raj Niroula
PENTASOFT
Alias(es) IM -IM IAD IAT ICL IMP I, INSERTURL, DDINSERT -I IO INF IN
Alias(es) LA, DDLMODES -LA LO LEAD LEN L LT, LTYPE, DDLTYPE -LT, -LTYPE LI, LS LTS LINEWEIGHT, LW
Alias(es) MA, PAINTER ME MI ML M MS MT, T -T MV
328
An Introduction to AutoCAD
O
Command OFFSET OPEN OPTIONS OSNAP -OSNAP
P
Command PAN -PAN -PARTIALOPEN PASTESPEC PEDIT PLINE PLOT PLOTSTAMP POINT POLYGON PREVIEW PROPERTIES PROPERTIESCLOSE PSPACE PUBLISHTOWEB PURGE -PURGE
Q
Command QLEADER QUIT
Prepared by: Yamanta Raj Niroula
PENTASOFT
Alias(es) O OPENURL, DXFIN OP, PREFERENCES OS, DDOSNAP -OS
Alias(es) P -P PARTIALOPEN PA PE PL PRINT, DWFOUT DDPLOTSTAMP PO POL PRE CH, MO, PR, PROPS, DDCHPROP, DDMODIFY PRCLOSE PS PTW PU -PU
Alias LE EXIT
329
An Introduction to AutoCAD
R
Command RECTANG REDRAW REDRAWALL REGEN REGENALL REGION RENAME -RENAME RENDER REVOLVE ROTATE RPREF
S
Command SAVE SAVEAS SCALE SCRIPT SECTION SETVAR SHADEMODE SLICE SNAP SOLID SPELL SPLINE SPLINEDIT STANDARDS STRETCH STYLE SUBTRACT
Prepared by: Yamanta Raj Niroula
PENTASOFT
Alias(es) REC, RECTANGLE R RA RE REA REG REN -REN RR REV RO RPR
Alias(es) SAVEURL DXFOUT SC SCR SEC SET SHA, SHADE SL SN SO SP SPL SPE STA S ST, DDSTYLE SU
330
An Introduction to AutoCAD
T
Command TABLET TEXT THICKNESS TILEMODE TOLERANCE TOOLBAR TOOLPALETTES TORUS TRIM
U
Command UCS UCSMAN UNION UNITS -UNITS
V
Command VIEW VPORTS -VIEW VPOINT
W
Command WBLOCK -WBLOCK WEDGE
Prepared by: Yamanta Raj Niroula
PENTASOFT
Alias(es) TA DT, DTEXT TH TI, TM TOL TO TP TOR TR
Alias(es) DDUCS UC, DDUCS, DDUCSP UNI DDUNITS, UN -UN
Alias V, DDVIEW VIEWPORTS -V -VP
Alias(es) W, ACADWBLOCKDIALOG -W WE
331
An Introduction to AutoCAD
X
Command XATTACH XBIND -XBIND XCLIP XLINE XREF -XREF
Z
Command ZOOM
Prepared by: Yamanta Raj Niroula
PENTASOFT
Alias XA XB -XB XC XL XR -XR
Alias Z
332